T PRO 4000 Manual PDF

T-PRO
Transformer Protection Relay

Model 4000
User Manual
Version 1.2 Rev 1
Preface
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2014 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd. is strictly forbidden.
This manual is part of a complete set of product documentation that includes
detailed drawings and operation. Users should evaluate the information in the
context of the complete set of product documentation and their particular
applications. ERLPhase assumes no liability for any incidental, indirect or
consequential damages arising from the use of this documentation.
While all information presented is believed to be reliable and in accordance
with accepted engineering practices, ERLPhase makes no warranties as to the
completeness of the information.
All trademarks used in association with B-PRO, B-PRO Multi Busbar, Multi
Busbar Protection, F-PRO, iTMU, L-PRO, ProLogic, S-PRO, T-PRO,
TESLA, I/O Expansion Module, TESLA Control Panel, Relay Control Panel,
RecordGraph and RecordBase are trademarks of ERLPhase Power
Technologies Ltd.
Windows® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
HyperTerminal® is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve.
Modbus® is a registered trademark of Modicon.
Contact Information
ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd
Website: www.erlphase.com
Email: [email protected]
Technical Support
Email: [email protected]
Tel: 1-204-477-0591
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual i

Using This Guide
This User Manual describes the installation and operation of the T-PRO trans-
former protection relay. It is intended to support the first time user and clarify
the details of the equipment.
The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information:
Example Describes
Start>Settings>Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set-

tings submenu on the Start menu.
Right-click Click the right mouse button.
Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics.
Service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold.
Text boxes similar to this one Relate important notes and information.
.. Indicates more screens.
Indicates further drop-down menu, click to dis-

play list.
Indicates a warning.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual iii

Acronyms
ASG - Active Setting Group
CID - file extension (.CID) for Configured IED Description

CT - Current Transformer
DCE - Data Communication Equipment

DIB - Digital Input Board
DIGIO - Digital Input/Output Board
DSP - Digital signal processor
DTE - Data Terminal Equipment
GFPCB - Graphics Front Panel Comm Board

GFPDB - Graphics Front Panel Display Board
GPS - Global Positioning System
HMI - Human Machine Interface
ICD - file extension (.ICD) for IED Capability Description

IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
IED - Intelligent Electronic Device
IP - Internet Protocol (IP) address
IRIG-B - Inter-range instrumentation group time codes
LED - Light-emitting Diode

LHS - Left Hand Side
LOCB - L-PRO Output Contact Board
LOCBH - L-PRO Output Contact Board - HCFI
MPB - Main Processor Board

MPC - Micro Processor
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual v

Acronyms
PLC - Programmable Logic Controller
RAIB -Relay AC Analog Input Board

RASB -Relay AC Analog Sensor Boards
RHS - Right Hand Side
ROCOD ?Rate of Change of Differential
RPCB - Rear Panel Comm Board
RTOS - Real Time Operating System
RTU - Remote Terminal Unit
SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition

SG - Setting Group
TUI - Terminal User Interface
UI - User Interface
VI - Virtual Input
vi T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Table of Contents
Preface ......................................................................................i
Contact Information ...................................................................i
Using This Guide ..................................................................... iii
Table of Contents .....................................................................v
Acronyms................................................................................. ix
PC System Requirements and Software Installation ............... xi
Version Compatibility ............................................................. xiii
1 Overview ................................................................. 1-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 1-1
Front View........................................................................ 1-3
Back View ........................................................................ 1-4
Model Options/Ordering................................................... 1-6
2 Setup and Communications.................................. 2-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 2-1
Power Supply................................................................... 2-1
IRIG-B Time Input ............................................................ 2-2
Communicating with the T-PRO Relay ........................... 2-3
USB Link .......................................................................... 2-4
Network Link .................................................................... 2-7
Direct Serial Link.............................................................. 2-8
Modem Link ................................................................... 2-10
Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s Maintenance
Menu .............................................................................. 2-13
Firmware Update ........................................................... 2-16
Setting the Baud Rate.................................................... 2-17
Accessing the Relay’s SCADA Services........................ 2-18
Communication Port Details .......................................... 2-20
3 Using the IED (Getting Started) ............................ 3-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 3-1
Start-up Sequence ........................................................... 3-1
Interfacing with the Relay................................................. 3-1
Front Panel Display.......................................................... 3-2
Terminal Mode ................................................................. 3-7
Relay Control Panel ......................................................... 3-7
4 Protection Functions and Specifications ............ 4-1
Protection and Recording Functions................................ 4-1
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual vii

Table of Contents
ProLogic......................................................................... 4-43
Group Logic ................................................................... 4-45
Recording Functions ...................................................... 4-46
Fault Recorder ............................................................... 4-47
Trend Recorder.............................................................. 4-48
Event Log....................................................................... 4-49
Fault Log ....................................................................... 4-50
Output Matrix ................................................................. 4-51
5 Data Communications ........................................... 5-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 5-1
SCADA Protocol .............................................................. 5-1
IEC61850 Communication ............................................... 5-7
6 Offliner Settings Software ..................................... 6-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 6-1
Offliner Features .............................................................. 6-3
Offliner Keyboard Shortcuts............................................. 6-6
Handling Backward Compatibility .................................... 6-7
Main Branches from the Tree View.................................. 6-9
RecordBase View Software ........................................... 6-33
7 Acceptance/Protection Function Test Guide ...... 7-1
Relay Testing ................................................................... 7-1
Testing the External Inputs .............................................. 7-4
Testing the Output Relay Contacts .................................. 7-5
T-PRO Test Procedure Outline........................................ 7-6
T-PRO Differential Slope Test Example ........................ 7-43
T- PRO Single-Phase Slope Test .................................. 7-56
8 Installation .............................................................. 8-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 8-1
Physical Mounting............................................................ 8-1
AC and DC Wiring............................................................ 8-1
Communication Wiring..................................................... 8-1
Appendix A IED Specifications..................................... A-1
Frequency Element Operating Time Curves.................... A-6
Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges ......................... B-1
Appendix C Hardware Description ............................... C-1
Appendix D Event Messages ....................................... D-1
Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol .... E-1
Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile ................................. F-1
viii T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Table of Contents
Appendix G Mechanical Drawings ...............................G-1

Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings................................ H-1
Appendix I AC Schematic Drawing ............................... I-1
Appendix J DC Schematic Drawing ..............................J-1
Appendix K Function Logic Diagram............................ K-1
Appendix L Current Phase Correction Table ............... L-1
Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Insulation ................ M-1
Appendix N Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature
Calculation ................................................................... N-1
Appendix O Temperature Probe Connections .............O-1
Appendix P Failure Modes ........................................... P-1
Actions ............................................................................. P-1
Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation........................Q-1
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
(PICS) ..............................................................................Q-1
Data Mapping Specifications ...........................................Q-9
Index ..........................................................................................I
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual ix

PC System Requirements and Software
Installation
Hardware
The minimum hardware requirements are:
• 1 GHz processor
• 2 GB RAM
• 20 GB available hard disk space
• USB port
• Serial communication port
Operating System
The following software must be installed and functional prior to installing the
applications:
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 or
• Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Service Pack 1
Software Installation
The CD-ROM contains software and the User Manual for the T-PRO Trans-
former Protection Relay.
Software is installed directly from the CD-ROM to a Windows PC. Alterna-
tively, create installation diskettes to install software on computers without a
CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM contains the following:
• T-PRO Offliner Settings: Offliner settings program for the T-PRO relay
• T-PRO Firmware: Firmware and installation instructions.
• T-PRO User Manual: T-PRO manual in PDF format
• Relay Control Panel: software
• Relay Control Panel User Manual: manual in PDF format
• USB Driver
To Install Software on your Computer

Insert the CD-ROM in your drive. The CD-ROM should open automatically.
If the CD-ROM does not open automatically, go to Windows Explorer and find
the CD-ROM (usually on D drive). Open the ERLPhase.exe file to launch the
CD-ROM.
To install the software on your computer, click the desired item on the screen.
The installation program launches automatically. Installation may take a few
minutes to start.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual xi

System Requirements
To view the T-PRO User Manual the user must have Adobe Acrobat on your
computer. If a copy is needed, download a copy by clicking on Download Ado-
be Acrobat.
Anti-virus/Anti-spyware Software
If an anti-virus/anti-spyware software on your local system identifies any of
the ERLPhase applications as a “potential threat”, it will be necessary to con-
figure your anti-virus/anti-software to classify it as “safe” for its proper oper-
ation. Please consult the appropriate anti-virus/anti-spyware software
documentation to determine the relevant procedure.
xii T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Version Compatibility
This chart indicates the versions of Offliner Settings, RecordBase View and
the User Manual which are compatible with different versions of T-PRO firm-
ware.
RecordBase View and Offliner Settings are backward compatible with all ear-
lier versions of records and setting files. You can use RecordBase View to view
records produced by any version of T-PRO firmware and Offliner Settings can
create and edit older setting file versions.
Minor releases (designated with a letter suffix - e.g. v3.1a) maintain the same
compatibility as their base version. For example. T-PRO firmware v3.1c and
Offliner Settings v3.1a are compatible.
T-PRO Firmware/Software Compatibility Guide
Compatible
Setting Compatible ICD File
T-PRO Firmware RCP Version RecordBase
Version Offliner Settings Version
View
v1.2 v2.5 or greater 403 v1.3 or greater v3.0 or greater 3.0
v1.0a v2.0 or greater 401 v1.0 or greater v3.0 or greater 2.0
Please contact ERLPhase Customer Service for complete Revision History.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual xiii

1 Overview
1.1 Introduction
The T-PRO 4000 is a numerical relay providing protection, monitoring, log-
ging and recording for a Transformer. A patented Transformer Overload Early
Warning System (TOEWS) algorithm, based on IEEE C57.91 Loss of Life de-
sign standards, determines safe transformer loading conditions and issues early
warning on over loading and aging conditions.
The Relay Control Panel (RCP) is the Windows graphical user interface soft-
ware tool provided with all 4000 series and new generation ERL relays to com-
municate, retrieve and manage records, fault logs, event logs, manage settings
(identification, protection, SCADA etc.) and display real time metering values,
view, analyze.
The primary protection is percent restrained current differential. The restraint
is user-definable. 2nd and 5th harmonic restraint are provided as well as a high
current unrestrained setting.
To provide a complete package of protection and control, T-PRO provides oth-
er functions such as:
• Low Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (87N) / High Impedance Restricted
Earth Fault (50N)
• Digital control of current inputs
• Temperature monitoring
• TOEWS for asset monitoring loss of life
• Adaptive Pickup Overcurrent, Thermal Overload, Directional Overcurrent
and Neutral Overcurrent
• Breaker Fail function for each current input
• Overexcitation, Definite Time and Inverse Time
• Fixed Level or Rate of Change of Overfrequency and Underfrequency
• Phase Undervoltage, Phase Overvoltage and Neutral Overvoltage
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
• Through Fault Monitoring
• ProLogic control statements to address special protection and control needs
• 96 Sample per cycle recording of all analog channels and events
• Trend Recording
• 8 Setting Groups (SG) with setting group logic
Relay Control Panel (RCP) is the Windows graphical user interface software
tool provided with 4000 series and higher (new generation) ERL relays to com-
municate, retrieve and manage records, event logs, fault logs, manage settings
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual 1-1

1 Overview
(identification, protection, SCADA etc.,), display real time metering values,

view, analyze, and export records in COMTRADE format.
In addition to the protection functions the relay provides fault recording (96
samples/cycle) to facilitate analysis of the power system after a disturbance has
taken place. The triggers for fault recording are established by programming
the output matrix and allowing any internal relay function or any external input
to initiate a recording. The T-PRO can also create continuous, slow-speed
trend recording of the transformer and its characteristics with an adjustable
sample period. Trend records can be stored for 30 to 600 days depending on
the sample period.
High Voltage (HV)

50
BF-1
PT 52
51 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 27-1 27-2 59N 59-1 59-2
51 Rec 51N 50N 87N

ADP 24-1
DEF
Through Fault Monitor
50 24-2 ProLogic
DEF Tertiary
Voltage (TV)
THD 24 49-1 to 49-12
5INV
49/TOEWS 52
Rec 60
Rec 51N 50N 87N

67 Rec
Rec 51N 50N 87N
52
50
87 Rec 51 50
BF-3
50
Rec 51 50
BF-2
Low Voltage (LV)

18 Analog Inputs 21 Output Contacts (4U) Fault Records T-PRO can be used for a two (2)
20 External Inputs (4U) 14 Output Contacts (3U) Trend Records or three (3) winding transformer
9 External Inputs (3U) 1 Relay Inoperative Sequence of Event Records with up to five (5) sets of CT inputs
2 Temperature Alarm Contact (three (3) winding example shown).
Inputs
IRIG-B Time Sync
Figure 1.1: T-PRO Function Line Diagram
1-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

1 Overview
1.2 Front View
1 2
T-PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY RELAY FUNCTIONAL
IRIG-B FUNCTIONAL
SERVICE REQUIRED
ALARM
TEST MODE
(119) (150)
100BASE-T USB
4 5 6 3
1. Front display of time, alarms, relay target, metering and settings
2. LEDs indicating status of relay
3. USB Port 150 for maintenance interface, setting changes and calibration
4. Push buttons to manipulate information on display and to clear targets
5. 11 programmable target LED's
6. Ethernet Port 119
Figure 1.2: T-PRO Front View (3U)
1 2
T-PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY

RELAY FUNCTIONAL
IRIG-B FUNCTIONAL
SERVICE REQUIRED
ALARM
TEST MODE
(119) (150)
100BASE-T USB
4 5 6 3
1. Front display of time, alarms, relay target, metering and settings

2. LEDs indicating status of relay
3. USB Port 150 for maintenance interface, setting changes and calibration
4. Push buttons to manipulate information on display and to clear targets
5. 11 programmable target LED's
6. Ethernet Port 119
Figure 1.3: T-PRO Front View (4U)

1 Overview
1.3 Back View
9 10 11 12 13
8
8
15
14 16 17 18
7. Ports 100-117: 9 External Programmable Inputs

8. Ports 200-201: Relay inoperative contact
Ports 202-229: 14 programmable output contacts
Ports 230-235: Unused
9. Port 118: Internal modem
10. Port 119-120: 100BASE-T or 100BASE-FX Ethernet Ports
11. Port 121: External clock, IRIG-B modulated or unmodulated
12. Port 122: SCADA
13. Port 123: Direct/Modem RS-232 Port
14. Ports 330-333: AC voltage inputs
15. Ports 300-329: AC current inputs
16. Ports 334, 335: Unused
17. Ports 336-337: Power supply
18. Port with GND symbol: Chassis Ground
Figure 1.4: T-PRO Back View (3U)

1 Overview
8 9 10 11 12
13
17 14 15 16 18
7. Ports 100-117, 400-421: 20 External Programmable Inputs

8. Port 118: Internal modem
9. Port 119-120: 100BASE-T or 100BASE-FX Ethernet Ports
10. Port 121: External clock, IRIG-B modulated or unmodulated
11. Port 122: SCADA
12. Port 123: Direct/Modem RS-232 Port
13. Port 200-229, 422-435: 21 programmable output contacts
14. Port 330-333: AC voltage inputs
15. Port 334-335: unused
16. Port 336-337: Power supply
17. Port 300-329: AC current inputs
18. Port with GND symbol: Case ground
Figure 1.5: T-PRO Back View (4U)
AC Current and T-PRO is provided with terminal blocks for up to 15 ac currents and 3 phase-
Voltage Inputs to-neutral voltages.
Each of the current input circuits has polarity (·) marks.
A complete schematic of current and voltage circuits is shown, for details see
“AC Schematic Drawing” in Appendix I and “DC Schematic Drawing”
in Appendix J.
External Inputs The T-PRO relay has:

• 9 programmable external inputs in the standard 3U model
• 20 external inputs in the optional 4U model
External dc voltage of either 48 Vdc, 110/125 Vdc or 220/250 Vdc nominal are
possible depending on the range requested. Selection of specific voltage is fac-
tory selectable.
To guarantee security from spurious voltage pulses, the T-PRO has an external
input pickup filter setting. This setting is made in Relay Control Panel under
Utilities > External Inputs. The setting is an integer number representing the
number of samples in a packet of 12 that must be recognized by the DSP as
high before an External Input status is changed from low to high. See specifi-

1 Overview
cations for External Input Pickup Filter in “IED Specifications” in Appendix

A.
Temperature The T-PRO 4000 is capable of receiving 2 sets of isolated 4-20 mA current
Inputs loops for ambient and top oil temperatures. This optional feature has to be
specified while ordering.
Output Relay The T-PRO Relay has:

Contacts • 14 configurable output relay contacts in the standard 3U model
• 21 configurable outputs in the optional 4U model.
Each contact is programmable and has breaker tripping capability. All output
contacts are isolated from each other. The output contacts are closed for a min-
imum of 120 ms after the initiating element drops out.
Relay If the relay is in self check mode or becomes inoperative, then the Relay Inop-
Inoperative erative Alarm output contact closes and all tripping functions are blocked.
Alarm Output
1.4 Model Options/Ordering

T-PRO is available as a horizontal mount, for details see “Mechanical Draw-
ings” in Appendix G.
T-PRO is available with an optional internal modem card.
The two rear Ethernet ports can be ordered as one copper-one optical port or
both optical ports or both copper ports. T-PRO is available with an optional
two temperature inputs (Ambient & Top-Oil).
These ports on the rear panel are available as either 100BASE-T (RJ-45) or
100BASE-FX (optical ST).
The CT inputs are 1 A nominal or 5 A nominal.
The external inputs are 48 Vdc, 110/125 Vdc or 220/250 Vdc.
The system base frequency is either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
The T-PRO 4000 is available in a standard 3U rack model or as 4U model with
an optional I/O board as described above.
All of the above options must be specified at the time of ordering.

2 Setup and Communications
2.1 Introduction
This chapter discusses setting up and communicating with the T-PRO relay in-
cluding the following:
• Power supply
• Inter-Range Instrumentation Group time codes (IRIG-B) time input
• Communicating with the relay using a network link
• Communication with the relay using a direct serial link
• Using a Modem link (internal, external)
• Using ERLPhase Relay Control Panel to access the relay’s user interface
• Using HyperTerminal to access the relay’s Maintenance and Update menus
• Setting the Baud rate
• Accessing the relay’s Supervisory Control Data Acquisition (SCADA)
services
2.2 Power Supply

A wide range power supply is standard. The nominal operating range is 48 –
250 Vdc, 100 – 240 Vac, +/-10%, 50/60 Hz. To protect against a possible short
circuit in the supply, the power supply should be protected with an inline fuse
or circuit breaker with a 5 A rating.
Ensure that the chassis is grounded for proper operation and safety.
There are no power switches on the relay. When the power supply is connect-
ed, the relay starts its initialization process. For details see “Start-up Sequence”
on page 3-1.
Case You must ground the relay to the station ground using the case-grounding ter-
Grounding minal at the back of the relay, for details see Figure 1.4: T-PRO Back View
(3U) on page 1-4.
WARNING!
Ground the relay to station ground using the case-grounding terminal

at the back of the relay, for details see Figure 1.4: T-PRO Back View
(3U) on page 1-4

2.3 IRIG-B Time Input

The T-PRO is equipped to handle IRIG-B modulated or unmodulated signals
and detects either automatically. The IRIG-B time signal is connected to the
Port 121 (BNC connector) on the back of the relay. When the IRIG-B signal is
healthy and connected to the relay, the IRIG-B Functional LED on the front of
the relay will illuminate and the relay’s internal clock will be synchronized to
this signal.
Satellite Clock IRIG-B to

T-PRO BNC Port 121
Modulated or Unmodulated IRIG-B

### ## ## ## ## ## ##
GPS Satellite Clock - IRIG-B
Figure 2.1: T-PRO IRIG-B Clock Connection
In order to set the time in the T-PRO relay, access the setting in Relay Control
Panel under the Utilities > Time tab, which is shown in Figure 2.2: on page 2-
2. The “Use IEEE 1344" setting allows the T-PRO to utilize the year extension
if it is received in the IRIG-B signal. If the available IRIG-B signal has no year
extension, this setting should be disabled.
Figure 2.2: Relay Control Panel Date/Time Settings

2.4 Communicating with the T-PRO Relay

Connect to the relay to access its user interface and SCADA services by:
• Front USB 2.0 Service port (Port 150)
• 1 front Ethernet and 1 rear copper or optical Ethernet network links (Port
119)
• Additional optical Ethernet port (Port 120)
• Direct user interface and SCADA serial links (Ports 122 and 123)
• Internal Modem RJ-11 (Port 118)
• IRIG-B Time Synchronization (Port 121)
Figure 2.3: T-PRO Rear Ports
Aside from Maintenance and Update functions which will use a VT100 (e.g.,
Hyperterminal) connection, all other functions access the T-PRO user interfac-
es through ERLPhase Relay Control Panel software.

2.5 USB Link
The PC must be appropriately configured for USB Serial communi-

cation.
USB Direct
Connect to Port 150
Figure 2.4: Direct USB Link
The T-PRO front USB Port 150 is also known as the Service Port. To create a
USB link between the T-PRO and the computer, connect the computer USB
port to the Port 150 on the T-PRO front panel using a standard USB peripheral
cable.
The USB driver is available on the CD-ROM as well as in the Support Soft-
ware downloads section on the
ERLPhase website: http://erlphase.com/support.php?ID=software.
See below under USB Driver a detail explanation on how to install the USB
Driver. Ensure the relay port and computer port have the same baud rate and
communication parameters.
The relays USB port appears as a serial port to the computer and is fixed at 8
data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. The T-PRO Port 150 default baud rate is 115,200
When you connect to the T-PRO Service Port, Relay Control Panel will prompt
for a Service Access Password. Enter the default password service in lower-
case.
USB Driver Installation

To create an USB link between the relay and the computer, first the USB driver
for the ERLPhase 4000 series device needs to be installed, as follows:
Unzip the file (can be obtained from ERL website):
ERLPhase_USB_driver.zip
In this case we assume you unzipped to the desktop.
In Windows XP or Windows 7
Power on the T-PRO and wait until the “Relay Functional” LED lights up;
connect a USB port of the PC to Port 150 (USB front) of the T-PRO 4000.

In the window
“Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard”
“Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software?”
Check the option “No, not this time”.
In the window
“This wizard helps you install software for:”
“ERLPhase 4000 Series Device”
“What do you want the wizard to do?”
Check the option “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)”.
In the window
“Please choose your search and installation options”
“Search for the best driver in these locations”
Uncheck the option “Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM.)”.
Check the option “Include this location in the search”.
Browse for the following folder:
C:\WINDOWS\tiinst\TUSB3410
In the window
“Hardware Installation”
“The software you are installing for this hardware”
“has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with
Windows XP”
Hit Continue Anyway.
In the window
“Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”
“The wizard has finished installing the software for”
Hit Finish.
To verify the installation was successful, and to which comm port is the ER-
LPhase 4000 Series Device configured, do the following:

In Windows XP go to
Start > Control Panel->Performance and Maintenance->System
>Hardware > Device Manager > Ports
or (if using Control Panel’s Classic View)
Start > Control Panel > System > Hardware >Device Manager >Ports
In Windows 7 'small icons' view go to
Start>Control Panel>Device Manager>Ports
Look for the port number associated to this device
Look for a COM#, where “#” can be 1, 2, 3, etc. Leave the default set-
tings for this port.
It is recommended to restart the PC after the USB driver installation.
The default baud rate for the relay USB Port 150 is 115200, however to double
check it login to the relay display and go to:
Main Menu > System > Relay Comm Setup
Figure 2.5: Logging into the Service Port 150 in Relay Control Panel

2.6 Network Link

Access the relay’s user interface and DNP3 SCADA services simultaneously
with the Ethernet TCP/IP (Internet Protocol) LAN link through the rear net-
work ports Port 119 and Port 120. Ports 119 and 120 are either 100BASE-T
copper interface with an RJ-45 connector or 100BASE-FX optical interface
with an ST style connector. Each port is factory configurable as a copper or op-
tical interface. The front Port 119 is 100BASE-T copper interface with an RJ-
45 connector.
Port 119 or 120
Computer with TCP/IP TCP/IP

Network T-PRO Port 119 RJ-45 Network
Figure 2.6: Network Link
DNP3 SCADA services can also be accessed over the LAN, for details see Ta-
ble 2.4: Communication Port Details on page 2-20.
Connect to the Ethernet LAN using a CAT 5 cable with an RJ-45 connector or
100BASE-FX 1300 nm, multimode optical fiber with an ST style connector.
By default, the Port 119 is assigned with an IP address of 192.168.100.80. Port
120 is assigned with an IP address of 192.168.101.80. If this address is not suit-
able, it may be modified using the relay’s Maintenance Menu. For details see
“Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s Maintenance Menu” on page 2-
13.

2.7 Direct Serial Link

To create a serial link between the relay and the computer, connect the com-
puter’s serial port and Port 123 on the relay’s rear panel, provided the port is
not configured for modem use. When connected, run Relay Control Panel to
establish the communication link.
Computer Direct Serial

to T-PRO Port 123 RS-232
Figure 2.7: Direct Serial Link
The serial ports are configured as EIR RS-232 Data Communications Equip-
ment (DCE) devices with female DB9 connectors. This allows them to be con-
nected directly to a computer serial port with standard straight-through male-
to female serial cable. For pin-out details see Table 2.4: Communication Port
Details on page 2-20. Rear Port 122 is for SCADA and Port 123 can be used
for direct serial access and external modem.
Ensure the relay port and the computer port have the same baud rate
and communications parameters.

Figure 2.8: Port 123 Direct Serial Configuration in Relay Control Panel

2.8 Modem Link

External Modem Access the T-PRO’s user interface through a telephone link between the relay
and the computer by using an external modem.
Modem to T-PRO
Port 123 RS-232 Analog
Modem Phone Lines
Telephone
System
Figure 2.9: Modem External Link
Connect the serial port of the external modem to the Port 123 on the T-PRO
rear panel. Both devices are configured as RS-232 DCE devices with female
connectors, so the cable between the relay and the modem requires a crossover
and a gender change. Alternatively, use the ERLPhase modem port adapter
provided with the relay to make Port 123 appear the same as a computer’s se-
rial port. A standard modem-to-computer serial cable can then be used to con-
nect the modem to the relay. For pin-out details see “Communication Port
Details” on page 2-20.
Connect the modem to an analog telephone line or switch using a standard RJ-
11 connector.
In Relay Control Panel, configure the relay’s Port 123 to work with a modem.
Go to Utilities > Communication and select Port 123. Set the Baud Rate as
high as possible; most modems handle 57,600 bps. The Modem Initialize
String setting allows the user to set the control codes sent to the modem at the
start of each connection session. The external modem factory defaults initial-
ization string is “M0S0=0”.

Figure 2.10: Port 123 Settings for External Modem Link in Relay Control Panel

Internal Modem Access the T-PRO user interface through a telephone link between the relay
and the computer using an optional internal modem. If the modem has been in-
stalled, Port 118 on the rear panel is labelled Internal Modem and the modem
hardware is configured inside the relay.
Connect the relay’s Port 118 to an analog telephone line or switch using a stan-
dard RJ-11 connector.
Computer Modem to
T-PRO Internal Modem
Analog
Port 118 RJ-11
Phone Lines
Telephone
System
Figure 2.11: Internal Modem Link
The appropriate Port 118 settings are configured at the factory when the inter-
nal modem is installed. The factory default initialization string for and Internal
modem is “M0S0=0”.
Figure 2.12: T-PRO Internal Modem Settings in Relay Control Panel (circled settings
are available when Internal Modem is installed)

2.9 Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s

Maintenance Menu
This section describes how to configure a standard Windows VT-100 terminal
program on the computer for use with the T-PRO in order to access the T-PRO
maintenance and update functions.
The computer must be connected to the relay via the front USB service port
150.
The relay is accessed using a standard VT-100 terminal style program on the
computer, eliminating the need for specialized software. Any terminal program
that fully supports VT-100 emulation and provides Z-modem file transfer ser-
vices can be used. For example, the HyperTerminal program, which is includ-
ed in Windows XP and is also available separately as HyperTerminal PE, is
used here as an example.
Configure the terminal program as described in Table 2.1: on page 2-13 and
link it to the appropriate serial port, modem or TCP/IP socket on the computer.
Table 2.1: Terminal Program Setup
Baud rate Default fixed baud rate 115,200 N81 (no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit).
Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow control Hardware or Software.

Hardware flow control is recommended. The relay automatically sup-
ports both on all its serial ports.
Function, arrow Terminal keys

and control keys
Emulation VT100
Font Use a font that supports line drawing (e.g. Terminal or MS Line Draw).
If the menu appears outlined in odd characters, the font selected is not
supporting line drawing characters.
To configure HyperTerminal follow this instructions:

In Windows 7 open HyperTerminal PE; in Windows XP go to
Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal
If “Default Telnet Program?” windows pops up,
Check “Don’t ask me this question again”
Hit No.
First time use of HyperTerminal will ask for “Location Information”.

Fill with appropriate information, e.g.:

“What country/region are you in now”
Choose “Canada”
“What area code (or city code) are you are in now?”
Enter “306”
“If you need to specify a carrier code, what is it?”
Enter “”, i.e. leave blank
“If you dial a number to access an outside line, what is it?”
Enter “”.
“The phone system at this location uses:”
Choose “Tone dialing”.
Hit OK.
First time use of HyperTerminal will show “Phone and Modem Options”.
Hit Cancel.
Hyperterminal will show initially “Connection Description”.

Enter a name for the relay, e.g: “TPRO4000”.
Hit OK.
In the window “Connect To”

“Connect using”
Choose “COM#”, where “#” was obtained previously in Section 2.5 USB
Link, after installing the USB driver.
Let’s assume in this case it is COM3.
In the window “COM3 Properties” choose:

“115200”
“8”
“None”
“1”
“Hardware”
Hit Apply then hit OK
At this time the connection should already be established.
Hit Enter in the terminal window.
To initiate a connection with the relay use HyperTerminal’s Call > Connect
function.

When the connection is established, press Enter in the terminal window. At the
login prompt, enter maintenance in lower case, which will bring up the menu
shown in Figure 2.13: Maintenance Menu on page 2-15.
Figure 2.13: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance
Menu
Commands 1, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 10 are Port 150 access only.
Commands
Table 2.2: Maintenance Menu Commands
Modify IP address Modifies the LAN IP addresses, network mask, default gateway
and IEC61850 network port assignment.
View system diagnostic Displays the internal status log.
Retrieve system diagnos- Automatically packages up the internal status log plus setting
tics and setup information and downloads it in compressed form to
the computer. This file can then be sent to our customer support
to help diagnose a problem.
Restore settings (com- Use these commands to force the system back to default val-
mands 4, 5 and 6) ues, if a problem is suspected due to the unit's settings, calibra-
tion and/or setup parameters.
Force hardware reset Manually initiates a hardware reset. Note that the
communication link is immediately lost and cannot be reestab-
lished until the unit completes its start-up.

Table 2.2: Maintenance Menu Commands
Network utilities Enters network utilities sub-menu, for details see Table 2.3: Net-
work Utilities on page 2-16.
Monitor SCADA Shows real time display of SCADA data.
Modify IEC61850 IED Modifies IED name of the IEC61850 device. This name has to
name match the name in the CID file and the name change via this
command shall be coordinated with the new CID file download.
Table 2.3: Network Utilities
View protocol statistics View IP, TCP and UDP statistics.
View active socket states View current states of active sockets.
View routing tables View routing tables.
Ping Check network connection to given point.
Exit network utilities Exit network utilities menu and return to Maintenance
Menu Commands.
2.10 Firmware Update

The relay has an “update” login that can be accessed by a connection through
a VT100 terminal emulator (such as HyperTerminal). This login is available
only from Port 150.
1. Use the terminal program to connect to USB service Port 150.
2. Select Enter: the terminal responds with a login prompt.
3. Login as update in lower case.
4. The firmware update is used to update the relay’s internal software with the
latest maintenance or enhancement releases. Please see the T-PRO Firm-
ware Update Procedure documentation that comes with the firmware update
file and instructions.
Note: The mouse does not work in VT100 terminal mode.

2.11 Setting the Baud Rate
The baud rate is available on the LCD screen from the top level menu
selecting System then Relay Comm Setup.
Direct Serial For a direct serial connection, both the relay and the computer must be set to
Link the same baud rate.
To change the baud rate of a relay serial port:
1. The user needs to log into the relay as Change (any port) or Service (USB
port only) using RCP.
2. Then choose Utilities>Communication tab.
Modem Link Unlike a direct serial link, the baud rates for a modem link do not have to be
the same on the computer and on the relay. The modems automatically nego-
tiate an optimal baud rate for their communication.
The baud rate set on the relay only affects the rate at which the relay commu-
nicates with the modem. Similarly, the baud rate set in HyperTerminal only af-
fects the rate at which the computer communicates with its modem. Details on
how to set these respective baud rates are described above, except that the user
modifies the Port 123 baud rate on the relay and the properties of the modem
in HyperTerminal.

2.12 Accessing the Relay’s SCADA Services

The relay supports DNP3 (Level 2) and Modbus SCADA protocols as a stan-
dard feature on all ERLPhase relays. DNP3 is available through a direct serial
link (Port 122) or the Ethernet LAN on top of either TCP or UDP protocols.
The Modbus implementation supports both Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) in
binary or ASCII modes and is available through a direct serial link. The SCA-
DA communication settings are made in T-PRO Offliner which can be ac-
cessed and uploaded to the T-PRO from Relay Control Panel.
Figure 2.14: SCADA Communication T-PRO Offliner Settings Screen
T-PRO Port 122 is dedicated for use with Modbus or DNP3 serial protocols.
Port 122 uses standard RS-232 signaling. An external RS-232RS-485 con-
verter can also be used to connect to an RS-485 network.
For details on connecting to serial Port 122 see “Communicating with the T-
PRO Relay ” on page 2-3 and “Communication Port Details” on page 2-20.
The DNP3 protocol can also be run across the optional Ethernet LAN. Both
DNP over TCP and DNP over UDP are supported. For details on connecting
to the Ethernet LAN see “Network Link” on page 2-7.

Complete details on the Modbus and DNP3 protocol services can be found in
the Appendices. For details see “Modbus RTU Communication Protocol”
in Appendix E and “DNP3 Device Profile” in Appendix F.
Protocol To select the desired SCADA protocol go to T-PRO Offliner SCADA commu-
Selection nications section. Select the protocol and set the corresponding parameters.
Communication The Port 122 communication parameters are set using the T-PRO Offliner >
Parameters SCADA Communication > Serial menu in relay’s user interface. Both the baud
rate and the parity bit can be configured. The number of data bits and stop bits
are determined automatically by the selected SCADA protocol. Modbus
ASCII uses 7 data bits. Modbus RTU and DNP Serial use 8 data bits. All pro-
tocols use 1 stop bit except when either Modbus protocol is used with no parity;
this uses 2 stop bits as defined in the Modbus standard.
Diagnostics Protocol monitor utilities are available to assist in resolving SCADA commu-
nication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing. The utilities
can be accessed through the Maintenance menu in VT100 Terminal mode.

2.13 Communication Port Details
Table 2.4: Communication Port Details
Location Port Function
Front Panel 119 RJ-45 receptacle, 100BASE-T Ethernet interface. Default IP =

192.168.100.80
Used for user interface access or 61850 SCADA access or DNP
SCADA access through Ethernet LAN.
Front Panel 150 USB-B receptacle, High speed USB 2.0 interface
Used for user interface access
Default fixed baud rate 115,200 N81 (no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit).
Rear Panel 118 RJ-11 receptacle, Internal modem interface.

Default Baud rate 38,400 N81 (no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit)
Rear Panel 119 Rear panel, RJ-45 receptacle or ST type optical receptacle (fac-
tory configured). 100BASE-T or 100BASE-FX (1300nm, multi-
mode) Ethernet interface. Same subnet as front panel port 119.
Rear Panel 120 ST type optical receptacle. 100BASE-FX (1300 nm, multimedia)
Ethernet interface.
Rear Panel 121 BNC receptacle, IRIG-B Interface. Modulated or un-modulated,

330 ohm impedance.
Rear Panel 122 RS-232 DCE female DB9.

Used for Modbus or DNP SCADA communication.
Default Setting: 19,200 baud O71 (odd parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop)
Rear Panel 123 RS-232 DCE female DB9.

Used for:
User interface access through a direct serial connection.
Default Setting: 9600 baud N81 (no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit).
User interface access through an external modem. The optional
ERLPhase Modem Adapter converts this port to a Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) to simplify connection to an external modem.
Default Setting: 19,200 baud O71 (odd parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop
bit).

Table 2.5: Signal connections to pins on RS-232 Relay Port
Signal Name Direction PC<-> Relay Pin # on the Relay Port
DCD ¬ 1
RxD ¬ 2
TxD ® 3
DTR ® 4
Common 5
DSR ¬ 6
RTS ® 7
CTS ¬ 8
No connection 9
Notes:
Relay is DCE, PC is DTE.
Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay.
Table 2.6: Cable Pin Connections
Male DB-9 Cable End for Relay Port Female DB-9 Cable End for Computer Port
Pin # on Cable Pin # on Cable
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9

Table 2.7: Signal name connections to pins on Modem Adapter
Signal Name Direction Modem <-> Relay Pin # on the Modem Adapter
DCD ® 1
RxD ® 2
TxD ¬ 3
DTR ¬ 4
Common 5
DSR ® 6
RTS ¬ 7
CTS ® 8
No connection 9
Notes:
Relay (with modem adapter) is DTE, modem is DCE.
Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay.

3 Using the IED (Getting Started)
3.1 Introduction
This section provides information on the start-up sequence and ways to inter-
face with the T-PRO. Descriptions of the Front Panel Display, Terminal Mode
and Metering Data are provided.
3.2 Start-up Sequence

When the power supply is connected, the following initialization initializing
sequence takes place:
Table 3.1: Initialization Sequence
TEST MODE — red LED on when power applied
RELAY FUNCTIONAL — green LED on within 5 seconds after power applied
TEST MODE — red LED off then on within 10 seconds
Front Display — on on within 20 seconds after power applied
TEST MODE — red LED off within 20 seconds after power applied
When the Relay Functional LED comes on, it indicates that the DSP is actively
protecting the system.
When the test mode LED goes off, the relay is capable of recording and com-
municating with the user.
3.3 Interfacing with the Relay

The following methods can be used to interface with the relay:
• Front panel display
• Terminal mode (for maintenance and firmware upgrade)
• Relay Control Panel

3.4 Front Panel Display

The intuitive menu system gives access to all settings, fault logs, metering and
statuses.
16 Status/Target LEDs
LCD Screen
6 Push Buttons USB Port 150

Ethernet Port 119
Figure 3.1: Front Panel Display
The LCD screen displays the following metering parameters:

• HV, LV & TV Residual current magnitude and angle (3I0 derived values)
• REF 87N Operating & Restraining current for all the windings (HV REF
Operating)
Current, LV REF Operating Current, TV REF Operating Current, HV REF
Restraint
Current, LV REF Restraint Current, TV REF Restraint Current)
• 3-phase apparent power (MVA - 3ph)
• Power factor (pf - 3ph)
• All sequence voltages
• All sequence currents in all the windings
• Single-phase real power, reactive power, apparent power, Power factor
• 2nd &5th harmonic current value for all the current inputs
• Directional status of 51/67, 51N/67N & 46-51/67
The metering display in LCD screen has a resolution of three decimals for both
measured and calculated analog values.
The LCD screen can display analog values both in primary or secondary val-
ues.

Table 3.2: T-PRO Front Panel HMI Menu
Main Screen
View / Change / Service : Choice Menu
Enter Password
Main Menu ( V,C,S )
System ( V,C,S )
Relay Identification (V)
Relay Comm Setup (V)
Settings (factory)
Name Plate Data
Record Length
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4
Setting Group 5
Setting Group 6
Setting Group 7
Setting Group 8
Metering ( V,C,S )
Analog ( V,C,S )
Analog Inputs
IO, IR
Harmonics
Trend
External Inputs ( V,C,S )
Output Contacts ( V,C,S )
Logic ( V,C,S )
Logic Protection 1
Logic Protection 2
ProLogic
Group Logics
Virtual Inputs
Records ( V,C,S )

Table 3.2: T-PRO Front Panel HMI Menu
View Record List ( V,C,S )
Fault Record Trigger ( C,S )
Event Recording (C,S)
Trend Recording (C,S)
Fault Log ( V,C,S )
Fault List
Event Log ( V,C,S )
Event List
Utilities ( V,C,S )
Setup ( C,S )
Timeouts
Time Settings
Set Manual Time
Set DST Time
Maintenance ( C,S )
Output Contacts Control (S)
Virtual Inputs Control ( C,S )
Setting Groups Control ( C,S )
Erase ( C,S )
Erase Records
Erase Event Logs
Network ( V,C,S )
Network Protocol Stats ( C,S )
Active Sockets ( C,S )
Routing Tables ( C,S )
Ping ( V,C,S )
LOGOUT
The display, the 16 LED lights and the 6 push buttons provide selective infor-
mation about the relay.

LED Lights
Table 3.3: Description of LED Lights
Relay Functional When LED is illuminated, indicates that the relay is functional.
When the Relay Functional green LED first illuminates, the Relay
Inoperative normally closed contact Opens and the protective
functions become active.
IRIG-B Functional When LED is illuminated, indicates the presence of a valid IRIG-B
time signal.
Service Required When LED is illuminated, indicates the relay needs service. This
LED can be the same state as the Relay Functional LED or can be
of the opposite state depending on the nature of the problem.
The following items bring up this LED:
DSP failure - protection difficulties within the relay.
Communication failure within the relay.
Internal relay problems.
Test Mode Illuminates when the relay output contacts are intentionally
blocked.
• Possible reasons are:
• Relay initialization on start-up
User interface processor has reset and is being tested.
The user cannot communicate with the relay through the ports
until the front display becomes active and the TEST MODE LED
goes out.
Normally, the red Target LEDs will be off after the start-up unless
the relay had unviewed target messages prior to losing power.
Alarm Illuminates when an enabled relay function picks up.

The red Alarm LED should be off if there are no inputs to the relay.
If the Alarm LED is on, check the event log messages or Meter-
ing>Logic>Protection Logics from the front display or on your com-
puter in Relay Control Panel.
Target LEDs Descriptions
1 – 11 Each of the 11 target LEDs is user configurable for any combina-

tion of Protection trips or ProLogic element operation.
Phase segregated Trip LED Indications (user configurable) are available

for the following functions:
• Differential 87
• Backup Over current 50/51
• Backup Earth fault 50N/51N
• Directional Over current 67
• Directional Earth fault 67N
• Overvoltage & Undervoltage 27/59

Push Buttons
Table 3.4: Identification of Push Buttons
Up, Down, Right, Left, Enter, Escape Used to navigate the front panel screens.
Display
View Event Log
Figure 3.2: Display Examples
Table 3.5: T-PRO Front panel Display Messages
See full list of display items in Table 3.2: T-PRO Front Panel HMI Menu on page 3-3.

3.5 Terminal Mode

The terminal mode is used to access the relay for maintenance and firmware
upgrade functions.
See “Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s User Interface” in Chapter 2
section 2.9 and “Firmware Update” in Chapter 2, section 2.10.
3.6 Relay Control Panel

RCP is used for all user interface. A short description of the RCP configuration
to connect to a relay is given here. Please refer to the Relay Control Panel User
Manual for details.
Follow this sequence to configure RCP for USB link to the relay.
1. Execute.
Relay Control Panel.exe
2. Execute.
T-PRO 4000 Offliner.exe
3. Install Null Modem Driver.
Please refer to the Relay Control Panel User Manual for details.
4. Run Relay Control Panel.
Go to:
Start > All Programs > ERLPhase > Relay Control Panel > Relay Control
Panel
First time RCP is run.
Hit Add New.
“Add New Relay”
Choose Communication > Direct Serial Link.
Hit Get Information From Relay.
Then RCP will communicate with the TPRO-4000 and retrieve in-
formation to fill required fields.
When this is done, hit Save Relay.
If the window “Relay already exists...” pops up, you may need to re-
name the relay changing the “Relay Name” in the “Relay Definition”
category, before saving.
After first time, in “Select Relay”, choose relay and hit Connect.
In “Relay Password Prompt”
Choose desired access level, enter appropriate password
Note: Default passwords are listed below (remove the quotation
marks)
View Access “view”
Change Access “change”
Service Access “service”

The RCP displays the following metering parameters:

• HV, LV & TV Residual current magnitude and angle (3I0 derived values)
• REF 87N Operating & Restraining current for all the windings (HV REF
Operating Current, LV REF Operating Current, TV REF Operating Cur-
rent, HV REF Restraint Current, LV REF Restraint Current, TV REF Re-
straint Current)
• 3-phase apparent power (MVA ? 3ph)
• Power factor (pf - 3ph)
• All sequence voltages
• All sequence currents in all the windings
• Single-phase real power, reactive power, apparent power, Power factor
• 2nd &5th harmonic current value for all the current inputs
• Directional status of 51/67, 51N/67N & 46-51/67
The metering display in RCP has a resolution of three decimals for both mea-
sured and calculated analog values.
The basic structure of the Relay Control Panel information, including basic ac-
tions available, is given below:
Table 3.6: Relay Control Panel Structure
View Change Service
Relay Control Panel
Records Trigger Fault Trigger Fault
Trigger Swing Trigger Swing
Trigger Event Trigger Event
Faults Clear Faults Clear Faults
Events Erase Erase
Metering
Analog
IO, IR
Harmonics
Trend, D49
External

Table 3.6: Relay Control Panel Structure
Logic 1
Logic 2
ProLogic
Outputs
GroupLogic
Virtual
Utilities
Unit Identification
Communication
Time
Analog Input Calibration N/A N/A
External Input
Settings Group Save Save
Password N/A N/A
Virtual Inputs N/A Latch/Pulse Latch/Pulse
Loss of Life Save Save
Through Fault Save Save
Clear Trend Log Save Save
Configuration
Present Settings (Get From

Relay)
Saved Settings (Load to (Load to

Relay) Relay)
Notice that some options are not available (N/A) depending on the access level.

4 Protection Functions and
Specifications
4.1 Protection and Recording Functions
This section describes the equations and algorithms of the T-PRO protection
functions, the recording functionality and programming of the Output Matrix.
All functions with time delay provide an alarm output when their pick up level
is exceeded. All functions use the fundamental component of the analog inputs,
except for THD Alarm and harmonic restraint of the 87 function.
87 Differential Differential protection is the most universally applied form of transformer pro-
Protection tection. The electrical area enclosed within the High Voltage (HV), Low Volt-
age (LV) and Tertiary (TV) side CTs define the zone of protection. The
element uses a percent restraint slope characteristic where the sensitivity of the
element has in inverse relationship to the fault level, in particular for faults ex-
ternal to the transformer zone (i.e., through faults). The slope characteristic is
a general requirement of differential protection due to various CT ratio, angle
and saturation errors that tend to magnify at higher fault levels. Figure 4.1: on
page 4-1 shows the differential slope characteristic in the relay.
Operating Current IO (pu)
Unrestrained Area (without harmonic restraint)
High Current Setting

S2
Normal Trip Area (with harmonic

restraint)
IOmin S1
IRs
Restraint Current IR (pu)
Figure 4.1: Differential Protection Slope Characteristic
Operating Current = IO = |IHV + ILV + ITV| for each of phases A, (1)

B and C (i.e., Operating Current is the phasor sum of all transform-
er windings).

4 Protection Functions and Specifications
where
IHV is the current from the high voltage side
ILV is the current from the low voltage side
ITV is the current from the tertiary side
Restraint Current (IR) = [ |I1x| + |I2x| + |I3x| + |I4x| + |I5x| ] / 2 (2)
where x represents phase A, B or C for each of 5 sets of current
inputs
In order to allow a more sensitive yet secure differential setting, the T-PRO
slope characteristic is supplemented with Delta Phase and Rate of Change of
Differential (ROCOD) supervision. Descriptions of these supervisions are pro-
vided later in this section.
Transformer Energizing Inrush Restraint (2nd Harmonic)

Second harmonic current is present in the magnetizing inrush current of an un-
faulted transformer being energized. Since inrush current is typically greater
than the 87 trip setting, a high ratio of the 2nd harmonic to fundamental current
is used to restrain the 87 when no fault is present.
The 2nd harmonic restraining only occurs if the calculated IO and IR currents
are in the 87 Normal Trip Area. However, if the IO exceeds the High Current
Setting, then the 2nd harmonic will not be examined and the trip will not be
blocked. Typical I2 setting for 2nd harmonic restraint is 0.05 to 1.00 per unit.
Note that the T-PRO will not calculate a harmonic restraint value if the funda-
mental current is less than 5% of nominal. Therefore care must be taken to en-
sure that the IOmin setting is always set above 0.25 A for a 5 A relay or 0.05
A for a 1 A relay. This calculation should be performed on each CT input.
I2 Cross Blocking
When I2 Cross Blocking is enabled (default), the 2nd harmonic restraint blocks
the 87 trip when the ratio I2nd / Ifundamental exceeds the I2 setting in any
phase.
When I2 Cross Blocking is Disabled, the 2nd harmonic restraint will block the
87 trip only if the ratio
I2nd / Ifundamental exceeds the I2 setting in at least two phases.
For three-phase transformer application, I2 Cross Blocking is typically en-
abled.
For three single-phase transformer applications, the I2 cross-blocking is usual-
ly disabled to ensure the transformer will trip correctly if energizing onto a
fault. Since the 2nd harmonic calculation is carried out on the internal zero se-
quence eliminated delta currents, any single-phase fault will produce predom-
inantly fundamental fault current in two phases, thereby allowing the relay to
trip correctly.

As shown in Figure 4.2: on page 4-3, the 2nd harmonic restraint signal is
stretched for 5 milliseconds in the first cycle upon transformer energization.
This stretch timer prevents possible momentary reset of the 2nd harmonic
blocking signal due to the current transition in the first cycle. Note that this log-
ic only becomes active when the transformer is de-energized or very lightly
loaded for more than 10 seconds.
Device 37: Undercurrent
37 IRA (30% of IOmin)

10 s
37 IRB (30% of IOmin)
17 ms Transformer has
37 IRC (30% of IOmin) been de-energized
0
5 ms
Block 87
2nd Harmonics Restraint Signal
Figure 4.2: Second Harmonic Restraint Logic
Over-fluxing Restraint (5th Harmonic)

The presence of a significant amount of 5th harmonic current in a transformer
is typical due to over-fluxing caused by an overvoltage or low frequency con-
dition. Overfluxing may produce unbalanced currents in the transformer that
could cause a false differential current. If 5th harmonic restraint is Enabled,
then a high ratio of 5th harmonic current to fundamental current will block the
87 trip. The 5th harmonic blocking will only occur if the calculated operate and
restraint currents are in the normal trip area. If the operate current exceeds the
High Current Setting, then the 5th harmonic will not be examined and the trip
will not be blocked.

Typical setting for 5th harmonic restraint is 0.05 to 1.00 PU.
Table 4.1: 87 Transformer Differential Setting Functions
IOmin Per unit minimum current that operates the device 87.
IRs Per unit point on the restraint axis of the differential characteristic where
Slope 1 and Slope 2 intersect.
S1 Slope of first part of characteristic meeting IOmin and Slope 2.
S2 Slope of second part of characteristic which meets the end of Slope 1 and
the High Current Unrestrained Setting.
I2 Ratio of 2nd harmonic current to fundamental to provide energizing har-

monic restraint.
I5 Ratio of 5th harmonic current to fundamental to provide transformer overex-

citation harmonic restraint.
High Current Per unit level of the unrestrained high set differential; operates if a heavy
Setting fault occurs in the transformer, irrespective of harmonic content.
Table 4.2: 87 Transformer Differential Setting Ranges
87 Transformer Differential Enable/disable
IOmin (per unit) 0.10 to Minimum of (IRs * S1/100, 1.00)
IRs (per unit) (IOmin * 100/S1) to 50.00
S1 (%) IOmin * 100/IRs to Minimum of (S2, 100)
S2 (%) Maximum of (S1, 30) to 200
High Current Setting (per unit) 3 * IOmin to 100.00
I2 Cross Blocking Enable/Disable
I2 Setting (per unit) 0.05 to 1.00
I5 Restraint Enable/disable
I5 Setting (per unit) 0.05 to 1.00
HV, LV and TV winding current calculations

The T-PRO has 5 sets of three-phase current inputs that can summed to obtain
the total current flowing into or out of a transformer winding. The inputs can
be configured for use with CTs of different ratios and connections. This flexi-
bility requires that certain mathematical corrections be carried out on the cur-
rents prior to summing them in order to derive the total winding and
transformer current. This process includes three steps:
1. Selection of a reference current input
2. Phase Corrections

3. Magnitude Corrections
The three steps are described in the following sections.
1. Selection of reference current input

The reference current (at 0) is fixed as the Transformer Winding where the Po-
tential Transformer is connected. The reference transformer winding will al-
ways be either Wye 0 or Delta 0. All causes of current phase shift, due to
connections of the transformer and/or CTs, shall be corrected in the relay algo-
rithm to be in phase with the reference. Consider the following example in Fig-
ure 4.3: on page 4-5:
Input#1 Input#2
Y Y
PT
I1a, I1b, I1c HV I2a, I2b, I2c
Transformer
YDD
Input#5
TV
LV
Y
I5a, I5b, I5c
Input#3 Input#4
D
Y
I3a, I3b, I3c I4a, I4b, I4c
Figure 4.3: Example of 3-Winding Transformer Application Using 5 Inputs
For this example, the PT is selected as being on the HV side, therefore the HV
main transformer winding is the reference, fixed at Wye 0. If the PT had been
on the LV side then the LV main transformer winding would be the reference
Delta 0. We continue with the example, still assuming that the PT is on the HV
side.
2. Phase Corrections
There are two phase corrections required, one for the transformer winding and
one for CT connections. Rather than correcting both separately, the total cor-
rection required on each winding/CT combination is determined. Although
the reference transformer winding is fixed at 0, it still must be added to its CT
angle to obtain the total winding angle to be corrected. For example, in our ex-
ample connection CT#2 has a 180 shift and is connected on the 0 reference

winding; therefore the sum of HV winding and CT#2 combination is 0 + 180

= 180. The total angle of 180 must be compensated by -180.
Based on the example of for details see Figure 4.3: Example of 3-Winding
Transformer Application Using 5 Inputs on page 4-5, the descriptions of the
corrections required to normalize the current of each input are in.
Table 4.3: Example, Transformer Current Correction
CT
XFMR Physical CT Total Phase
Voltage XFMR Curr. CT Ratio
Winding Winding CT Turn’s Phase Correction
(KV) Winding Input Phase With
Phase Conn. Ratio Shift Required
Factor
HV 230 Y 00(ref) #1 Y 00 200 :1 200 :1 00 00
#2 Y 1800 250 :1 250 :1 1800 -1800
LV 115  -300 #3 Y 00 400 :1 400 :1 -300 +300
#4  -300 450 :1 258.8 :1 -600 +600
TV 13.8  +300 #5 Y 00 4000:1 4000:1 +300 -300
Observe that CT input 4 in our example is connected in a delta configuration.

Currents from delta CTs are √3 larger than from Y connected CTs at the relay.
The T-PRO will automatically take the delta CT setting into account and cor-
rect for the √3 factor.
The formulas for the phase shift corrections are in “Current Phase Correction
Table” in Appendix L.
Our example of Table 4.3: on page 4-6 would use the following Current Phase
Correction formulas (from “Current Phase Correction Table” in Appendix L).
Table 4.4: Example
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5

00 Correction 1800 Correction 300 Correction 600 Correction -300 Correction
IA = 2Ia – Ib – Ic-
IA = Ia – Ib- IA = Ia
------------------------------ – Ic-
IA = –-----------------------------------
2Ia + Ib + Ic- IA = Ia
--------------- – 2Ib + Ic- ---------------
3 ------------------------------
3 3 3 3
IB = –-----------------------------------
Ia + 2Ib – Ic
IB = Ib – Ic- IB = Ib
Ia – 2Ib + Ic- Ia + Ib – 2Ic- – Ia-
3 IB = ------------------------------ --------------- IB = ------------------------------ ---------------
3 3 3 3
IC = – Ia – Ib + 2Ic
----------------------------------- Ia + Ib – 2Ic – 2Ia + Ib + Ic
IC = Ic – Ia- IC = Ic
IC = ------------------------------- IC = ------------------------------------ – Ib-
3 --------------- ---------------
3 3 3 3
The process of correcting current angles mathematically creates virtual “Delta”

connections from the current inputs. Another benefit of this process is the elim-

ination of zero sequence current, leaving only positive sequence and negative
sequence currents as operating quantities. We will refer to these compensated
currents as Delta Compensated Currents as we progress through the example.
3. Magnitude Mismatch Corrections

The next step is to correct the ratio mismatch of each current input. There are
three ratio corrections required:
• CT Ratio Mismatch Correction
• CT Connection Correction
• Transformer Ratio Correction
The Magnitude Mismatch Correction Factor is applied on each current input
referenced to the first CT input on the transformer reference side as follows:
Magnitude_Mismatch_Correction_Factor[i] = (3)
PhysicalCTRoot3Factor  i   VoltageLevel  i   CTRatio  i -
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PhysicalCTRoot3  REF   Voltage  REF   CTRatio  REF 
where
i = current input being considered
PhysicalCTRoot3Factor[i] = 1.0 for a Y connected CT, 1/3
for Delta
connected CT
VoltageLevel[i] = Voltage level of the input being considered
CTRatio[i] = CT ratio of the input being considered
Voltage[REF] = Primary voltage level of the reference (PT)
side
CTRatio[REF] = CT ratio of the first current input on the ref-
erence
(PT) side
After the three corrections steps are complete, the phase and mismatch correc-
tions have been performed. The Delta Compensated Currents can now be
summed on a single-phase basis to arrive at the HV, LV and TV winding cur-
rents that shall be used in the differential function.
For our example:
HV has A, B, C inputs from two CTs connected to T-PRO current input sets
I1 and I2.
LV has A, B, C inputs from two CTs connected to T-PRO current input sets
I3 and I4.
TV has A, B, C current from one CT connected to T-PRO current input set
I5.

The relay calculates the HV, LV and TV Delta Compensated Currents for use
in the 87 function of our example as follows:
IHVa = I1A + I2A ILVa = I3A + I4A ITVa = I5A

IHVb = I1B + I2B ILVb = I3B + I4B ITVb = I5B
IHVc = I1C + I2C ILVc = I3C + I4C ITVc = I5C
Note regarding delta compensated currents used in other T-

PRO functions.
Overcurrent (OC) and Overload (OL) Functions 50/51, 67, 49 and

TOEWS also may (or may not) use Delta Compensated Currents, de-
pending on which of the following CT connections apply:
•If any of the CTs associated with the particular OC or OL function are
connected in Delta, then the relay uses Delta Compensated Currents
in the function.
•If all of the CTs associated with the particular OC or OL function are
connected Wye, then the relay shall use the Wye Currents (i.e., cur-
rents without zero sequence elimination phase shift being applied).
In our example connection of Figure 4.3: on page 4-5, the OC and OL

functions applied on the HV side use Wye Currents (i.e., not Delta
Compensated) since both CTs on the HV winding are using Wye
CTs.
However, in the same example any the OC and OL functions used

on the LV side must use Delta Compensated Currents, because at
least one of the CTs used on the LV side is connected in a Delta con-
figuration.
Delta Phase Dot Product Differential Supervision (Patent Pending)

The slope characteristic of the transformer differential operates on Kirchoff’s
current principle. This principle states that for any current entering a node (or
in our case transformer zone), there must be equal current leaving the zone if
no faults are present within the zone. The protected zone is defined as the area
between all of the CTs that are used to measure each and every current entering
or leaving the transformer zone.
In the ideal situation the differential slope characteristic could be set to secure-
ly produce a differential trip only for internal faults. However in practice, CT
current measurement errors caused by CT saturation, DC offsets or sympathet-
ic inrush of parallel transformer banks can disrupt this current measurement
balance and could cause the relay to trip incorrectly during normal operations
or external faults.

Analysis of extensive dynamic simulations has shown that even with current
distortion due to a variety of measurement error factors, the phase angle of the
current is maintained. Therefore, phase angle differences can be used to reli-
ably identify faults as being internal or external to the transformer zone; this
fact is the basis of the Delta Phase Dot Product (DPDT) algorithm. Note that
DPDT cannot produce a trip output on its own; it can only give the differential
slope characteristic permission to trip.
The current angles of the faulted and unfaulted phase current inputs for an ex-
ternal fault are close to 180 degrees apart. However, since it’s recognized that
there could be CT phase angle errors, the boundary condition has been set con-
servatively to ±90 degrees. This boundary is fixed and has no user settings as-
sociated with it.
DPDT is performed on a per-phase basis on the HV, LV and TV Delta Com-
pensated Currents (i.e., HVA, LVA, TVA are compared only to each other,
HVB, LVB, TVB are compared only to each other, HVC, LVC, TVC are com-
pared only to each other.)
The relay checks to see if the compared currents are more or less than 90 from
each other. If all compared currents are within the 90 or less of each other, the
relay recognizes the condition as an Internal fault. If the difference current also
enters the trip area of the slope characteristic, the 87 will trip.
However, if one or more the currents are greater than 90 from any of the other
compared currents, this is recognized as an External fault and the 87 will be
Blocked from tripping, even if the difference current enters the trip area of the
slope characteristic.
The method used to compare current angles is the mathematical dot product.
This concept makes use of the angular relationship present in Kirchhoff’s cur-
rent law.
In mathematical terms, if Phasor A and Phasor B are considered, then: A * B
= AB Cos ()
Where: (theta) is the angle between the two phasors.
Phasors A and B are normalized to a value of 1.0 and then the dot product is
applied and analyzed:
• Any >90, the dot product will be negative (Block 87 trip).
• All <90, the dot product will be positive (allow 87 trip).
To ensure the current phasor has enough magnitude to be reliably used, a cur-
rent level detector for each current input is fixed at 5% of Inominal (i.e., 0.25 A
for 5 A nominal, 0.05 A for 1 A nominal relay). If any current is below the 5%
threshold, the current angle will not be calculated in DPDT. In the case where
only one current input is above this current threshhold (such as when energiz-
ing an offline transformer), the DPDT algorithm will not inhibit the 87 slope.
This means that if a transformer fault occurs upon energization or if a perma-
nent fault is present, the T-PRO will trip correctly. Figure 4.4: illustrates trans-
former internal and external faults and the current angle comparisons.

External Fault Internal Fault

IHV ILV IHV ILV
Fault
ITV ITV Fault
ILV
Delta Angle >90¡ Delta Angle <90¡
IHV IHV
ITV ITV
ILV
Phase angles between currents is greater than 90 Phase angles between currents is less than 90 degrees,
degrees, Delta Phase blocks differential trip. Delta Phase allowsdifferential trip.
Figure 4.4: Delta Phase Dot Product supervision for External and Internal Fault Condi-
tions

Rate of Change of Differential Supervision (ROCOD)

If the positive rate of change of IO (IOperate) exceeds the positive rate of
change of IR (IRestrain) within the first cycle of a fault, ROCOD supervision
will allow the 87 to trip if the fault goes into the trip area of the Slope charac-
teristic.
Figure 4.5: Rate Of Change Of Operating And Restraint Quantities shows how
the dio/dt and the dIr/dt quantities vary during an internal and during an exter-
nal fault. Normally, for an internal fault, the dIo/dt quantity will be greater
than the dIr/dt quantity. On the other hand, if an external fault occurs, dIo/dt
will be less than dIr/dt.
Figure 4.5: Rate Of Change Of Operating And Restraint Quantities

All of the components of the T-PRO differential function are summarized in

Figure 4.6: Transformer Differential Protection Logical Overview .
Unrestrained Function
Normal
87 Zone
87T
2nd Harmonic Restraint Trip
5th Harmonic Restraint
Delta Phase <90¡
1
Cycle
D
CO
RO
Figure 4.6: Transformer Differential Protection Logical Overview

87N Neutral Neutral Differential protection (87N), which is also called Restricted Earth
Differential Fault, provides sensitive protection of the transformer or auto-transformer for
internal winding to ground faults. The function is restricted to detecting ground
faults only within the zone between by the CTs that define the 87N zone.
Since the phase differential (87) operates only on positive and negative se-
quence currents, it may not be sensitive enough to detect all internal ground
faults, especially on the lower 1/3 of the transformer winding. However, the
87N operates on zero sequence current only and has good sensitivity for detect-
ing these faults.
To intentionally limit the current for winding to ground faults a ground resistor
is often connected between the transformer neutral and ground. It should be
noted that the grounding resistance can reduce the sensitivity of 87N by an
amount that can be calculated.
The principle of operation of the 87N is to compare the phasor of the trans-
former neutral current (IN) to the phasor of the residual of the winding’s 3-
phase currents (3I0). Again using Kirchoff’s law, if these are not equal and
subtractive, then there is an internal ground fault on that winding.
Note the winding 3-phase CTs must be Wye connected. Delta CT’s cannot be
used as they would trap the zero sequence current making it unavailable to the
87N function.)
The 87N characteristic consists of a slope characteristic and Delta Phase Dot
Product supervision.
The 87N function can be used on a normal grounded transformer connection,
a delta connected transformer winding with a grounding bank contained within
the its zone or on an auto-transformer.
87N Operating Current (IO)
For a Regular Wye Transformer: IO = |IA + IB + IC + IN| (4)

For an Auto-Transformer: IO = |HV3I0 + LV3I0 + IN| (5)

87N Restraint Current (IR)
For a Regular Wye Transformer: IR = (|IN| + |IA + IB + IC|) / 2 (6)

For an Auto-Transformer: IR = (|HV3I0| + |LV3I0| + |IN|) / 2 (7)
IA, IB and IC are the phase currents,
Where
IN is the current from the neutral CT
3I0 is the residual derived from the 3-phase currents of the respec-
tive winding(s)
And where:
Operate current IO = 0 (ideally) for external ground faults
Operate current IO > 0 for internal ground faults
Note: All current reference directions for any 87 or 87N function are into the
transformer.
For an auto-transformer, the HV3I0 and LV3I0 are normalized by the CT ratios
on both sides of the transformer to derive each primary current. The normal-
ized currents are then directly summed. The different voltage levels need not
be considered for the 87N of an auto-transformer. The per unit settings are
calculated using the side with the PT as the base.
The 87N base current is calculated as:

(1000 * MVA) / (sqrt (3) * Ref_Side_kVL-L ) (8)
The differential currents are calculated as:

IO (pu) = IO primary amps / Ibase (9)
IR (pu) = IR primary amps / Ibase (10)
The settings depend on the value of the neutral grounding resistor (if used) and
assumptions regarding CT saturation for external faults.

Table 4.5: 87N Neutral Differential Setting Functions
IOmin Per unit minimum level that operates the device 87N.
IRs Per unit point on the restraint axis of the differential characteristic
where Slope 1 and Slope 2 intersect.
S1 Slope of first part of characteristic meeting IOmin and Slope 2.
S2 Slope of second part of characteristic meeting Slope 1
Table 4.6: 87N Neutral Differential Setting Ranges
HV, LV, TV Enable/Disable
IOmin (per unit) 0.10 to Min (IRs * S1/100, 1.00)
IRs (per unit) (IOmin * 100/S1) to 50.00
S1 (%) IOmin * 100/IRs to Min(S2, 100)
S2 (%) Max(S1, 30) to 200
CT Turns Ratio 1.00 to 10000.00
87 Example on Grounded Wye / Delta Transformer 87 Example on Auto-Transformer

Input#1 Input#2 Input#1 Input#2
Y Y Y Y
I1a, I1b, I1c 3Io I2a, I2b, I2c I1a, I1b, I1c 3Io I2a, I2b, I2c
Input#5 In Input#5 In HV
HV Y
1CT 1CT LV
LVΔ
I5a I5a
3Io
Input#3 Input#4 Input#3 Input#4
Y Y Y Y
I4a, I4b, I4c I3a, I3b, I3c I4a, I4b, I4c

I3a, I3b, I3c
Figure 4.7: 87N Application Examples
Note: Only 87N-HV function is available for auto-transformer application.

49-1 to 49-12
Thermal
Overload
Transformer
Feeders hs
Top Oil
Highest Priority
1 170
I 160
150
140
12
Lowest Priority
110- (normal)
T-PRO calculates hot spot temperature
Ambient
Other Functions: SCADA Alarm, Block Tapchanger, Prevent Load Restoration, etc.
Figure 4.8: 49-1 to 49-12 Thermal Overload Modules
Thermal overload protection protects the transformer windings from excessive

insulation damage due to heavy loading and/or high temperature conditions.
There are 12 identical devices that use a combination of current and tempera-
ture monitoring to shed and to restore load based on the level of current in the
winding and/or the temperatures inside the transformer.
Current Input Switch I Pickup Setting

with Hysteresis Tp1: Pickup Delay
IHV_RMS_Max
Tp1
ILV_RMS_Max
1
ITV_RMS_Max
0 Td1
Off Logic Gate
Td1: Dropout Delay Switch
Output
Temp. Input Switch T Pickup Setting
with Hysteresis Tp2: Pickup Delay
Hot Spot Temperature Tp2
Top Oil Temperature 1
Off 0 Td2
Td2: Dropout Delay
Figure 4.9: Thermal Overload Protection Logic Diagram
Figure 4.9:shows the components of the 49 Thermal Overload function. The

Current Input Switch activates the current based portion of the 49 device which
is used to detect high loading conditions of any of the transformer windings.
The 49 tolerates the thermal overload for a specified definite time before the
element operates. When the loading drops below the 49 pickup, the hysteresis

maintains the output until the current drops further, below the level determined
by the hysteresis setting, for the duration of the dropout delay timer.
The Temperature Input Switch activates Top Oil temperature or the Hot Spot
temperature protection. Top Oil temperature may be either sensed or calculated
and the Hot Spot temperature is calculated based on inputs. The settings are
made in a similar fashion to the current settings with pickup and hysteresis lev-
els and pickup and dropout delay settings. In this manner the temperature based
portion of the 49 device monitors the internal temperatures of the transformer
and tolerates them for a specified time.
A Gate Switch setting provides two logical states where the Current and Tem-
perature elements can be combined using AND/OR logic to monitor different
parts of the transformer under different loading and temperature conditions.
You can set each individual 49 device to provide a simple Alarm LED or one
of the 11 programmable target LEDs. Additional 49 operating information is
available on the HMI display, in Relay Control Panel and recording.
Note that the current used in the 49 function may be the uncompensated Wye
currents, or Delta Compensated currents. For more information, see “Note re-
garding delta compensated currents used in other T-PRO functions.” on
page 4-8.
Table 4.7: 49 Thermal Overload Setting Ranges
Current Input Switch Off, HV, LV, TV
Pickup (per unit) 0.10 to 20.00
Hyteresis (per unit) 0.00 to 1.00
Pickup Delay (Tp1, seconds) 0.00 to 1800.00
Dropout Delay (Td1,seconds) 0.00 to 1800.00
Temperature Input Switch Off, Hot Spot, Top Oil
Pickup (degrees Celsius) 70.0 to 200.0
Hysteresis (degrees Celsius) 0.0 to 10.0
Pickup Delay (Tp2, hours) 0.00 to 24.00
Dropout Delay (Td2, hours) 0.00 to 24.00
Logic Gate OR or AND

49TOEWS TOEWS feature extends the thermal overload concept of the previous section
Transformer in two ways:
Overload Early • Predicts excessive hot spot temperature to thirty minutes in advance.
Warning • Predicts excessive loss of life to thirty minutes in advance.
System Both of these are based on the availability of an adequate thermal model of the
transformer. For details see “Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation”
in Appendix N. To use this feature the relay must have an ambient temperature
probe.
Note that the current used in the TOEWS function may be the uncompensated
Wye currents, or Delta Compensated currents. For more information, see
“Note regarding delta compensated currents used in other T-PRO functions.”
on page 4-8.
Excessive Hot Spot Temperature Warning

Enabling this feature, hot spot temperature is calculated at every time step (five
seconds) into the future. The assumption is that the load current and ambient
temperature do not change.
If this calculation indicates that the hot spot temperature exceeds its trip set-
ting, the following happens:
15-minute warning alarm is activated when the calculated time is fifteen min-
utes or less.
30-minute warning alarm is activated when the calculated time is between thir-
ty minutes and fifteen minutes.
Trip output is activated if the calculated time is zero.
The actual time to trip, in minutes, is also available (30, 29,...1, 0 minutes). If
the time to trip is greater than 30 minutes, the display value is “+++++”.
Excessive Loss of Life Warning

This feature overcomes a difficulty of using simple over-temperature as an in-
dication of overload.
If the hot spot temperature trip setting is 140°C and the temperature hovers at
values just below that level, then damage to the cellulose insulation occurs, but
no trip occurs. Also, if the temperature briefly exceeds the setting (less than an
hour) and then falls back to normal levels, a trip should not occur, but will.
You can overcome these unreliability and security issues by using the “Loss of
Life” concept. The calculation is outlined in “Top Oil and Hot Spot Tempera-
ture Calculation” in Appendix N.
The 30-minute warning, 15-minute warning and trip outputs occur if either the
hot spot temperature or Loss of Life limits are exceeded.
The three settings are:

THS Trip Setting

Use 175°C with Loss of Life protection enabled. The Loss of Life setting will
not allow temperatures near this level to last too long.
If Loss of Life protection were not enabled, then a lower setting would be nec-
essary, say 140°C, a temperature at which oil bubbles might start to form, de-
pending for one thing on the oil’s water content.
THS To Start Loss of Life Calculation
For 65°C rise transformers the normal hot spot temperature is 110°C. There-
fore, some value above this is appropriate for the start of “Excessive Loss of
Life” calculation initiation. Select 125°C.
Loss of Life Trip Setting

Select 2 days as the setting. This, in combination with the above, allows over-
loads similar to those recommended in the Standard (C57.91-1995).
A study for this transformer shows that for these settings, a sudden overload
will trip due to hot spot temperature for times less than about 15 minutes, and
due to excessive loss of life for times greater than about 15 minutes. The soft-
ware program to assist in this kind of study is available from ERLPhase.
Table 4.8: TOEWS Transformer Overload Early Warning System Setting

Ranges
TOEWS Enable/Disable
THS (Temperature Hot Spot) Trip Setting (degrees Celsius) 70.0 to 200.0
THS to Start LOL (Loss of Life) Calculation (degrees Celsius) 70.0 to 200.0
LOL (Loss of Life) Trip Setting (days) 0.5 to 100.0

24 The T-PRO provides 3 overexcitation elements, one inverse time (24INV), and
Overexcitation the other 2 are definite time (24DEF-1 and 24DEF-2).
24INV provides inverse-time overexcitation (over-fluxing) protection due to
high system voltages or frequency deviations. The operating quantity is the
ratio of voltage to frequency because flux is proportional to the voltage and in-
versely proportional to the frequency.
The element uses the positive sequence voltage and compares the per unit pos-
itive sequence voltage magnitude to the per unit positive sequence frequency.
24INV delay characteristic is defined as:

K
T = -----------------------------------
-
(11)
 --- – Pickup 2
V
f 
where:
T is the tripping time in seconds
V is the positive sequence voltage in per unit
f is the positive sequence frequency in per unit
K is a parameter which raises or lowers the inverse time curve
Pickup is the user-settable minimum operating value of the V/
f ratio
24DEF1 and 24DEF2 Definite Time Delay Overexcitation protection are sim-
ilar to the 24INV except the operating time delay is definite. An application ex-
ample of this function could be to trip a capacitor bank if its controller has
failed.
Table 4.9: 24 Overexcitation Setting Functions
K Factor for altering inverse time curve
Pickup Minimum level that operates device 24INV
Reset Time Time for 24INV to reset after element has dropped out
Pickup (24DEF) Minimum level that operates device 24DEF1/24DEF2
Pickup Delay Operating time for 24DEF

Table 4.10: 24 Overexcitation Setting Ranges
24INV Enable/Disable
K 0.10 to 100.00
Reset Time (seconds) 0.05 to 9999.99
24DEF1, 24DEF2 Enable/Disable
Pickup Delay (seconds) 0.05 to 9999.99
59N Zero 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage protection is typically used to provide ground
Sequence fault protection on ungrounded in high impedance grounded systems where
neutral overcurrent protection cannot be used or does not have good sensitivi-
Overvoltage ty. The element operates on the residual voltage quantity 3V0.
The potential transformer source can be on either the HV or LV side of the
transformer. The 59N uses standard IEC and IEEE curves as well as a user-de-
fined curve type.
Pickup
(12)
A
T  3V 0  = TMS B + -----------------------------------------
3V
 -----------------------
p
0
- – 1
 3V 0Pickup
Reset
(13)
TR
T  3V 0  = TMS -----------------------------------------2
3V 0
1 –  ------------------------
 3V 0Pickup

Table 4.11: IEC and IEEE Curves
No Curve Type A B p
1 IEC Standard Inverse 0.14 (fixed) 0.00 (fixed) 0.02 (fixed)
2 IEC Very Inverse 13.50 (fixed) 0.00 (fixed) 1.00 (fixed)
3 IEC Extremely Inverse 80.00 (fixed) 0.00 (fixed) 2.00 (fixed)
4 IEEE Moderately 0.0103(fixed) 0.0228 (fixed) 0.02 (fixed)

Inverse
5 IEEE Very Inverse 3.922 (fixed) 0.0982 (fixed) 2.00 (fixed)
6 IEEE Extremely 5.64 (fixed) 0.0243 (fixed) 2.00 (fixed)

Inverse
7 User-defined [0.001, 1000] [0.0, 10.0] [0.01, 10.0]
Table 4.12: 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage Setting Functions
3V0 Pickup Minimum level that operates device 59N
Curve Type Sets the type of inverse time curve
TMS Time scaling factor for inverse time curve
A, B, p Parameters for defining the curve
TR Factor for altering the reset time
Table 4.13: 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage Setting Ranges
59N Enable/disable
3V0 Pickup (secondary volts) 5.00 TO 150.00
Curve Type See Table 4.11: IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4-22
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0
B 0.0000 to 10.0
P 0.01 to 10.00
TR 0.10 to 100.00

27 Two sets of Undervoltage (27) elements are provided. When the voltage ap-
Undervoltage plied to the analog voltage inputs is below the 27 pickup level, the 27 will op-
erate after its timer has expired.
The 27-1 and 27-2 functions are identical in terms of operating options. Use
the Gate Switch setting to select the logical AND gate for 3-phase undervolt-
age function or use the logical OR gate for single-phase undervoltage.
When the gate switch is set to OR, then if any of A OR B OR C phase voltage
drops below the pickup setting, the element will operate after the time delay.
When the gate switch is set to AND, then if A AND B AND C phase voltage
drops below the pickup setting, the element will operate after the time delay.
The Pickup Delay timer is definite with a range of 0.00 second (i.e., instanta-
neous) to 99.99 seconds.
Gate Switch (Setting)

27 Va
27 Vb OR
T
27 Vc
O
AND
Figure 4.10: 27 Undervoltage
Table 4.14: 27 Undervoltage Setting Functions
Pickup (volts) Minimum level that operates device 27
Pickup Delay (seconds) Operating time of the 27
Gate Switch Allows either single-phase or three-phase operation
Table 4.15: 27 Undervoltage Setting Ranges
27-1, 27-2 Enable/Disable
Gate Switch AND or OR
Pickup (volts) 1.0 to 120.0

59 Overvoltage Two sets of Overvoltage (59) elements are provided. When the voltage applied
to the analog voltage inputs is above the 59 pickup level, the 59 will operate
after its timer has expired.
The 59-1 and 59-2 functions are identical in terms of operating options. Use
the Gate Switch setting to select the logical AND gate for 3-Phase Overvoltage
function, or select the logical OR gate for Single Phase Overvoltage.
When the gate switch is set to OR, then if any of A OR B OR C phase voltage
rises above the pickup setting, the element will operate after the time delay.
When the gate switch is set to AND, then if A AND B AND C phase voltage
rises above the pickup setting, the element will operate after the time delay.
The Pickup Delay timer is definite with a range of 0.00 second (i.e., instanta-
neous) to 99.99 seconds.
59 Va
Gate Switch
59 Vb (Setting)
59 Vc
T
59 Trip
0
Figure 4.11: 59 Overvoltage
Table 4.16: 59 Overvoltage Setting Functions
Pickup (volts) Minimum level that operates device 59
Pickup Delay
Operating time of the 59
(seconds)
Gate Switch Allows either single-phase or three-phase operation
Table 4.17: 59 Overvoltage Setting Ranges
59-1, 59-2 Enable/disable
Gate Switch AND or OR
Pickup (volts) 1.0 to 138.0
Pickup Delay (sec-

0.00 to 99.99
onds)

60 AC Loss of
Potential 59 VA (fixed 0.5 pu)
59 VB (fixed 0.5 pu) 206
59 VB (fixed 0.5 pu)
10 s Loss of Potential
197
0.0
207
Figure 4.12: AC Loss of Potential Logic
AC Loss of Potential issues an alarm if it detects the loss of one or two phases
of the PT voltage source. If the 60 is mapped to an output, an alarm or annun-
ciation can be obtained. The delay is fixed at 10 seconds.
Table 4.18: 60 Loss of Potential Setting Ranges
60 Loss of Potential Enable/disable
Pickup Time Delay 10 seconds (fixed)
81 Over/Under The T-PRO has four frequency devices available. Each frequency element can
Frequency be set to operate in the following modes:
• Fixed level of under-frequency
• Fixed level of over-frequency
• Specified rate of change level of frequency (df/dt)
The df/dt function can be set to operate for a positive rate of change or a neg-
ative rate of change.
Each frequency element has a definite time delay setting. All 81 elements shall
be inhibited if the positive sequence voltage drops below the undervoltage su-
pervision threshold, fixed at the greater of 0.25 per unit or 5 volts secondary.

Frequency from
Vpos of PT Input
81O Pickup Setting
Fixed Level Select
81U Pickup Setting
T 81
O Trip
+df/dt Pickup Setting
Rate of Change Select
-df/dt Pickup Setting
59Vpos > 0.25 pu 200ms

or >5.0 Vsec 0
Setting: Disabled
Figure 4.13: Over/Under Frequency Logic (One of Four Similar Elements Shown)
Table 4.19: 81 Frequency Setting Functions
Pickup Minimum level that operates device 81
Pickup Delay Operating time for the 81
Table 4.20: 81 Frequency Setting Ranges
81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 Enabled, disabled, fixed level, rate of change
Pickup (Hz/second)
Between [50.000, 59.995] or [60.005, 70.000]
(60 Hz) Fixed Level
Pickup (Hz/second)
Between [-10.0, -0.1] or [0.1, 10.0]
(60 Hz) Rate of Change
Pickup Delay (seconds)

0.05 to 99.99
(60 Hz) Fixed Level

0.20 to 99.99
Pickup (Hz/second)
Between [40.000, 49.995] or [50.005, 60.000]
(50 Hz) Fixed Level
Pickup (Hz/second)
Between [-10.0, -0.1] or [0.1, 10.0]

Table 4.20: 81 Frequency Setting Ranges

0.05 to 99.99
(50 Hz) Fixed Level

0.20 to 99.99
50/51
Overcurrent
Pickup
(14)
A
T  I  = TMS B + ---------------------------------
-
 ---------------- p – 1
I
 I Pickup
Reset
(15)
TR
T  I  = TMS ---------------------------------2-
I
1 –  ----------------
 I Pickup
There are non-directional Phase Time-Overcurrent (51) and Phase Instanta-

neous Overcurrent (50) elements available for each of the HV, LV and TV
windings and they may be used in combination as required. The 50/51 provides
backup to the primary 87 protection and should be coordinated with any down-
stream protection.
Depending on the associated CT connections, either the Wye current or the
Delta Compensated Currents could be used in the 50/51 functions. When CTs
on a winding are exclusively wye connected, the 50/51 will use the uncompen-
sated currents (i.e., zero sequence will not be eliminated). However, if any of
the winding’s CTs are connected Delta then the Delta Compensated Currents
are used. Delta Compensated Currents are described in the description of the
87 function on “87 Differential Protection” on page 4-1.
Each of the 51 functions are provided with 3 IEC inverse time curves, 3 IEEE
inverse time curves, as well as 1 user-defined custom inverse time curve. Each
winding’s 51 operates on the per unit sum of all inputs assigned to the winding.
The input of each 50/51 is the maximum fundamental RMS current Imax among
phases A, B and C. If Imax is greater than the pickup setting, an alarm is set and
the relay starts to integrate towards a trip using the pickup formula. When the
integrated torque reaches 1, a trip signal is issued.
The 51 reset is a back-integration process that will fully reset the 51 in a time
determined by the reset formula.

Adaptive Feature
To automatically adjust the 51HV pickup level for different ambient tempera-
ture conditions, an adaptive feature is applied to device 51HV as in 51ADP
Adaptive Overcurrent on “50/51 Overcurrent” on page 4-27.
The 50 device is an instantaneous or definite time overcurrent and operates
when the Imax is above the pickup level for the duration of the set delay.
Note that the current used in the 50/51 functions may be the uncompensated
Wye currents, or Delta Compensated currents. For more information, see
“Note regarding delta compensated currents used in other T-PRO functions.”
on page 4-8.
Table 4.21: 50/51 Phase Overcurrent Setting Functions
50 Pickup Minimum level that operates device 50
50 Pickup Delay Operating time for the 50
Curve Type Sets the type of curve
TMS Factor for altering inverse time curve
Table 4.22: 50/51 Phase Overcurrent Setting Ranges
50
HV, LV, TV Enable/disable
Pickup (pu) 0.10 to 100.0
Pickup Delay (sec- 0.00 to 99.99

onds)
51
Curve Type See Table 4.11: IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4-22
Tms (Time Multiplier 0.01 to 10.00

Setting)
A 0.0010 to 1000.0
B 0.0000 to 10.00
p 0.01 to 10.0
TR 0.10 to 100.00
51ADP Enable/disable

Table 4.22: 50/51 Phase Overcurrent Setting Ranges
Multiple of Normal LOL 0.5 to 512.0
51ADP Adaptive
Overcurrent
Overload Fault
Region Region
0.7 1.0 1.5 2.15 Current per unit
Hot day Cold day
Figure 4.14: Ambient Temperature Adaptation
Ambient Temperature Adaptive Pickup (ADP) adjusts the pickup level of de-
vice 51HV based on the ambient temperature, a user-entered multiplier of nor-
mal loss of life and the equations defined in IEEE standard C57.92.1981. The
adaptive function is executed at a rate of once per second.
If this function is enabled, the calculated adaptive pickup value becomes the
device 51HV pickup setting. The 51ADP function re-shapes the inverse-time
curve only in the overload region (up to 2.15 per unit), for details see Figure
4.14: Ambient Temperature Adaptation on page 29.
If the ambient temperature signal is out of range, the pickup of device 51HV
reverts to the user-set non-adaptive value.
51ADP Adaptive Overcurrent - Cold Climates

When the ambient temperature input probe is connected, you can use the adap-
tive overcurrent function. If 51ADP function is enabled, the 51HV pickup is
affected by the ambient temperature input and the rate of loss of life setting val-
ue. If this function is disabled, the 51HV pickup is not affected.
If rate of loss of life is set to one and ambient temperature is 30 Celsius, the
pickup level of 51 will be 1.0 per unit. Use the curves in Example 1, “Loss of
Life of Solid Insulation” in Appendix M to change the 30°C pickup level.
The alarm function of 51HV indicates when the pickup threshold has been ex-
ceeded.

Set the rate of loss of life value to 1.0. The pickup values can be affected over
the range 0 < pickup < 2.15 per unit. No change in the overcurrent characteris-
tic takes place above 2.15 times pickup. Since most fault coordination with
other overcurrent relays occurs at fault levels above this value, coordination is
not usually affected by the adaptive nature of the 51ADP function. However,
check all specific applications.
If the ambient temperature input goes out of range with the adaptive function
enabled, an alarm is generated. The event is logged and the overcurrent pickup
reverts to the regular 51HV setting.
50N/51N Neutral T-PRO provides 50N/51N neutral overcurrent protection for up to 3 neutral
Overcurrent connected transformer windings. The functions use one of the following 3 In-
puts of Input 5 as follows:
INHV to I5A
INLV to I5B
INTV to I5C
When 50N/51N functions are used, I5 cannot be used for the phase differential
(87) function. If only one 50N/51N is required, the remaining I5 inputs may
be used for fault recording from any CT source.
Neutral Overcurrent is similar to 50/51 except that the input currents are taken
from the transformer neutral CTs and are set in the unit of secondary amps rath-
er than per unit.
To enable 50N/51N, Current Input #5 must be set to 87N/51N or 87N Auto in
Winding/CT Connections settings. If Input 5 is set to “87N Auto”, only 50N/
51N-HV is available.
Table 4.23: 50N/51N Neutral Overcurrent Setting Functions
50N Pickup Minimum level that operates device 50N
50N Pickup Delay Operating time for the 50N

Table 4.24: 50N/51N Neutral Overcurrent Setting Functions
50N
Pickup (A) 0.25 to 50.00 (5A)

0.05 to 10.00 (1A)
51N
Pickup (pu) 0.25 to 50.00 (5A)

0.05 to 10.00 (1A)
Curve Type See Table 4.11: “IEC and IEEE Curves” on page 4-22
Tms (Time Multiplier Setting) 0.01 to 10.0
A 0.0010 to 1000.0
B 0.0000 to 10.00
p 0.01 to 10.0
TR 0.10 to 100.00

67 Directional
Overcurrent -180° < Alpha <180°
0° <Beta <360°
Positive sequence
voltage and current
Alpha
I1
Beta Trip
Zone V1 (reference)
LV Side HV Side
Reference Reference
I1 I1
V1 V1
Figure 4.15: Directional Overcurrent Protection Characteristic
The 67 directional overcurrent function in T-PRO can be applied to either the

HV or LV winding, whichever has the Potential Transformer connected to it.
The 67 has a flexible directional characteristic that can be easily adapted to the
desired directional application. For example, the 67 may be applied for direc-
tional fault detection (i.e., as in an Impedance domain), or it is commonly used
to detect an abnormal operating condition where Watts and VARs are flowing
in the undesired direction (i.e., as in a Power domain).
In the case of either domain, the 67 direction is defined by the difference be-
tween the Positive Sequence Voltage angle (we will call Vposangle) and the Pos-
itive Sequence Current angle (we will call Iposangle).
The current reference direction is always into the transformer on the side where
the PT is connected.
The settings Alpha and Beta define the operating range of the 67 element and
both represent the Iposangle relative to the Vposangle reference. For setting, con-
sider Vposangle to be a fixed reference at 0. The current operating range starts
at the Alpha angle and ends at the Alpha + Beta angle.
For Directional Power Domain Considerations

The MW and MVAr operating range can be directly derived from angles cov-
ered by the Alpha to Alpha + Beta settings range. For the operating character-
istic, see example in Figure 4.15A and note the power quadrants defining
±MW and ±MVAr.

For Impedance Domain Considerations

Although the Alpha and Beta settings are always set in the power domain, they
can be set to cover an angle range in a desired impedance domain. In this case
it’s important to recognize that the impedance plane is the complex conjugate
of the power domain since the Positive Sequence Impedance Angle Zposangle =
Vposangle – Iposangle. For an example, see Figure 4.16B: Same settings as Fig-
ure 4.16A, but phasors represented in the Impedance domain. on page 4-34 and
note the impedance quadrants defining ±R and ±jX.
In terms of an impedance angle, the 67 Operating Range (in degrees) can be
defined as:
 Z MTA –  Beta   2   67OperateZAngle   Z MTA +  Beta   2  (67Z) (16)
where:
ZMTA is the maximum torque angle, i.e., the positive sequence
impedance angle in the center of the operating range
Beta is the Beta angle setting
67 Operate Z Angle is any angle in the operating range
Figure 4.16A: Alpha and Beta Setting example, phasors represented in the
Power domain. on page 4-34 and Figure 4.16B: Same settings as Figure
4.16A, but phasors represented in the Impedance domain. on page 4-34, but
phasors represented in the Impedance domain. represent the exact same Alpha
and Beta settings but shows how those settings may be interpreted depending
on whether you are considering the application from a Directional Power or
Directional Impedance perspective.
In our example, refer to Figure 4.17: on page 4-37 and assume the PT is on LV
side and we want the 67 to detect and trip for current flowing from the LV side
towards the HV side for a HV Side fault.
Assume that from our fault study we found that we require a Zposang MTA of
+45 (i.e., current lag voltage by 45). Also assume that in our study, we found
that a total operating range of 130 satisfies our requirements for all of the faults
we need to detect. We use Equation 67Z to determine what our Alpha and Beta
settings should be for our example:
 Z MTA –  Beta   2   67OperateZAngle   Z MTA +  Beta   2  (17)
 45 – 130  2   67OperateZAngle   45 + 130  2 
 – 20   67OperateZAngle  110
In this example we have found that we require Zposangle range between -20
to 110
Since the Alpha and Beta settings are for Iposangle (remember Vposang is 0
reference):

Iposang1 = Vposang – Zposang = 0-20 = +20 (18)
and
Iposang2 = Vposang – Zposang = 0-110 = -110 (19)
Alpha setting is the smaller of the above two Iposang = -110 (i.e., -110 is smaller
than +20).
The Beta setting is always the total desired operating range, in this example =
130.
Figure 4.16A: Alpha and Beta Setting example, phasors rep- Figure 4.16B: Same settings as Figure 4.16A, but phasors
resented in the Power domain. represented in the Impedance domain.

General Setting Rules:

• Alpha cannot be < -179.99 and cannot be > 180,
• Beta cannot be <0.1 and cannot be >360
• Beta setting of 360 makes the 67 non-directional (i.e., omni-directional)
If the current is greater than the 67 pickup setting in any phase and the positive
sequence current angle relative to the positive sequence voltage angle is within
the Alpha and Beta operating range for the duration of the 67 time characteris-
tic, then a trip output will be issued.
You can select an IEC, IEEE or user-defined inverse time characteristic of the
function.
Note that the current used in the 67 function may be the uncompensated Wye
currents or Delta Compensated currents, for details see Note regarding delta
compensated currents used in other T-PRO functions. on page 4-8.
Table 4.25: 67 Directional Overcurrent Setting Functions
Alpha Defines the starting angle for the trip region
Beta Defines the size of the trip region in degrees offset from alpha
Table 4.26: 67 Directional Overcurrent Setting Ranges
67 Enable/disable
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.001 to 1000.0
B 0.00 to 10.00
p 0.01 to 10.00
TR (seconds) 0.10 to 100.00
Alpha (degrees) -179.9.0 to 180.0
Beta (degrees) 0.1 to 360.0

67N Directional The 67N directional earth fault function in T-PRO can be also applied to either
Earth Fault the HV or LV winding, whichever has the Potential Transformer connected to
it. This function operates based on the same principle as the 67 directional
overcurrent function, except the pickup level is based on the zero sequence cur-
rent of the corresponding winding in Amps.
Table 4.27: 67N Directional Earth Fault Setting Functions
Alpha Defines the starting angle for the trip region
Beta Defines the size of the trip region in degrees offset from alpha
Table 4.28: 67N Directional Earth Fault Setting Ranges
67N Enable/disable
Pickup (A) 0.05 to 10.00 for 1 A

0.25 to 50.00 for 5 A
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.001 to 1000.0
B 0.00 to 10.00
p 0.01 to 10.00
TR (seconds) 0.10 to 100.00
Alpha (degrees) -179.9.0 to 180.0
Beta (degrees) 0.1 to 360.0

50BF Breaker The T-PRO has a breaker fail function available for each of the 5 sets of current
Fail inputs. Each of the breaker fail functions are identical in design. The breaker
fail function consists of the following parts:
• Initiating elements (selected in the Output Matrix screen).
• Overcurrent pickup level (if current detection is a selected method of de-
tecting breaker fail).
• Breaker 52A contact (if breaker auxiliary contact position is a selected
method of detecting breaker fail). 52A status can come from any of the Ex-
ternal Inputs or any ProLogic statement.
• Time Delay 1 (typically used for re-trip attempt when its output is mapped
to the breaker backup trip coil).
• Time Delay 2 (typically used to trip adjacent breakers in order to clear the
fault).
Each of the 5 breaker fail element settings are independent of each other.
The Breaker Fail Initiate element for each breaker is determined by their asso-
ciation with the HV, LV or TV winding in the Winding/CT settings. For ex-
ample if the breaker CT connected to Input 1 is from the HV transformer
winding, then Input 1 50BF function will be initiated by any inputs mapped to
BFI-HV column in the Output Matrix.
The 52A Breaker Status option, if used, looks for a 52A auxiliary contact status
the assigned relay External Input. A 52B contact could be used but it must be
converted to a 52A by inverting the status in ProLogic and then using the Pro-
Logic output as the breaker 52A status.
Figure 4.17: Breaker Fail Logic
Table 4.29: 50BF Breaker Fail Setting Functions
Current Detection Enable Enables breaker current detection functionality
Breaker Current Pickup Minimum level that operates device 50BF
52A Breaker Status Enables and selects input used for 52A status
Pickup Delay 1 Sets the delay of the breaker fail timer 1
Pickup Delay 2 Sets the delay of the breaker fail timer 2

Table 4.30: 50BF Breaker Fail Setting Ranges
Current Detection Enable Enable/Disable
Breaker Current Pickup 0.02 to 10.0 Amps (1 A)

0.10 to 50.0 Amps (5 A)
52A Breaker Status Disable or Any External Input or Any ProLogic Statement
Pickup Delay 1 0.01 to 99.99 seconds
Pickup Delay 2 0.01 to 99.99 seconds
THD Alarm
I1a THD
I1b THD
I1c THD
I2a THD
I2b THD
I2c THD
I3a THD 40.0
Level
I3b THD Max THD Alarm
Detector
I3c THD 10.0
I4a THD
I4b THD
I4c THD
I5a THD
I5b THD
I5c THD
Figure 4.18: Total Harmonic Distortion Function
The THD Alarm function alerts you to the degree of current waveform distor-
tion and therefore harmonic content.
For example, a THD setting of 10% means that the THD function operates if
the total harmonic distortion exceeds 10% of the fundamental in any of the fun-
damental protection currents.

THD = 100% times the square root of the sum of the squares of the current har-
monics (2nd – 25th) divided by the fundamental current value.
THD is defined as:

25 (20)
2
 In
n=2 -
THD = ---------------------  100
I1
where:
I1 is the fundamental component
n=2 to n=25 are the harmonics components
The inputs to this function are the THD values of all the current input channels
that are connected to the transformer. The channels that are not connected to
the transformer (e.g. for recording only) or channels with low fundamental sig-
nals (less than 14% of nominal current) are not calculated for THD. The alarm
is activated if the highest THD found exceeds the setting.
There is a built-in fixed time delay of from 30 – 40 seconds pickup and 1 – 10
seconds dropout to ensure that this is not a transient fault condition. The THD
is executed in a slow rate, once per second. The THD values are calculated
from the 96 samples buffer rather than the decimated 8 samples buffer because
higher harmonics content (up to the 25th) can be included with 96 samples.
Table 4.31: Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Alarm
THD Alarm Enable/disable
Pickup (%) 5.0 to 100.0

Through Fault The Through Fault Monitor function in T-PRO is used to analyze the thermal
Monitor and mechanical effects of through faults on the transformer. The monitored
quantities include the duration of each through fault, the current peak RMS val-
ue and the accumulated I2t value of each phase during each through fault event.
The total number of the through faults and the total accumulated I2t values of
each phase over the transformer life are also monitored.
The overall through fault monitor scheme is shown in the following figure.
Through Fault Monitor Enable
Tp1
Imax > Pickup Level Hysteresis
Td1
Through Fault
Event Initiation
Rising
Edge
start Calculation of
Through Fault Duration,
IA Peak, IB Peak, IC Peak Calculation stoped. Clear (reset) all the calculated
Falling IA*IA*t, IB*IB*t, IC*IC*t All the through fault through fault quantities so as
Edge quantities are ready. to be ready for the next
Maximum Fault through fault event
stop Duration Allowed:
30 s
2nd Harmonics I*I*t Accumulation

and Count Through Fault
Blocking Enabled Tp2 Event Logging
Increment
2nd Harmonics Td2
Restraint Signal
from Dev87
Total Accumulated IA*IA*t ≥Limit

Total Accumulated IB*IB*t ≥Limit I*I*t Alarm
Total Accumulated IC*IC*t ≥Limit
Figure 4.19: Overall Through Fault Monitor Scheme
The through fault duration is defined as the time from when the input current
Imax (the maximum current amongst phase A, B and C) exceeds the pickup
threshold to when Imax drops below the pickup threshold - hysteresis. Note that
the maximum allowed through fault duration is 30 seconds, this is to avoid the
through fault event may never stop in case the pickup setting is set improperly
so that the through fault event might be triggered under some load conditions.
Pickup delay Tp1 and dropout delay Td1 are set to zero by default, however
they can be set to other values based on the user’s needs.
The2nd harmonic restraint logic output from device 87 is used to block the cre-
ation of through fault events on magnetizing inrush. The pickup and dropout
timer (Tp2 and Td2) are used to distinguish between the 2nd harmonics caused
by the fault transient and 2nd harmonics caused by transformer energization in-
rush. 2nd harmonics in the fault current only last for a very short period of time
(e.g. 1 cycle or shorter) and 2nd harmonics in the inrush current last for quite
a long time (e.g. a second or even longer). “2nd Harmonics Content in Fault
Current” on page 4-41 shows an example of 2nd harmonics existing for a short
time on load to fault transition.

Tp2 setting (default to 20ms) is used to ensure that the 2nd harmonic blocking
will be only applied on the inrush current. Td2 setting is used to stretch the 2nd
harmonics blocking signal once it picks up ensure that cannot reset too soon
after the onset of inrush.
Figure 4.20: 2nd Harmonics Content in Fault Current
An alarm will be issued when the total accumulated I2t value of any phase ex-
ceeds the preset threshold. When this occurs, some maintenance to the trans-
former should probably be scheduled. After that is completed, the total
accumulated I2t value should be reset. The I2t alarm limit threshold may also
need to be adjusted accordingly after successive accumulated I2t values have
been reached.
The through fault events and the associated monitored quantities can be viewed
in the Event Log. The values are Through Fault Peak and Through Fault I*I*t”
in Relay Control Panel. They can also be retrieved to RecordBase View and
exported to MS Excel CSV format (refer to RecordBase View User Manual for

details). To avoid data loss of the through fault events, Event Auto Save feature
in the Record Length settings should be enabled.
Table 4.32: Through Fault Monitor Setting Ranges
Through Fault Monitor Enable/Disable
Input Current HV, LV OR TV
Pickup Level (pu) 0.10 to 20.00
Hysteresis (pu) 0.00 to MIN (1.00, Pickup Level)
Pickup Delay (Tp1, seconds) 0.00 to 99.99
Dropout Delay (Td1, seconds) 0.00 to 99.99
l*l*t Alarm Limit (kA2*s) 0.1 to 9999.9
2nd Harmonics Block Enable/Disable
2nd Harmonics Block Pickup Timer (Tp2, seconds) 0.00 to 99.99
2nd Harmonics Dropout Timer (Td2, seconds) 0.00 to 99.99

4.1 ProLogic
ProLogic With ProLogic you can select any of the protection functions, External Inputs,
Control Virtual Inputs, Output Contact status or any preceding ProLogic statements
and place them into intuitive Boolean-like statements. Each ProLogic handles
Statements up to 5 functions to generate one ProLogic statement. Twenty four statements
are possible per setting group. Each ProLogic has a pickup and dropout timer
and a custom name field. The results from these statements can be mapped to
output contacts or any of the eleven configurable front panel target LEDs in the
output matrix.
The possible gates are AND, NAND, OR, NOR, XOR, XNOR, NXOR and
LATCH.
The example shows A to E inputs are status points of devices that are user-se-
lectable. Each ProLogic output can be given a specific name, pickup and reset
time delay.
Figure 4.21: ProLogic Method
Figure 4.22: ProLogic Setting Screen

Table 4.33: ProLogic Setting Functions
Name Give the ProLogic a meaningful name.
Pickup Delay Delay time from pickup to operate
Dropout Delay Minimum time that the ProLogic will be active after it has operated.
A, B, C, D, E Relay elements as input statements.
Operators Boolean-type logic gates.

4.2 Group Logic

Each setting group has 16 Group Logic elements that can be used to switch set-
ting groups based on the conditions you choose. The boolean logic method is
similar to ProLogic. The input elements available are External Inputs, Pro-
Logic Statements and Virtual Inputs.
Figure 4.23: Group Logic Setting Screen
Table 4.34: Group Logic Setting Functions
Name Give the Group Logic a meaningful name.
Setting Group to Activate Select which Setting Group should become active when your
logic output goes high.
Pickup Delay Time that the pickup must remain active to produce a function
output.
A, B, C, D, E Selection of External Inputs, ProLogic Outputs or Virtual

Inputs as input statements.
Operators Boolean-type logic gates.

4.3 Recording Functions

The T-PRO Relay provides numerous recording and logging functions, includ-
ing a fault recorder, a trend log and an event log to analyze faults, to know the
performance of the relay and to observe the status of the protected device.
Record Recording can be initiated automatically by the relay when a fault or abnormal
Initiation condition is detected. You can set the relay to initiate a fault recording on ac-
tivation of any of its trip or alarm functions or on assertion of any external in-
puts or outputs. The assignment of fault record initiation to the various relay
functions is done in the relay’s Output Matrix settings.
A recording can also be initiated manually through the Relay Control Panel in-
terface in the Records tab.
Record Storage The T-PRO compresses records on the fly, achieving a typical lossless com-
pression rate of 4:1. As a result, the T-PRO can store up to 150 seconds of fault
recordings in non-volatile storage. If the storage is full, new records automati-
cally overwrite the oldest, ensuring that the recording function is always avail-
able.
Record A list of stored records is available through the Relay Control Panel in the Re-
Retrieval and cords tab. From Relay Control Panel you can retrieve the record and delete or
leave on the relay, graph the record, export the record to COMTRADE.
Deletion
Records are named by combining the Unit ID setting with the date and time of
the initiating record trigger.
When transferred to your computer, the record name remains unchanged and
the file extension indicates the record type: “.tpr” for transient recording, “.tpt”
for a trend recording, “.tpe” for an event recording.

4.4 Fault Recorder

Fault recording captures the input signal waveforms and other derived quanti-
ties when a fault or an abnormal situation occurs. The relay determines this by
allowing the user to select which functions in the Output Matrix should initiate
a fault recording.
The quantities recorded are:
• 18 analog channels (3 voltages and 15 currents in secondary volts and am-
peres respectively), 96 samples/cycle up to the 25th harmonic
• 9 summation channels (3-phase HV, LV and TV currents), 96 samples/cy-
cle up to the 25th harmonic
• 6 derived analog channels (3 operating currents, 3 restraint currents all are
magnitude quantities in per unit), 8 samples/cycle. These derived and an-
alog channels can be displayed on a Differential Trajectory graph).
• 9 or 20 external digital inputs, 96 samples/cycle
• 14 or 21 output contacts, 8 samples/cycle
• 30 Virtual Inputs, 8 samples/cycle
• 76 relay internal logic signals, 8 samples/cycle
• 24 ProLogic signals, 8 samples/cycle.
The recorded relay internal logic signals includes Phase segregated Start and
Trip signals of Differential trip (87), Backup Over current (50/51), Backup
Earth fault (50N/51N), Directional Over current (67), Directional Earth fault
(67N), Over voltage (59) & Under voltage (27).
Parameters that are user-selectable with respect to recording faults are:
• Record length settable from 0.20 to 10.0 seconds including 0.10 to 2.00
seconds of Pre trigger.
• Recorder Triggering: By any internal logic or external input signal

4.5 Trend Recorder

The trend recorder provides continuous, slow-speed recording of the trans-
former and its characteristics with an adjustable sample period from 3 to 60
minutes per sample. This same global trend sampling rate is applied to all the
trend quantities. The relay stores a fixed number of samples. At the nominal
sample period of 3 minutes per sample T-PRO stores one month of trend re-
cords with automatic overwrite of the oldest. If the sample interval increases to
60 minutes per sample, the relay stores 600 days of trend records.
Table 4.35: Trend Recording
Sample Interval Trend Record Length
3 minute 30 days
5 minute 50 days
10 minute 100 days
30 minute 300 days
60 minute 600 days

4.6 Event Log

The T-PRO maintains a log of events in a 250 entry circular log. Each entry
contains the time of the event plus an event description. This log includes the
time that the event took place and a predefined description of the event. Logged
events include trips, alarms, external input assertions plus internal events such
as setting changes. Trip and alarm protection events are logged only if these
events have been user-programmed to initiate output relay closures or have
been programmed to initiate fault recording in the Output Matrix of the set-
tings.
Phase information is included in event messages where appropriate. For exam-
ple, the event log entry for a device trip could be: “SubA-2011-08-18-
15:34:19.832 – 87 Trip on ABC”.
The event log can be viewed in three ways:
• Relay Front HMI.
• Relay Control Panel interface is in the Events tab.
• SCADA protocols included in the T-PRO allow the SCADA master access
to Trip and Alarm event data.
Events that occur during a transient fault recording are also embedded in the
transient record and can be viewed in Relay Control Panel, RecordBase View
and RecordGraph.
Although the event log is circular, you may ensure events are not lost by check-
ing the Event Auto Save box in the Record Length setting screen of T-PRO Of-
fliner. When this option is selected, as the event log approaches 250 events, it
will save the records to an event file “.tpe”. The event log will then ready to
capture up to 250 new events.

4.7 Fault Log

The T-PRO stores a log of faults in a 100 entry circular log. Each entry contains
the time of the fault, fault type, faulted phase, fault quantities as per the below
table. Fault log will be triggered only for trip condition and it won't log for an
alarm condition.
Table 4.36: Fault Log
Fault Type Fault Quantities
87 Phase Differential - Io A/B/C Magnitudes

- Ir A/B/C Magnitudes
87N HV, LV, TV Neutral Differential - 3I0 Io Magnitude

- 3I0 Ir Magnitude
24 Over excitation - Voltage Positive Sequence Phasor (V1)

- Frequency
59 Over voltage - VA/VB/VC Phasors

27 Under voltage
50 HV, LV, TV Phase Overcurrent - IA/IB/IC Phasors

51 HV, LV, TV Phase Overcurrent
67 Directional Phase Overcurrent - VA/VB/VC Phasors

- IA/IB/IC Phasors
50N HV, LV, TV Neutral Overcurrent - I5A Phasor (which is INhv)

51N HV, LV, TV Neutral Overcurrent - I5B Phasor (which is INlv)
- I5C Phasor (which is INtv)
The fault log can be viewed in three ways:

• Relay Front HMI.
• Relay Control Panel interface is in the Events tab.
• 61850 SCADA protocol included in the T-PRO allow the SCADA client
access to Trip event data.

4.8 Output Matrix

The T-PRO Output Matrix is organized intuitively into a series of rows and
columns. The rows contain all of the internal operating elements such as pro-
tection alarms, protection trips, ProLogic outputs, External Inputs, Virtual In-
puts. The columns contain all of the output contacts, breaker fail initiates,
recording triggers and target LED selections.
Selecting which row to connect to the column is a simple matter of placing
your mouse cursor over the desired row and column intersection and clicking.
The click of the mouse will toggle a green X on or off. If the X is present then
the item is mapped. If there is no X then the item is not mapped.
The LEDs are selectable in the last column for each row. Use the drop-down
list to select the desired LED to illuminate for the element that defines the row.
Functions that are disabled in the settings are shaded grey in the Output Matrix
and cannot be selected.
Figure 4.24: Output Matrix

5 Data Communications
5.1 Introduction
Section 5 deals with data communications with the T-PRO relay. First, the
SCADA protocol is discussed, and it is then followed by the new IEC 61850
communication standard.
The SCADA protocol deals with the Modbus and DNP (Distributed Network
Protocol) protocols. The SCADA configuration and its settings are described.
The parameters for SCADA communications are defined using T-PRO 4000
Offliner software. Finally, details on how to monitor SCADA communications
are given for maintenance and trouble shooting of the relay.
5.2 SCADA Protocol

Modbus The relay supports either a Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII SCADA connec-
Protocol tion. Modbus is available exclusively via a direct serial link.
Serial Modbus communications can be utilized exclusively via serial Port 122.
Port 122 is an RS-232 DCE DB9F port located on the back of the relay. An ex-
ternal RS-232 to RS-485 converter can be used to connect the relay to an RS-
485 network. For details on connecting to serial Port 122 see “Communicating
with the T-PRO Relay ” on page 2-3 and “Communication Port Details” on
page 2-20.
The data points available for Modbus SCADA interface are selectable by the
user. Complete details regarding the Modbus protocol emulation and data point
lists can be found in “Modbus RTU Communication Protocol” in Appendix E.
DNP Protocol The relay supports a DNP3 (Level 2) SCADA connection. DNP3 is available
via a direct serial link or an Ethernet LAN connection using either TCP or
UDP.
Serial DNP communications can be utilized exclusively via serial Port 122.
Port 122 is an RS-232 DCE DB9F port located on the back of the relay. An ex-
ternal RS-232 to RS-485 converter can be used to connect the relay to an RS-
485 network. For details on connecting to serial Port 122, see “Communicating
with the T-PRO Relay ” on page 2-3 and “Communication Port Details” on
page 2-20.
Network DNP communications can be utilized via physical LAN Port 119 or
Port 120. Port 119 is available as a RJ-45 port on the front of the relay and as
an RJ-45 or ST fiber optic port on the rear. Port 120 located on the rear of the
relay is available as an RJ-45 or ST fiber optic port. DNP communications can
be used with multiple masters when it is utilized with TCP. For details on con-
necting to the Ethernet LAN, see “Network Link” on page 2-7.

The data points available for DNP SCADA interface are selectable by the user.
Complete details regarding the DNP3 protocol emulation and data point lists
can be found in “DNP3 Device Profile” in Appendix F.
SCADA The parameters for SCADA communications may be defined using T-PRO
Configuration 4000 Offliner.
and Settings If DNP3 LAN/WAN communications were chosen, the relay's network param-
eters need to be defined. This is done via the Maintenance interface. Note that
this effort may already have been completed as part of the steps taken to estab-
lish a network maintenance connection to the relay. Establish a TUI session
with the relay and log in as Maintenance. The following screen appears:
Figure 5.1: T-PRO 4000 System Utility

Select the first option by entering the number 1 followed by <Enter>. The fol-
lowing screen appears:
Figure 5.2: Change the network parameters as needed for the particular application

Offliner SCADA Details on using the Offliner software are available in “Offliner Settings Soft-
Configuration ware” on page 6-1. Details on downloading a completed settings file to the re-
lay are available in “Sending a New Setting File to the Relay” on page 6-8.
Open the Offliner application per the instructions found in the indicated section
and highlight the SCADA Communication selection. The screen appears as
follows:
Figure 5.3: SCADA Communications
The configuration of SCADA communication parameters via the Offliner ap-

plication is very intuitive. Several settings options are progressively visible and
available depending on other selections. As noted before, there is no field to
configure the number of data and stop bits. These values are fixed as follows:
• Modbus Serial - 7 data bits, 1 stop bit
• DNP Serial - 8 data bits, 1 stop bit

Monitoring The ability to monitor SCADA communications directly can be a valuable

SCADA commissioning and troubleshooting tool. It can assist in resolving SCADA
Communications communication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing. The
utility can be accessed through the Maintenance user interface, for details see
“Maintenance Menu Commands” on page 2-15.
1. Establish a TUI session with the relay and log in as Maintenance.
2. Select the option 9 by entering the number 9 followed by Enter. The follow-
ing screen appears:
Figure 5.4: Login Screen
3. Pressing the Enter key results in all SCADA communications characters to

be displayed as hexadecimal characters. Individual exchanges are separated
by an asterisk as the following sample illustrates:

Figure 5.5: Hyperterminal
4. Press Ctrl-C to end the monitor session.

5.3 IEC61850 Communication

The IEC 61850 The Smart Grid is transforming the electrical power industry by using digital
standard technology to deliver electricity in a more intelligent, efficient and controlled
way. Embedded control and communication devices are central to this trans-
formation by adding intelligent automation to electrical networks.
The IEC 61850 standard defines a new protocol that permits substation equip-
ment to communicate with each other. Like many other manufacturers, ERL-
Phase Power Technologies is dedicated to using IEC 61850-based devices that
can be used as part of an open and versatile communications network for sub-
station automation.
The IEC 61850 defines an Ethernet-based protocol used in substations for data
communication. Substations implement a number of controllers for protection,
measurement, detection, alarms, and monitoring. System implementation is of-
ten slowed down by the fact that the controllers produced by different manu-
facturers are incompatible, since they do not support the same communication
protocols. The problems associated with this incompatibility are quite serious,
and result in increased costs for protocol integration and system maintenance.
Implementation Details
Implementation includes the following documents:
• Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
• Model Implementation Conformance Statement
• Tissues Conformance Statement
All configurable IEC61850 parameters are available via the Maintenance in-
terface. Note that this effort may already have been completed as part of the
steps taken to establish a network maintenance connection to the relay.

1. Establish a TUI session with the relay and log in as maintenance. The fol-
Figure 5.6: Maintenance Interface
2. Select the first option by entering the number 1 followed by Enter. The fol-

Figure 5.7: Change the network parameters as needed for the particular application
Note that unit’s IP address can be used on the IEC61850 client side for unique
unit identification instead of a physical device PD Name. The Publisher con-
figuration is fixed and defined in the ICD file and available for reading to any
IEC61850 client. Subscriber functionality is also fixed and supported for the
Virtual Inputs only.

6 Offliner Settings Software
6.1 Introduction
This section deals with the Offliner Settings software. The Offliner settings
software is used to create relay settings on a personal computer. Offliner pro-
vides an easy way to view and manipulate settings. Offliner supports all firm-
ware versions and has the capability to convert older setting versions into new-
er ones.
In this section, first, the Offliner features are presented. The menu and toolbar
are discussed and this is followed by a description of the Graphing and Protec-
tion functions.
Next, the Offliner features for handling backward compatibility with previous
software versions is described. Also described are methods of converting a Set-
tings File, sending a new Settings File to the relay and creating a Settings File
from an older version of the software.
Next, the RecordBase View and RecordGraph to analyze the records from a re-
lay are described.
This is followed by a lengthy description of the main branches from the Tree
View. This section provides all information for Identification, System Param-
eters, SCADA Communication, DNP Configuration, SCADA Settings sum-
mary, Record Length, Setting Groups, ProLogic, Group Logic, Output Matrix
and Settings summary.
Finally, a description of how the settings on the relay can be viewed through
the RecordBase View analysis software is provided.

Setting Tree Setting Area
Figure 6.1: Opening Screen

6.2 Offliner Features

The Offliner software includes the following menu and system tool bar.
Help - User Manual

About T-PRO Offliner
New Save Copy Undo Print About

Copy
Open Cut Paste Copy Setting Show or Hide
Graph Group Left-Hand Side
to Clipboard Tree
Figure 6.2: Top Tool Bar
Table 6.1: Windows Menu
Windows Menu Sub Menu Comment
Document Restore Restores active window to previous

Menu (Icon) size
Move Allows user to move active window
Size Allows user to resize active window
Minimize Makes the active window as small as

possible
Maximize Makes the active window as large as

possible
Close Closes the active Offliner setting docu-

ment
Next Switches to the next open Offliner set-

ting file, if more than setting file is being
edited

File Menu New Opens up a default setting file of the

most recent setting version
Open Open an existing setting file
Close Closes the active

setting document
Save Saves the active setting file
Save As Saves the active setting file with a new

name or location
Convert to Newer Convert an older setting version to a

newer version.
Print Prints graphs or setting summary

depending on active screen
Print Preview Provides a print preview of the setting

summary
Print Setup Changes printers or print options
1-8 The 8 most recently accessed setting

files
Exit Quits the program
Edit Menu Undo Undo last action
Cut Cut the selection
Copy Copy the selection
Paste Insert clipboard contents
Copy Graph Copy the graph for the active screen to

the clipboard
Copy Setting Group Copy values from one Setting Group to

another
Tools Options Displays the Options Dialog Box
Window Cascade Cascades all open windows
Tile Tiles all open windows
Hide/Show Tree If this option is checked then the LHS

Tree view will be hidden
1-9, More Windows Allows access to all open Offliner set-

ting files. The active document will
have a check beside it
Help User Manual Displays the user manual
About Offliner Displays the Offliner version
Toolbar
New Create a new document. Create a new document of the most

recent setting version
Open Open an existing document. Open an existing document

Save Save the active document. Save the active document
Cut Cut the selection. Cut selection
Copy Copy the selection. Copy the selection
Paste Insert clipboard contents. Insert clipboard contents
Undo Copy graph to clipboard. Undo last action
Copy Graph Copy the graph for the active screen to

the clipboard
Copy Setting Copy Setting Group Copy values from one Setting Group to
Group another
Show/Hide LHS If this option is checked then the LHS

Tree Tree view will be hidden
Print Print active document. Prints Graphs or the setting summary,

depending on which seen is selected
About Display program information. Displays the Offliner version

6.3 Offliner Keyboard Shortcuts

The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts that Offliner provides.
Table 6.2: Keyboard Shortcuts
Ctrl+N Opens up a default setting file of the most recent setting version
Ctrl+O Open an existing setting file
Ctrl+S Saves the active setting file
Ctrl+Z Undo
Ctrl+X Cut
Ctrl+C Copy
Ctrl+V Paste
Ctrl+F4 Closes the active Offliner setting document
Ctrl+F6 Switches to the next open Offliner setting file, if more than one setting file is being
edited
F6 Toggles between the LHS Tree view and HRS screen
F10, Alt Enables menu keyboard short-cuts
F1 Displays the user manual
Graphing Grid On/Grid Off

Protection The graph of protection elements 87, 87N, all Overcurrents, 24, 59N can be
Functions viewed in Offliner with the grid on or off by toggling the Grid On or Grid Off
button. A right-click on the trace of the curve gives the user the x and y coor-
dinates.
Refresh
This button will refresh the graph to its default view if it has been zoomed.
Print Graph
To print a particular Offliner graph, click the Print Graph button.
Zoom on Graphs
Graphs can be zoomed to bring portions of the traces into clearer display. Left-
click on the graph and drag to form a small box around the graph area. When
the user releases the mouse, the trace assumes a new zoom position determined
by the area of the zoom coordinates.
To undo the zoom on the graph, click the Refresh button.

Displaying Co-ordinates
At any time the user may right-click on the graph to display the co-ordinates of
the point the user selected.
6.4 Handling Backward Compatibility

Offliner Settings displays the version number in the second pane on the bottom
status bar. The settings version is a whole number (v3, v4,…v9, v10, v401,
etc.). Settings up to v10 are for T-PRO 8700 model relay only; v401 and higher
are for T-PRO 4000 model relays.
The Offliner Settings program is backward compatible. Open and edit older
settings files and convert older settings files to a newer version for relays with
upgraded firmware. Offliner Settings handles forward conversion only where
you can convert an older version of settings to a newer version.
Converting a 1. Open the setting file you wish to convert.

Settings File 2. In the File menu, select Convert to... and then select the version x (where x
is the newer version). A dialog box pops up prompting the user for a new file
name. You may use the same file name and overwrite the old, or you may
enter a new file name. The conversion process inserts default values for any
newly added devices in the new setting file. When the conversion is com-
plete, Offliner Settings displays the new file.
Figure 6.3: Converting Setting Files

Sending a New 1. Make sure the settings version and the serial number of the relay in the set-
Setting File to ting file match. The relay will reject the setting file if either the serial number
or the settings version do not match.
the Relay
A “serial number discrepancy” message may appear if the serial

number of setting file does not match the serial number stored in the
relay. This is to ensure the relay receives the intended settings. If this
occurs, confirm the relay serial number that you can view in Relay
Control Panel matches the serial number in the Offliner Identification
Serial No. box. Alternately you may check the Ignore Serial Number
check box to bypass serial number supervision.
2. Check the serial number and the settings version of the relay. The Device
Serial Number and Required Settings Version on the Identification screen
indicate the serial number and the settings version of the relay.
Creating a 1. Offliner Settings displays a default setting file on start up which shows the
Setting File settings version in the bottom status bar. As an example T-PRO Offliner is
shipped with a set of default sample files of older settings versions. These
from an Older sample files are “v2 sample.tps”, “v3 sample.tps”, etc.
Version
Each sample file contains default values of an older settings version. For a
new installation these sample files are placed in the default directory
C:\Program Files\ERLPhase\T-PRO Offliner Settings, or you can choose
the path during the Offliner software installation.
If an older version of T-PRO Offliner was previously installed on your PC,
then the default directory may be C:\Program Files\NxtPhase\T-PRO Of-
fliner Settings, or C:\Program Files\APT\T-PRO Offliner Settings.
2. Open a sample file of the desired version. Use File/Save As to save the sam-
ple file to a new file name and path. Then edit the setting file and the serial
number, save it and load it into the relay.

6.5 Main Branches from the Tree View

Identification
RHS - Information relating to specific menu Item,
LHS Menu Tree accessed by LHS menu or top tabs.
Nominal System Nominal CT Sec.

Unique relay serial Frequency - set to Current - set to either
number either 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A or 5 A
Figure 6.4: Relay Identification
The first screen presents all the menu items in the left menu tree. You can ac-
cess the menu items by clicking the tabs at the top of the screen or the item on
the left menu tree.
Table 6.3: Identification
Identification
Settings Version Indicates the settings version number, fixed.
Ignore Serial Number Bypass serial number check, if enabled.
Serial Number Available at back of each relay.
Unit ID User-defined up to 20 characters.
Nominal CT Sec. Current 5 A or 1 A
Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz or 50 Hz

Table 6.3: Identification
Standard I/O 9 External Inputs, 14 Output Contacts
Optional I/O 9Not Installed or 11 External Inputs, 7 Output Contacts
Comments User-defined up to 78 characters.
Setting Software
Setting Name User-defined up to 20 characters.
Date Created/Modified Indicates the last time settings were entered.
Station
Station Name User-defined up to 20 characters.
Station Number User-defined up to 20 characters.
Location User-defined up to 20 characters.
Bank Name User-defined up to 20 characters.
Important Note
Nominal CT Sec. Current can be set to either 1 A or 5 A.
Nominal System Frequency can be set to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Ensure setting file selection matches that of target T-PRO.
The serial number of the relay must match the one in the setting file,
or the setting will be rejected by the relay. This feature ensures that
the correct setting file is applied to the right relay.
You can choose to ignore the serial number enforcement in the iden-
tification screen. The relay only checks for proper relay type and set-
ting version if the ignore serial number has been chosen.

Analog Inputs
Figure 6.5: Analog Inputs
Identify all AC voltage and current inputs to the relay. These names appear in
any fault disturbance records the relay produces.
Table 6.4: Analog Input Names
Voltage Inputs VA, VB, VC
Current Inputs IA1, IB1, IC1
IA2, IB2, IC2
IA3, IB3, IC3
IA4, IB4, IC4
IA5, IB5, IC5
Temp Inputs Temp 1, Temp 2

External Inputs
Figure 6.6: External Inputs
Define meaningful names for the external digital inputs.
Table 6.5: External Input Names
1 to 9
User-defined
And Optional 10 to 20

Output Contacts
Figure 6.7: Output Contacts
Define meaningful names for the output contacts.
Table 6.6: Output Contact Names
Outputs 1 to 14
User-defined
And Optional 15 to 21

Virtual Inputs
Figure 6.8: Virtual Inputs
Define meaningful names for the virtual inputs.
Table 6.7: Virtual Input Names
Inputs 1 to 30 User-defined

Setting Groups
Figure 6.9: Setting Group Names
Define meaningful names for the setting groups.
Table 6.8: Setting Group Names
Setting Groups 1 to 8 User-defined

Nameplate Data
Figure 6.10: Nameplate Data

The transformer in the example of Figure 6.10: Nameplate Data on page 6-16
has a maximum rating of 100 MVA, and that value becomes the per unit base
quantity for the relay. Any reference to “per unit” in the settings is related to
the Base MVA.
The temperature rise value and the cooling method provided form the basis for
loss of life calculations of the transformer. When “User-Defined” is selected as
transformer cooling method, the seven transformer temperature parameters be-
come editable.
If you select other cooling methods, these parameters are no longer editable,
and the default values based on IEEE standards are used for the transformer
temperature calculation.
Table 6.9: Nameplate Data
Transformer 3-phase Capacity (MVA) 1 to 2000
Transformer Windings 2 or 3
Tap Changer Range (percent) -100 to 100
Normal Loss of Life Hot Spot Temperature

70.0 to 200.0
(degrees)
Transformer Temperature Rise (degrees) 55 or 65

Table 6.9: Nameplate Data
Transformer Cooling Method Self-cooled

Forced air cooled, (ONAN/ONAF) rated 133% or
less of self cooled rating
Forced air cooled, directed flow (ODAF, ODWF,
ONAN /ODAF/ODAF)
Forced air cooled, (ONAN/ONAF/ONAF) rated
over 133% of self-cooled rating
Forced air cooled, non-directed flow (OFAF/
OFWF, ONAN /OFAF /OFAF)
User-defined
Temp. Rise Hot Spot (TriseHS) (degrees) 10 to 110
Temp. Rise Top Oil (TriseTop) (degrees) 10 to 110
Temp. Time Const. Hot Spot (TauHS)

0.01 to 2.00
(hours)
Temp. Time Const. Top Oil (TauTop)

0.02 to 20.00
(hours)
Ratio of Load Loss to Iron Loss (R) 0.50 to 10.00
Hot Spot Temp. Exponent (m) 0.50 to 2.00
Top Oil Temp. Exponent (n) 0.50 to 2.00

Connections Windings/CT Connections
Figure 6.11: Windings /CT
These settings provide the T-PRO with the information related to CT ratios,
winding connections (wye or delta), main winding nominal voltage and main
winding connection. The relay allows any combination of wye and delta con-
nections.
The field location associated with the PT ratio is user-selectable and you can
connect to the HV or the LV side. The field toggles when clicked between HV
and LV.
You can assign five sets of AC currents to the HV, LV, TV sides or to NC (not
connected). Assigning a current to NC makes it available for recording only.
In our example of Figure 6.11: Windings /CT:
• Inputs 1 & 2 are assigned to the HV (high voltage) side
• Inputs 3 & 4 are assigned to the LV (low voltage) side
• Input 5 is assigned to the TV (tertiary voltage) side
The current inputs must have at least one input on each of the HV, LV and TV
side. An error message appears if this is violated. If the 51N or 87N functions
are used, they shall use analog input # 5.

You can use the 87N in T-PRO for autotransformers provided there is a neutral
CT and the HV and LV CTs are wye connected. If that is the case, analog input
IA5 (normally associated with HV) becomes the input for this current. IB5 and
IC5 are then not used for protection. However, they could be used to record
currents from other CT sources.
T-PRO allows assignment of external control of each ac input as indicated in
Figure 6.11: Windings /CT. In this example the ac current inputs 1, 2, 3 are
controlled by external inputs 1, 2, 3 respectively. The ac current input will be
internally turned off when the corresponding external input is high. In general,
each of 5 ac current inputs can be controlled by any of the relay’s external in-
puts and the differential and overcurrent protections will automatically adapt
to the configuration change in real time.
Table 6.10: Winding CT Connection
Transformer Nameplate
Winding HV LV TV
Voltage (kV) LV to 1000.0 TV to HV 1.0 to LV
Connection Choose delta or wye Choose delta or wye Choose delta or wye
Phase (degree) 0, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, -150, -120, -90, -60, -30
(Options depend on wye or delta connection)
Voltage Input Connection
PT Turns Ratio (:1) 1.0 to 10000.0
Location HV or LV
Current Input Connection
Current Input 1 to 5
Winding HV, LV, TV, NC, 51N/87N (for Input 5), 87N auto (for Input 5)
CT Connection Choose delta or wye
CT Phase (degree) 0, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, -150, -120, -90, -60, -30
(Options depend on wye or delta connection)
CT Turns Ratio (:1) 1.00 to 50000.0
External Control None, EI 1 to EI 20
Neutral CT Turns
1.00 to 50000.0
Ratio (:1)

Zig-Zag Transfomer Support

When creating a setting file for a zig-zag transformer, user shall configure the
zig-zag side of the winding as a Y connection. Winding connections and phase
angle options corresponding to commonly used zig-zag transformer types are
summarized in Table 6.11: on page 6-20. In these settings, High voltage (HV)
side of the windings are used as the reference.
Table 6.11: Zig Zag Transformer Support
Connection
LV Phase
Zig Zag Transformer Type
HV (Degree)
LV
(Ref)
DZ0 delta wye 0
YZ1 wye wye -30
YZ5 wye wye -150
DZ6 delta wye 180
YZ11 wye wye 30
DZ2 delta wye -60
DZ4 delta wye -120
YZ7 wye wye 150
DZ8 delta wye 120
DZ10 delta wye 60

Temperature Scaling
Figure 6.12: Temperature Scaling
Ambient and Top Oil Temperature

The Ambient and Top Oil temperatures are related to a corresponding milliamp
(mA) input current quantity. The upper and lower temperature levels corre-
spond to upper and lower mA levels. If the mA input received is outside of this
range, an alarm will be initiated to indicate the over or under condition. You
can also set whether the top oil is sensed or calculated.
Table 6.12: Temperature Scaling
Ambient
Maximum Valid Tempera-

x to 50.0, x = Minimum Valid Temperature +10°
ture (degrees)
Minimum Valid Temperature

-50.0 to x, x = Maximum Valid Temperature -10°
(degrees)
Maximum Current Value

x to 20.00, x = Minimum Current Value +1 mA
(mA)
Minimum Current Value

4.00 to x, x = Maximum Current Value -1 mA
(mA)
Top Oil

Table 6.12: Temperature Scaling
Calculated Enable/disable
Sensed Enable/disable
Maximum Valid Tempera-

x to 200.0, x = Minimum Valid Temperature +10°
ture (degrees)
Minimum Valid Temperature

-50.0 to x, x = Maximum Valid Temperature -10°
(degrees)
Maximum Current Value

x to 20.00, x = Minimum Current Value +1 mA
(mA)
Minimum Current Value

4.00 to x, x = Maximum Current Value -1 mA
(mA)

SCADA
Communication
Figure 6.13: SCADA Communication
The relay has configurable SCADA communication parameters for both Serial
and Ethernet (TCP and UDP). For DNP3 Level 2 (TCP) up to 3 independent
Masters are supported.

DNP DNP Configuration - Class Data

Configuration
Figure 6.14: DNP Configuration - Class Data
Class data for each DNP point can be assigned on the Class Data screen. Only
Points which were mapped in the Point Map screen will appear here. Sections
for Binary Inputs and Analog Inputs appear here; Binary Outputs cannot be as-
signed a Class. The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand
side.
In addition to assigning a Change Event Class to each mapped point, most An-
alog Inputs can also be assigned a Deadband and Scaling factor.

DNP Configuration - Point Map
Figure 6.15: DNP Configuration - Point Map
The relay has configurable DNP point mapping. On the Point Map screen, any
of the configurable points may be added or removed from the Point List by
clicking (or using the cursor keys and space bar on the keyboard) on the asso-
ciated check box. A green 'X' denotes that the item will be mapped to the Point
List.
The list contains separate sections for Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs, and An-
alog Inputs. The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand
side.

SCADA
Settings
Summary
Figure 6.16: SCADA Settings Summary
This screen provides a summary of the current SCADA settings as set in the
working setting file. This includes SCADA Communication parameters and (if
the SCADA mode is set to DNP) Binary Input, Binary Output, and Analog In-
put information including Deadband and Scaling factors.
This SCADA Summary screen is scrollable and can be printed.
Record Length
Figure 6.17: Record Length
Define the fault recording record length and the Output Matrix characteristics.

• Fault record sampling rate fixed at 96 samples per cycle

• Record length is settable between 0.2 and 10 seconds
• Prefault time is settable from 0.10 to 2.00 seconds.
• Thermal logging rate is settable between 3 and 60 minutes per sample.
Table 6.13: Record Length
Fault
Prefault time is configurable between 0.10 to 2.00 seconds.
Sample Rate fixed at 96 samples per cycle.
Fault Record Length (seconds) 0.2 to 10.0
Thermal Logging Settable between 3 and 60 minutes
Trend Sampling (minutes/sample) 3 to 60
Event Auto Save Enable/Disable
Setting Groups
Figure 6.18: Setting Groups Comments
The relay has 8 setting groups (SG). The user can change all relay setting pa-
rameters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in
each setting group. Use any one of the 16 available Group Logic Statements
per setting group to perform Setting Group changes. The Group Logic state-
ments are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following exceptions, the
sole function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the processing is in
a slower half second cycle. Group Logic inputs statements can be driven from
ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous Group Logic

statements. Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs (with Boolean state-
ments), one latch state and one pickup delay timer. View the active setting
group (ASG) from the Terminal Mode, from the front panel or from a record
stored by the relay (the active setting group is stored with the record).
Protection The protection function features are described in detail, “Protection Functions
Functions and Specifications” on page 4-1.
Figure 6.19: Protection Functions

ProLogic
Figure 6.20: ProLogic Example - Lockout Trip
The T-PRO’s ProLogic feature provides Boolean control logic (graphically-

driven) with multiple inputs combined through logic gates and a timer to create
a custom element or function. Up to 24 ProLogic control statements can be cre-
ated and the logic outputs can be used to provide a variety of functions, such
as: provide a breaker status, switch setting group, initiate a recording, provide
an output.
You can provide a meaningful name for the function you are creating and apply
a pickup and dropout delay. Start with Input A by selecting any of the relay
functions or digital inputs from the pulldown list. Repeat for up to 5 possible
inputs. Combine these inputs with INVERT, AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR,
XNOR, LATCH gates by clicking on the gate. Invert the input by clicking on
the input line.
The output of ProLogic 1 can be nested into ProLogic 2, ProLogic 1 and Pro-
Logic 2 can be nested into to ProLogic 3 and so forth. The ProLogic may be
mapped to one of the user configurable LED’s in the Output Matrix screen. The
operations of the ProLogic statements are logged in the events listing. ProLog-
ic high and low states are also shown in the fault recordings.
The Figure 6.20: on page 6-29 shows possible ProLogic settings to produce a
lockout output. In the example, operation of device 87, receipt of Fast Gas
Trip, operation of device 87N or TOEWS trip results in a lockout trip where an
output contact is held closed until a lockout reset input is received. This lockout
reset quantity could be an external input, virtual input or another function with-
in the relay.

Output Matrix
The Output Matrix is where the user shall assign Protection Functions to Out-
puts contacts, initiate breaker fail, trigger Fault Recordings and to illuminate
Target LEDs.
All of the Protection Functions, ProLogics, External Inputs and Virtual Inputs
are organized into horizontal rows with all of the names listed in the left-most
column. Disabled elements have their rows greyed-out, will be ignored by the
relay and cannot be selected in the Output Matrix as long as the element re-
mains disabled. A scroll bar at the right of the Output Matrix allows you to
scroll up and down to reveal all of the rows. The top row defines the purpose
of each column, including, output contact numbers, breaker fail initiates for the
HV, LV and TV breakers, transient fault recording and Target LED.
Each coordinate, where the row (input element) meets a column (output ele-
ment), is defined by a check box. Each column of check boxes can be thought
of a one large OR gate. Place the mouse cursor over the check box at the de-
sired coordinate and click to toggle the status between mapped and unmapped.
A mapped check box will be marked with a green “X”.
The extreme right column has a drop-down pick list in each cell, where the user
selects the LED (or none) that should be illuminated by the protection function
of same row.
Protection Elements labeled as Alarm (e.g., “24INV Alarm”) are activated by
the pickup of the element when the element’s threshold has been exceeded

(i.e., when the element’s timer is initiated). These elements are typically used
for testing purposes.
All output relays have a fixed 0.1 second stretch time after the dropout of the
initiating element.
For a particular function to operate correctly, it must be enabled and

must also have its logic output assigned to at least one output contact
if it is involved in a tripping function.
Print the entire output matrix by selecting the printer icon. This printout is pro-
duced on multiple pages determined by the your “Print Setup” settings. Typical
print setup to not split the columns on letter size paper could be: Landscape,
Scaling approximately 80%. It’s recommended to preview the print job for
your printer settings and making any require scaling adjustments prior to exe-
cuting the final print command.

Setting You may print the settings for all elements, or you may choose to print the En-
Summary abled element settings only. To print the Enabled protection element settings
only, select from the Offliner menu bar: Tools/Options and check “Display
And Print Only Enabled Protection Elements”.
To initiate the print output, select “Setting Summary” in the element tree, then
click anywhere in the T-PRO Setting Summary area. This will activate the
Print icon to enable printing.
v8
Figure 6.22: Settings Summary

6.6 RecordBase View Software
Figure 6.23: RecordBase View
Use RecordBase View to store and analyze the records from a relay.
1. Set the data storage location on your hard drive from within Relay Control
Panel. Select File and Set Data Location dialog box will appear. The relay
Records and Setting Files will be saved in your chosen path in your compu-
ter.
2. Select one or more records on the relay using the Records function in Relay
Control Panel.
3. Initiate transfer of the selected records to your computer.
4. Start the RecordBase View program and use the File>Open menu command
to open the downloaded record files located in the receive directory speci-
fied in step 1.
For further instructions refer to the RecordBase View Manual at the

back of the printed version of this manual.

7 Acceptance/Protection Function Test
Guide
7.1 Relay Testing
ERLPhase relays are fully tested before leaving the factory. A visual inspec-
tion of the relay and its packaging is recommended on receipt to ensure the re-
lay was not damaged during shipping.
The electronics in the relay contain static sensitive devices and are
not user-serviceable. If the relay is opened for any reason exposing
the electronics, take extreme care to ensure that you and the relay
are solidly grounded.
Generally an analog metering check and a test of the I/O (External Inputs and
Output Contacts) upon delivery and acceptance is sufficient to ensure the func-
tionality of the relay. Further tests, according to the published relay specifica-
tions in “IED Settings and Ranges” in Appendix B, can be performed at the
purchaser’s option
The following test section is intended to be a guide for testing the protection
elements in the T-PRO relay. The most convenient time to perform these tests
is upon receipt and acceptance by the customer, prior to in-service settings be-
ing applied. Once the in-service settings are applied, ERLPhase recommends
that enabled functions be tested during commissioning to ensure that the in-
tended application is fulfilled.
Test Equipment • 3 voltage sources

Requirements • 2 sets of 3-phase currents recommended (to test differential element), but
can be completed single-phase by using 1 set of 3-phase currents with var-
iable frequency capability.
• 1 ohmmeter
• 1 dc mA calibrating source
or
• a 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ 1.0 Watt variable resistor and a milliammeter up to 25 mA
Set nominal CT secondary current to either 5 A or 1 A, and nominal

system frequency to either 60 Hz or 50 Hz. This example uses 5 A/
60 Hz.

7 Acceptance/Protection Function Test Guide
Calibration
The T-PRO is calibrated before it leaves the factory and should not
require recalibration unless component changes are made within the
relay.
Before you begin a new calibration establish the accuracy of the

equipment being used.
To perform a calibration, you must be logged into the relay in Relay Control
Panel at the Service access level:
1. Proceed to the Utilities>Analog Input Calibration tab. The Analog Input
Calibration screen lists all of the T-PRO analog input channels.
2. Select the channel to calibrate with your mouse (you may select and calibrate
multiple channels at once as long as they are the same qualities).
3. Enter the exact Magnitude of the Applied Signal you are applying your test
source.
4. Execute the Calibrate Offset and Gain button.
Figure 7.1: Enter the actual applied signal level
If the applied test signal is not reasonable, an error will be displayed and the
calibration will not be applied. For example, in Figure 7.2: on page 7-3, the dis-

played calibration error message indicates that we tried to calibrate a 5 amp

level with no current applied, which is not reasonable.
Figure 7.2: Calibration error - out of range
Only the magnitude (gain) and offset are calibrated, not the angle.
When an analog input channel is calibrated, you can verify the quantity mea-
sured by selecting the Metering menu and the Analog Quantity submenu.

7.2 Testing the External Inputs
External Inputs are Polarity Sensitive!
To test the external inputs, login to the T-PRO using Relay Control Panel at
any access level and select the Metering>External Inputs tab which displays
the status of all External Inputs (either High or Low). Placing 125 Vdc across
each external input in turn will cause the input to change status from Low to
High. The external inputs metering screen in Relay Control Panel has approx-
imately 0.5 second update rate.

7.3 Testing the Output Relay Contacts

Access the T-PRO service level in Relay Control Panel. Open the Utili-
ties>Toggle Outputs tab screen. To toggle outputs you first need to enter Test
Mode by selecting the Relay in Test Mode check box. When you check the box,
a message will appear prompting you to confirm that you really want to enter
this mode.
Once you enter Test Mode, the red Test Mode LED on the front of the T-PRO
will illuminate and it will remain illuminated until you exit Test Mode. The
protection functions cannot access the output contacts in Test Mode; they are
controllable only by the user via Relay Control Panel.
To toggle a particular output, select it from the drop down list and then click
on the Closed button. You can verify the contact is closed with an ohmmeter.
The contact will remain closed until you either click the Open button or exit
Test Mode.
Figure 7.3: Test Output Contacts

7.4 T-PRO Test Procedure Outline

Devices to Test
• 60 - AC Loss of Potential
• 24INV - Time Inverse Overexcitation (v/f)
• 24DEF - Definite Time Overexcitation
• 59N - Zero Sequence Overvoltage
• 27 - Undervoltage
• 81-1 - Set to fixed Over Frequency
• 81-3 - Set to fixed Under Frequency
• 50N/51N - Neutral Overcurrent
• 67 - Directional Overcurrent
• 67N - Directional Earth Fault
• 50/51 - Phase Overcurrent
• 51 ADP - Adaptive Overcurrent
• Top Oil Temperature Alarm
• Ambient Temperature Alarm
• 49 - Thermal Overload
• 49 - TOEWS
• 59 - Overvoltage
• 50BF - Breaker Fail
• 87 - Differential (Single- and Three-Phase)
• THD Alarm
• 87N - Neutral Differential

Settings and In order to clarify the expected relay action for each test, the settings are pro-
Transformer vided in the test examples. Alternately, you could substitute the settings in this
procedure with your own settings and modify the test accordingly using the de-
Connections scribed calculation processes.
The Nameplate and Connection settings for tests that follow are:
• MVA: 100
• Windings: 2
• HV kV: 230 Y (0°)
• LV kV: 115 Delta (-30°)
• HV CT: 250:1 Y (0°)
• LV CT: 500:1 Y (0°)
• PT Location: HV Side
• Base Frequency: 60 Hz (1.0 per unit frequency)
Calculated Values
The PT location is on the HV side, therefore the reference side is HV.
Nominal secondary phase to phase HVkV 230kV (1)

-------------------- = ---------------- = 115.0V
voltage = PTratio 2000
Nominal secondary phase to neu- 115 (2)

--------- = 66.4V
tral voltage = 3
Primary Ibase = kVA 100e3 (3)

------------------ = -------------------- = 251A
3  kV 3  230
Secondary Ibase = PrimaryIbase 251A (4)

------------------------------------ = ------------- = 1.004A
CTratio 250

7-8
1K
to
mA Meter
10K
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 9 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
10 11 12 13 14
87, 51Trip, 49-2, 27, 67- 59N- 60, THD, AMB TOP T 49-1 81, 50, 230 231 232 233 234 235
O Amb. Top 30V
24Def ADP, 51N- 67Alm, Trip Trip, 24Inv- 51N- TMP OIL E 50N Gas,
59N Alm Trip 24Inv- 87N Alarm, Alarm Temp W Wdg Temp. Oil Isol.
Trip 51Alarm S Temp Temp. DC
T-PRO 4000 SIMPLIFIED REAR VIEW

I1ABC (HV Inputs) I2ABC (LV Inputs) I5 (Neutral Inputs)
VOLTAGES Power
301 303 305 307 309 311
T-PRO 4000 User Manual

...Inputs 3 and 4... 325 327 329 Supply
300 302 304 306 308 310 330 331 332 333 336 337
324 326 328
Figure 7.4: Suggested Test Connections for Acceptance Tests

IA IB IC IN These Currents VA VB VC VN
required for Slope
Testing or LV Pickup
only
Regulated Voltage and Current Source
D02705R01.21
Note 1
Where each test specifies “Metering>Logic tab”, you view the following Relay
Control Panel metering screens:
Figure 7.5: Metering Logic 1
60 Loss of Settings (only Enable Setting can be modified)

Potential Test • Voltage = 0.5 per unit on 1 or 2 phases (does not operate on loss of 3 phas-
es).
• As shown in Figure 7.6: on page 7-9 map the 60 element mapped to Out 7
in the Output Matrix.
59 VA (fixed 0.5 pu)

Out 7
Figure 7.6: Logic, Loss of Potential (60)

60 Test Procedure
1. Access Relay Control Panel Metering>Logic 1 or Front HMI, Meter-
ing>Logic>Logic Protections 1.
2. Monitor the following element for pickup: “60 Alarm”.
3. Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltage (66.4 V) to the T-PRO terminals:
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0 °
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120 °
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120 °
Ph N: 333
4. Observe: 60 Alarm = Low.
5. Remove the voltage from any single phase:
60 Alarm = High
6. Turn all voltage off.
60 Alarm = Low
Timing Test
1. Monitor timer stop on 60 Alarm Contact (Output Contact 7in our settings).
2. Apply 3 phase voltages as in Step 3 above.
3. Set timer to start from single-phase 66.4 V to 0 V transition (i.e. V On to V
Off).
4. Time from V Off to Out 7 Closed (expect 10 seconds).
5. End of 60 test.
24 Settings
Overexcitation • 24INV Pickup = 1.2 per unit = 1.2 * 66.4 V @ 60 Hz = 79.7 V @ 60 Hz
Test • K = 0.1
• 24DEF Pickup = 1.25 per unit = 1.25 * 66.4 V @ 60 Hz = 83 V @ 60 Hz
• As shown in Figure 7.7: on page 7-10, map the elements to outputs in the
Output Matrix:
Map 24INV Alarm to Out7
Map 24INV Trip to Out4
Map 24DEF to Out1
24DEF Enabled DTD

Out 1
24VPOS/Freq 0
Out 7
24INV Enabled
Out 4
24VPOS/Freq
Figure 7.7: Logic, Overexcitation (24)

24INVerse and 24DEFinite Test Procedure

2. Monitor the following elements for pickup: 24INV Alarm, 24DEF Trip.
3. Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltage at nominal frequency to the T-PRO
terminals:
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0 °
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120 °
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120 °
Ph N: 333
4. Slowly ramp the 3-phase voltage up.
At 79.5 – 80.5 V (expect 79.7 V):
24INV Alarm = High
At 82.5 – 83.5 V (expect 83.0 V):
24DEF Trip = High
5. Turn voltages off.
24INV Alarm = Low
24DEF Trip = Low
24INV Timing Test

1. Monitor timer stop on 24INV Trip Contact (Output Contact 4 in our set-
tings).
2. Set timer to start from 3-phase 0.0 V to 86.3 V transition (this equates to 1.3
per unit @ 60 Hz)
Time Delay = K 0.1 0.1 (5)

----------------------------------2- = -------------------------------------------------2 = ---------- = 10s
v 86.3 79.68 0.01
-- – Pickup  ----------  -------------
f  66.4  66.4 
---------------- – -------------------
60 60
Where: v is the per unit voltage

f is the per unit frequency.
Vary either v or f.
In this example we’re varying v only (with fre-
quency fixed @ 60 Hz = 1.0 per unit).
3. End of 24 test.

59N Zero Settings

Sequence • 59N (3V0) Pickup = 75 V
Overvoltage • Time Curve = IEC Standard Inverse
(3V0) Test A = 0.14
B=0
p = 0.02
TMS = 0.2
• As shown in Figure 7.8: on page 7-12, map elements to outputs in the Out-
put Matrix
Map 59N Alarm to Out 2
Map 59N Trip to Out 6
Out 2
59N Enabled
Out 6
24VPOS/Freq
Figure 7.8: Logic, Zero Sequence OverVoltage (59N)
59N (3V0) Test Procedure

2. Monitor the following element for pickup: 59N Alarm.
3. Apply 3-phase prefault voltages (all in-phase) to the T-PRO terminals as fol-
lows:
Ph A: 330, 20 V 0 °
Ph B: 331, 20 V 0 °
Ph C: 332, 20 V 0 °
Ph N: 333
Note: The above prefault 3V0 = VA + VB + VC = (20V 0 ° + 20V 0 ° +
20V 0 ° = 60V 0 °)
4. Slowly ramp the 3-phase voltage up.
At 24.5 – 25.5 V per phase (expect 25.0 V):
59N Alarm = High
5. Turn voltage off.
59N Alarm = Low
Timing Test
1. Monitor timer stop on 59N Trip Contact (Output Contact 6 in our settings).
2. Set timer start from 3-phase 0.0 V to 50.0 V transition (all at 0°).
3V0 = 500 + 500 + 500 = 150 V (This equates to 2x pickup.)

Time (6)
Delay = A 0.14 0.14
TMS  B + ----------------------------------- - =  0.2  ------------- = 2.0s
= 0.2  0 + -------------------------------
3VO 
 -----------------
p
 150
0.02 0.014
 Pickup-
–1 -
 --------
–1
75 
3. End of 59N test.
27 (27-1 Single- For this example testing only 27-2 is utilized, configured as a 3 Phase Under-
Phase [OR], 27- voltage.
2 3-Phase Testing 27-1 with the settings specified below is just a matter of enabling 27-
[AND] Test) 1 and reducing only one-phase voltage.
Settings
• 27-1 Gate = OR (single-phase)
• 27-1 Pickup = 50 V secondary
• 27-1 Delay = 0.5 seconds
• 27-2 Gate = AND (3-phase)
• 27-2 Pickup = 50 V secondary
• 27-2 Delay = 0.6 seconds
put Matrix:
Map 27-2 to Out 4
27-1 Undervoltage
27 Va
27 Vb 188
T
27 Vc
O
189
27-2 Undervoltage
27 Va
27 Vb 190
27 Vc
191 T
Out 4
O
Figure 7.9: Logic, UnderVoltage (27)

27 Three-Phase Undervoltage Test Procedure

1. Access Relay Control Panel Metering > Logic 1 or Front HMI, Metering >
Logic > Logic Protections 1.
2. Monitor the following element for pickup: 27-2 Alarm.
3. Apply balanced 3-phase voltage to the T-PRO terminals as follows:
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0 °
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120 °
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V 120 °
Ph N: 333
4. Slowly and simultaneously ramp the 3-phase voltage magnitudes down.
At 50.5 to 49.5 V per phase (expect 50.0 V):
27-2 Alarm = High
6. End of 27 test.
81 Over/Under Settings
Frequency Test • 81-1 Over Frequency Pickup = 61 Hz
• 81-2 Over Frequency Rate of Change = 0.1 Hz/second
• 81-3 Under Frequency Pickup = 59 Hz
• 81-4 Under Frequency Rate of Change = -0.1Hz/second
• All Time Delays = 0.2 seconds
put Matrix:
Map all 81 Trip elements to Out 13

81-1 Frequency or Df/Dt T

Out 13
0
200 ms
Vpos > 0.25 pu (or 5 V)
0

Out 13
0
200 ms
Vpos > 0.25 pu (or 5 V)
0

Out 13
0
200 ms
Vpos > 0.25 pu (or 5 V)
0

Out 13
0
200 ms
Vpos > 0.25 pu (or 5 V)
0
Figure 7.10: Logic, Over/Under/Rate of Change of Frequency (81)
81 Test Procedure
2. Monitor the following elements for pickup: 81-1 Trip, 81-3 Trip.
3. Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltages at nominal frequency to the T-
PRO terminals.
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333
4. Slowly ramp at < 0.1 Hz/second (e.g. +0.05Hz/second) the 3-phase voltage
frequency up towards 61 Hz.
At 60.99 – 61.01 Hz observe:
81-1 = High
5. Slowly ramp (> -0.1 Hz/second e.g.: -0.05 Hz/second) the 3-phase voltage
frequency down towards 59 Hz.
At 58.99 – 59.01 Hz observe:
81-3 = High


81-1 = Low
81-3 = Low
7. End of 81 test
50N/51N Neutral Settings

Instantaneous • 50N Pickup = 5.0 A
and Time • 51N Pickup = 2.0 A
Overcurrent • Time Curve = IEEE Extremely Inverse
Test
A = 5.64
B= 0.0243
p=2
TMS = 5.0
put Matrix:
50N HV mapped to Out 13
51N HV Pickup mapped to Out 8
51N HV Trip mapped to Out 3
50NHV Enabled Tp
Out 13
50HV 3IO 0
Out 8
51NHV Enabled
Out 3
51HV 3IO
Figure 7.11: Logic, Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent (50N/51N)
50N and 51N Test Procedure

2. Monitor for pickup: 51N Alarm.
3. Apply one-phase current to the T-PRO terminals:
Ph N: 324 – 325, 1.8 A (note: I5 A is the input for HV neutral)
4. Slowly ramp the current up.
At 1.95 to 2.05 A (expect 2.00 A):
51N Alarm = High
5. Continue to raise current.
At 4.90 to 5.10 A (expect 5.00 A):
50N Trip = High
6. Turn currents off.

51N Alarm = Low

50N Trip = Low
51N HV Timing Test

1. Monitor timer stop on 51N Trip Contact (Output Contact 3 in our settings)
2. Set timer start from one-phase 0.0 amp to 8.00 A transition (This equates to
4x pickup.).
Time Delay =
A 5.64 5.64 (7)

TMS  B + -----------------------------------
- = 5  0.0243 + ------------------
- = 5  0.0243 + ---------- = 2.00s
 I multiple  – 1
p
4  – 1
2 15
3. End of 50N/51N test.
67 Directional Settings
Time • 67 Pickup = 1.2 per unit
Overcurrent • Alpha = 180° (This is the positive sequence current angle start point with
Test respect to positive sequence voltage angle.)
• Beta = 180° (This is the operating “Window”. In this case the 67 element
should operate between [Alpha to (Alpha + Beta)] = [180° to (180° +
180°)] = 180° to 360
Time Curve = IEEE Moderately Inverse
A = 0.0103
B = 0.0228
p = 0.02
TMS = 8.0
put Matrix:
67 Pickup mapped to Out 4
67 Trip mapped to Out 5
PT = LV Side
Alpha < (Line Angle) < (Alpha + Beta) Out 4
ILVMax pu
Out 5
PT = HV Side
Alpha < (Line Angle) < (Alpha + Beta)
IHVMax pu
Figure 7.12: Logic, Directional Overcurrent (67)

67 Test Procedure
2. Monitor the following element for pickup: 67 Alarm.
3. Following are the default test quantities (future tests will refer to these de-
fault test quantities).
Apply balanced 3-phase currents to the T-PRO terminals as follows:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 1.0 A -90°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 1.0 A +150°
Ph C: 304 – 305, 1.0 A +30°
(in the test when we refer to ramping Ph A angle, we mean ramp all 3 phase
balanced angles simultaneously)
4. Apply single-phase polarizing voltage to:
Ph A: 330 – 333, 66.4 V 0°
5. Slowly ramp the 3-phase currents magnitudes up.
At 1.15 to 1.25 A (expect 1.20 A):
67 Alarm = High
6. Increase currents to 2.0 A.
Observe: 67 Alarm = High
7. Ramp 3 phase current angles in positive direction from -90°.
At -1.0° to +1.0° (expect 0°):
67 Alarm = Low
8. Return current angles to -90, +150, +30.
9. Ramp current angle in negative direction from -90°.
At -179° to -181° (expect -180°):
67 Alarm = Low
10. Turn currents OFF (Keep voltage On for the timing test).
67 Alarm = Low
67 Timing Test
1. Monitor timer stop on 67 Trip Contact (Output Contact 5 in the settings)
2. Set timer start from 3-phase currents at default angles, 0 A to 3.60 A transi-
tion (3x pickup).
Time Delay = (8)
A 0.0103 0.0103
T M S  B + -----------------------------------
- = 8  0.0228 + ------------------------
- = 8  0.0228 + ---------------- = 3.89 s
Im ultiple  – 1
p
3 
0.02
–1 0.0222
3. End of 67 test.

67N Directional Settings

Earth Fault Test • 67N Pickup = 1.2 A
• Alpha = 180° (This is the positive sequence current angle start point with
respect to positive sequence voltage angle.)
• Beta = 180° (This is the operating “Window”. In this case the 67 element
should operate between [Alpha to (Alpha + Beta)] = [180° to (180° +
180°)] = 180° to 360?
Time Curve = IEEE Moderately Inverse
A = 0.0103
B = 0.0228
p = 0.02
TMS = 8.0
• As shown in for details see Figure 7.12: Logic, Directional Overcurrent
(67) on page 7-17, map elements to outputs in the Output Matrix:
67N Pickup mapped to Out 4
67N Trip mapped to Out 5
Figure 7.13: Logic, Directional Earth fault (67N)
67N Test Procedure

1. Access Relay Control Panel Metering > Logic 1 or Front HMI, Metering
>Logic> Logic Protections 1.
2. Monitor the following element for pickup: 67N Alarm.
3. Following are the default test quantities (future tests will refer to these de-
fault test quantities).
Apply a single-phase current to the T-PRO terminals as follows:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 1.0 A -90°
4. Apply single-phase polarizing voltage to:
Ph A: 330 – 333, 66.4 V 0°
5. Slowly ramp the 3-phase currents magnitudes up.
At 1.15 to 1.25 A (expect 1.20 A):
67N Alarm = High
6. Increase currents to 2.0 A.

Observe: 67N Trip = High

7. Ramp phase-A current angle in positive direction from -90°.
At -1.0° to +1.0° (expect 0°):
67N Alarm = Low
8. Return current angles to -90°, +150°, +30°.
9. Ramp current angle in negative direction from -90°.
At -179° to -181° (expect -180°):
67N Alarm = Low
10. Turn currents OFF (Keep voltage On for the timing test).
67N Alarm = Low
67N Timing Test

1. Monitor timer stop on 67N Trip Contact (Output Contact 5 in the settings)
2. Set timer start from 3-phase currents at default angles, 0 A to 3.60 A transi-
tion (3x pickup).
Time Delay = (9)
A 0.0103 0.0103
T M S  B + -----------------------------------
- = 8  0.0228 + ------------------------
- = 8  0.0228 + ---------------- = 3.89 s
Im ultiple  – 1
p
3 
0.02
–1 0.0222
3. End of 67N test.

50/51 Settings
Instantaneous • 50HV Pickup = 1.5 per unit
and Time • 51HV Pickup = 1.2 per unit
Overcurrent 3- Time Curve = IEEE Very Inverse
Phase Test A = 3.922
B = 0.0982
p=2
TMS = 4.0
put Matrix:
50HV mapped to Out 14
51HV Alarm mapped to Out 7
51HV Trip mapped to Out 2
50HV Enabled Tp
Out 14
Select 0
IHVA CT Ratio
Maximum
Magnitude
Phase Current
IHVB Correction
for Out 7
and
50 Element
3IO Elimination
IHVC 51 Element
Out 2
51HV Enabled
Ipickup
(adjusted by
51ADP if enabled)
Figure 7.14: Logic, Phase Overcurrent (50/51)
50/51 3-Phase Test Procedure

Logic > Logic Protections 2
2. Monitor the following element for pickup: 51HV Alarm.
3. Apply balanced 3-phase currents to the T-PRO terminals as follows:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 1.0 A 0°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 1.0 A 120°
Ph C: 304 – 305, 1.0 A +120°
4. Slowly ramp the 3-phase currents up.
At 1.15 to 1.25 A (expect 1.20 A):
51 Alarm = High
5. Continue to raise currents.
At 1.45 to 1.55 A (expect 1.50 A):
50 Trip = High

51 Alarm = Low
50 Trip = Low
51HV Timing Test

1. Monitor timer stop on 51HV Trip Contact (Output Contact 2 in the settings).
2. Set timer start from 3-phase 0.0 A to 3.60 A transition (This equates to 3x
pickup.).
Time Delay =
A 3.922- = 4  0.0982 + 3.922 (10)

- = 4  0.0982 + -------------
TMS = B + ----------------------------------- ------------- = 2.35s
 I multiple  – 1
p 2
3 –1 8
3. End of 50HV 51HV test
51ADP Adaptive Settings

Pickup Test • Nameplate: Cooling: Type 1, Self-Cooled OA or OW
• Ambient Temperature Scaling: 4 mAdc = -40°C, 20 mAdc = +40°C
• 51ADP Multiple of Normal Loss of Life = 1.0
51 HV ADP Enabled 51 HV ADP

Pickup To 51 I Pickup
T Ambient Adjustment
Figure 7.15: Logic Overcurrent Adaptive Pickup (51ADP)
51ADP Test Procedure

To simulate an ambient temperature of +30°C, inject 18.0 milliamps dc into the
Ambient Temperature Input (terminals +230, -231).
In Relay Control Panel Metering > Trend,D49 > Ambient Temp or Front HMI,
access Metering>Analog>Trend>Ambient Temp, confirm a +30°C reading.
Using the graph : Figure M.3: Allowed Loading: 65°C Rise Transformer, Type
1 Cooling on page M-4 (Appendix M), see that at +30°C the overload charac-
teristic is de-rated to 1.0 per unit for a relative loss of life setting of 1.0.
1. Access Relay Control Panel Metering>Logic or Front HMI, Metering>Log-
ic>Logic Protections 3.
2. Monitor the following element for pickup: 51HV Alarm.
Ph A: 300 – 301, 0.8A 0°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 0.8A -120°
Ph C: 304 – 305, 0.8A +120°

4. Slowly ramp the 3-phase currents up.

At 0.95 to 1.05 A (expect 1.0 A):
51 Alarm = High
51 Alarm = Low
6. End of 51ADP test.
Checking 1. Access Relay Control Panel Metering>Logic 1 or Front HMI, Meter-

Ambient ing>Logic>Logic Protections 1.
Temperature 2. Monitor for pickup:
Alarm Ambient Alarm.
3. With 18 mA being injected into Ambient Temperature input:
Ambient Alarm = Low
Note: The Ambient Temperature Alarm will activate if the Ambient Tempera-
ture is outside of the Setting Range.
4. Slowly ramp the mA input up from 18 mA.
At Approximately 21 mA:
Ambient Alarm = High
5. Remove mA input from Ambient Temperature input.
Ambient Alarm = High (since 0mA is out of the setting range)
6. End of Ambient Alarm test.
Checking the Switch mAdc from Ambient Temperature input to Top Oil Temperature input
Top Oil (terminals +232, -233).
Temperature
Top Oil Settings
Alarm
• Top Oil Temperature Scaling: 4.0 mAdc = -40°C and 20.0 mAdc = +200°C
To simulate a Top Oil Temperature of +170°C, inject 18.0 mAdc into the Top
Oil Temperature Input (+232, -233). 
In Relay Control Panel or Front HMI, access Metering>Analog>Trend>Top
Oil Temp DegC, confirm a +170°C reading.
Top Oil Alarm Test

2. Monitor for pickup:
Top Oil Alarm.
3. With 18 mA being injected into Top Oil Temperature input:
Top Oil Alarm = Low
4. Ramp mA input up from 18 mA.
At approximately 21 mA:
TopOil Alarm = High

5. Remove mA input from Top Oil Temperature input.

Top Oil Alarm = High (since 0 mA is out of the setting range)
6. End of Top Oil Alarm test.
49 Thermal Prepare to inject dc milliamps into Top Oil Temperature input (+232 – 233)
Overload Test
Settings
• 49 HV = 1.2 per unit
• Hysteresis = 0.1 per unit
and
• Top Oil Temperature = 160°C
• Temperature Hysteresis = 1.0°C
put Matrix:
49_Trip mapped to Out 12
Current Input Switch

IHV Max
Tp1
ILV Max
ITV Max
Td1
Off Logic Gate
Switch
Output 12
Temp. Input Switch
Hot Spot Temperature Tp2

Top Oil Temperature
Off Td2
Figure 7.16: Logic, Thermal Overload (49)

49_1 Trip
3. Inject 18 mAdc into Top Oil Temperature input (160°C setting is exceeded)
and
Inject 3-phase currents into:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 1.0 A 0°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 1.0 A -120°
Ph C: 304 – 305, 1.0 A +120°
Observe:
49_1 Trip = Low

4. Ramp current up.

At 1.15 to 1.25 A (expect 1.20 A):
49_1 Trip asserts
5. Decrease Top Oil Temperature to 16 mA.
49_1 Trip De-asserts
6. Ramp Top Oil Temperature input up to 17.0 to 17.6 mA
49_1 Trip Asserts
7. Remove:
mA from Top Oil Temperature input
Currents from HV input
8. End of 49 test.
49 TOEWS Test The Transformer Overload Early Warning System warns and trips for condi-
tions of either excessive hot spot temperature or excessive loss of life during
any single overloading occurrence.
Settings
• Transformer MVA: 100
• Transformer Cooling Method: Self cooled
• Transformer Temperature Rise: 65°C
• Normal Loss of Life Hot Spot Temperature: 110°C
• THS Trip Setting: 150°C
• THS to start LOL Calculation:150°C
• LOL Trip Setting: 1 day
• Top Oil : Calculated
put Matrix:
TOEWS Trip mapped to Out 11
IHVA Select IHV Max pu

IHVB Maximum
IHVC Phase Current
15 min alarm
TOEWS 30 min alarm
TOEWS Trip
Ta Trend Hot Spot or LOL
Quantities Out 11
Ttop Calculationt T Hot Spot
Figure 7.17: Logic, Transformer Overload Early Warning System (49TOEWS)

TOEWS Test Procedure

Ph A: 300 – 301, 1.00 A 0°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 1.00 A -120°
Ph C: 304 – 305, 1.00 A +120°
2. Apply 16 mAdc (20°C) to Ambient Temperature input terminals +230, -231.
Re-boot the T-PRO (cycle power) to reset the steady state condition, other-
wise the T-PRO only assumes a new steady state after hours of “settling in”.
(Note: When the T-PRO is installed, this is not a problem and is the correct
way to respond.)
4. Monitor the following elements for pickup.
TOEWS 30min Alarm
TOEWS 15min Alarm
TOEWS Trip = Low
Observe:
HV current = 1.00 per unit (as per current being injected at step 1).
Ambient Temperature = 20°C, Top Oil Temperature = 75°C, Hot Spot
Temperature = 100°C.
5. Increase current to simulate an overload condition (e.g. 180% Load).
Over a period of time (hours) observe, in order:
30 min Alarm = High
15 minutes later: 15 min Alarm = High
15 minutes later: TOEWS Trip = High
Hint: If you set the T-PRO to trigger a recording on each of these events, you
can ensure that you will retain records of when these elements operate.
Checking the warning and trip times can only be properly done by comparing
“heat runs” made on software (an MS Excel spreadsheet) available from
ERLPhase. Very stable temperature mA inputs and current inputs over a period
of hours are necessary to get predictable and satisfactory timing test results.
6. End of TOEWS test.

59 Overvoltage
Functional Test
Figure 7.18: 59 Functional Test Settings
Figure 7.19: Overvoltage Functional Test Settings and Logic, mapped to Output 17
59 Test Procedure
1. In Relay Control Panel access relay access Metering>Logic 2
Monitor the following elements for pickup.
59-1 Trip
59-2 Trip
Monitor contacts.
Output: 17

Figure 7.20: 59 Functional Test Settings
2. Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltages (66.4 V) to the T-PRO terminals.

Ph A: 330, 66.4V  0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4V  -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4V  +120°
Ph N: 333
Observe: 59-1 Trip = Low
59-2 Trip = Low
3. Increase A-phase voltage:
At 70.0 to 74.0 V (expect 72 V):
Observe: 59-1 Trip = High
Out 3 = Closed
Observe: 59-2 Trip remains low
Out 4 = Open
4. With A-phase voltage still at about 72 V, increase both B- and C-phase volt-
ages:
At 70 to 74 V (expect 72 V):
Out 4 = Closed
End of 59 test.

50BF External Input Method/Current Detection Method

Functional Test
Figure 7.21: 50BF Functional Test Settings
Figure 7.22: 50BF Breaker Fail Functional Test Settings and Logic, Mapped to Output
15
Note: Requires a minimum of 1.5 A on any phase to arm the Breaker

Fail.

50BF Test Procedure

1. In Relay Control Panel access Metering > Outputs.
Monitor normally open Out 15 (50BF).
Figure 7.23: Output Contacts

2. Enable all winding connections as follows:
Figure 7.24: Current Input and Winding Connections
3. Enable 59 Overvoltage protection for fault and breaker failure initiation.
Figure 7.25: 59 Functional Settings
4. Assign protection functions to output contacts, to initiate breaker fail, initi-

ate trigger fault recording and to illuminate target LEDs.

Note: BFI-LV should be selected for LV winding input 4 and BFI-TV

winding input 5.
5. Inject main voltage to the T-PRO terminal as follows:

V: 330 – 333 = 70 V (to operate 59-1 trip for fault and breaker failure initi-
ation)
Observe: 59 overvoltage = High
Out 17: Closed
Current Detection Method

6. Apply single-phase current to T-PRO Input 1, Input 2, Input 3, Input 4 and
Input 5 as follows:
PhI1A: 300 – 301 = 1.5 A
PhI2A: 306 – 307 = 1.5 A
PhI3A: 312 – 313 = 1.5 A
PhI4A: 318 – 319 = 1.5 A
PhI5A: 324 – 325 = 1.5 A
Observe:
Input 1 Trip 1 50BF = High


Out 15 = Closed
7. Turn current off.
Observe: 50BF elements = Low
Observe: Output 15 = Open
External Input Method

8. Make External Input 9 High:
Observe:
External Input 9 = High
Out 15: Closed
9. Turn voltage and External Input 9 off.
Observe:
50BF Elements = Low
External Input 9 = Low
Out 15: Open
End of Breaker Fail test.
87 Differential This section covers the testing of the 87 minimum operating point IOmin.
Test Generally this is the only test that is required to prove the minimum sensitiv-
ity of the differential element. The IOmin test proves the Nameplate Rating,
the KV, CT Ratio and IOmin settings are all correct.
If more comprehensive and complex testing is desired, you may skip this 87
Differential Test section and go to section “T-PRO 3-Phase 87 High Mis-
match Slope Testing” on page 7-45 instead.
Settings
• MVA: 100
• Windings: 2
• HV kV: 230 (Y 0°)
• LV kV: 115 (Delta -30°)
• HV CT: 250:1 (Y 0°)
• LV CT: 500:1 (Y 0°)
• PT Location: High Side
• IOmin: 0.3 per unit
• IRs: 5.0 per unit

• Slope 1: 20%
• Slope 2: 40%
put Matrix:
87 Trip mapped to Out 1
I1A CT Ratio
Mismatch
I1B Correction and
3IO Elimination
I1C Input 1 IO=IHV+ILV+ITVI
I2A CT Ratio IOA IOB IOC

Mismatch
I2B Correction and
3IO Elimination 2nd Harmonic
I2C Input 2 IO
Trip A
Restraint
I3A CT Ratio
Mismatch Trip B
I3B Correction and Out 1
3IO Elimination
I3C Input 3
Trip C
CT Ratio 5th Harmonic
I4A IR
Mismatch Restraint
I4B Correction and
3IO Elimination
I4C Input 4 IRA IRB IRC
I5A CT Ratio IR=(I1+I2+I3+I4+I5)

Mismatch 2
I5B Correction and
3IO Elimination
I5C Input 5
Figure 7.27: Logic, Phase Differential (87)
Magnitude Mismatch Correction Factor (MMCF)

Calculation shown on “3. Magnitude Mismatch Corrections” on page 4-7
PhysicalCT_Root 3 _Factor[i]  Voltage_Level[i]  CT_Ratio[i] (11)

Magnitude_Mismatch_Correction_Factor[i] 
PhysicalCT_Root 3[REF]  Voltage[REF]  CT_Ratio[REF]
1.0  115  500

Magnitude_Mismatch_Correction_Factor[i] = -------------------------------------- = 1.0
1.0  230  250
Where
i = Current input being considered (in this case LV side).
PhysicalCT_Root3_Factor = 1.0 for a Y connected CT, 1/3 for Delta connected CT.
Voltage_Level[i] = Voltage level of the input being considered
CT_Ratio[i] = CT ratio of the input being considered.
Voltage[REF] = Primary voltage level of the reference (PT) side (in this case HV
side).
CT_Ratio[REF]= CT ratio of the first current input on the reference (PT) side.

Secondary base current [REF] = (12)

1000  MVA- ----------------- 1  100- --------
- = 1000 1
------------------------------  --------------------------  - = 1.00A
3  kV HV CTR HV 3  230 250
Secondary base current [i] = Secondary Base Current

[REF]MMCF[i] = 1.00A
Therefore:
HV Secondary Base = 1.00 A
LV Secondary Base = 1.00 A
HV Minimum Operate = IOmin x HV Secondary Base = 0.3 x
1.00 A = 0.30 A
LV Minimum Operate= IOmin x LV Secondary Base = 0.3 x
1.00 A = 0.30 A
87 HV 3 Phase Minimum Operate Test Procedure

2. Monitor the following element for pickup: 87 Trip.
3. Prepare to apply balanced 3-phase currents to the T-PRO terminals as fol-
lows:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 0
Ph B: 302 – 303, -120
Ph C: 304 – 305, +120
4. Simultaneously and slowly ramp all 3 currents up:
At 0.29 to 0.31 A (expect 0.30 A):
87 Trip = High
5. Run the same test on the LV side.
Since MMCF is 1.0, LV pickup will be the same as the HV pickup =
0.30 A.
6. End of 3-Phase Minimum Operate test.
Single-Phase Test of 87 HV Minimum Operate

To test the 87 single-phase, an additional Correction must be applied to com-
pensate for the T-PRO zero sequence elimination. To eliminate zero sequence
and normalize the current angles of all inputs, the T-PRO uses the formulas in
the “Current Phase Correction Table” in Appendix L.

T-PRO is a 3-phase relay, but will operate on a phase-by-phase basis. When

the differential setting is exceeded on any one phase or more, the 87 element
will operate.
For simplicity, calculate how much current each phase of the T-PRO will see
by using 1.0 A as a base in the formulas of CPC. The result gives a ratio that is
valid for any magnitude of current applied.
The HV Side in the our test settings has HV net shift of 0°:
HVNet Shift = HV Winding Shift (0°) + HV CT Shift (0°) = 0° + 0° = 0°
The 0° connection is compensated by 360° (i.e., CPC12 of “Loss of Life of Sol-
id Insulation” in Appendix M). Not that there is a formula for each phase A, B
and C.
If you inject 1.0 A on Phase A only on the HV side, the following equations of
CPC12 show how much current the T-PRO will see on all 3 phases.
2Ia – Ib – Ic 2  1  –  0  –  0  2 (13)
IA = ------------------------------- = -------------------------------------- = --- A
3 3 3
2Ib – Ic – Ia 2  0  –  0  –  1  – 1 (14)
IB = ------------------------------- = -------------------------------------- = ------ A
3 3 3
2Ic – Ia – Ib 2  0  –  1  –  0  – 1 (15)
IC = ------------------------------- = -------------------------------------- = ------ A
3 3 3
The current per unit values can be confirmed in Relay Control Panel Meter-
ing>Analog or Front HMI Metering>Analog>Analog Inputs 2.
Note that the strongest phase in this case is IA, so as you ramp up the current
above the IOmin setting, expect that IA will operate first. We can disregard the
weaker phases in the context of the IOmin test.
From the 3-phase test section note that IOmin = 0.30 A.
Since the relay sees only 2/3 of the injected current on the strongest phase, the
single phase correction factor in this case is 1/(2/3) = 1.5.
That is, for the T-PRO to see 0.30 A on the single operating phase A, inject
0.30 A x 1.5 = 0.45 A.
HV 87 IOmin Single-Phase Test Procedure

2. Monitor the following element for pickup:
87 Trip.
3. Connect current source to T-PRO terminals 300 – 301.
Slowly ramp the current up.

At 0.44 to 0.46 A (expect 0.45 A):

87 Trip = High
87 Trip = Low
5. End of HV 87 IOmin Single-Phase Test
Testing 87 LV Minimum Operate Single-Phase

To test single-phase, perform the same process as on the HV side, again use
“Current Phase Correction Table” in Appendix L.
The HV Side in the our test settings has HV net Shift of 0:
HVNet Shift = HV Winding Shift (0) + HV CT Shift (0) = 0° + 0° = 0°
The LV Side in our test settings has LV net Shift of -30:
LV Net Shift = LV Winding Shift (-30) + LV CT Angle (0) = - + 0° =
-30°
The -30 angle must be corrected to be 0, therefore find the +30 compensa-
tion in CPC. There is an equation for each of A, B and C phases. If you inject
1.0 A on Phase A only on the LV side, the following equations show how much
current the relay will see on all 3 phases.
If you inject 1.0 A in LV side Phase A only:
Ia – Ib  1  –  0  1 (16)
IA = ---------------- = --------------------- = ------- = 0.577A
3 3 3
Ib – Ic  0  –  0  0 (17)
IB = ---------------- = --------------------- = ------- = 0A
3 3 3
Ic – Ia  0  –  1  –1 (18)
IC = ---------------- = --------------------- = ------- = – 0.577A
3 3 3
Note that the strongest phases are IA and IC, so they will operate first (IB in
this case sees no current and can be disregarded in the context of this test).
Since the relay sees only 0.577 times the injected current on the strongest phase
(s), the single phase correction factor in this case is 1/(0.577) = 1.73. That is,
for the T-PRO to see 0.30 A on the operating phase, you need to inject 0.30 A
x 1.73 = 0.52 A

LV 87 IOmin Single-Phase Test Procedure

2. Monitor the following element for pickup:
87 Trip.
3. Connect current source to T-PRO terminals 306 – 307.
Slowly ramp the current up.
At 0.51 to 0.53 A (expect 0.52 A):
87 Trip = High
87 Trip = Low
5. End of LV 87 IOmin Single-Phase Test
87 2nd Settings
Harmonic • I2 Cross Blocking = Enabled
Restraint Test • I2 (2nd Harmonic) = 0.20 per unit (2nd Harmonic Restraint if 20% of
fundamental current).
2nd Harmonic Restraint Test Procedure

87 Trip
87 Restraint
3. Apply parallel currents to Terminals 300 – 302 (Jumper 301 – 303) as fol-
lows:
Source 1 (60 Hz): 1.0 A 0° (Terminals 300 – 302)
Source 2 (120 Hz): 0.40 A 0° (paralleled with Source 1 into Termi-
nals 300 – 302)
Observe:
87 TRIP = Low
87 Restraint = High
4. Slowly ramp down Source 2.
At Source 2 = 0.19 to 0.21 A (expect 0.20 A):
87 Trip = High
87 Restraint = Low
5. End of 2nd harmonic restraint test.

87 High Current Settings

Setting Test • High Current Setting = 5.0 per unit
IO (pu)
IOH High Setting
S2
IOmin S1
IR (pu)
IRmin IRs
Figure 7.28: IOH High Current Setting
87 High Current Test Procedure

This test proves that when the High Current Setting is exceeded, the 87 will op-
erate and 2nd Harmonic has no restraint affect.
87 Restraint
87 Unrestrained Zone
3. Apply parallel currents to Terminals 300 – 302 as follows (Jumper 301 –
303):
Source 1 (Fundamental, 60 Hz):
4.0 A 0° (Terminals 300 – 302)
Source 2 (2nd Harmonic, 120 Hz):
4.0 A 0° (also Terminals 300 – 302)
4. Ramp Source 1 (fundamental) up:
At 4.90 to 5.10 A (expect 5.0 A):
87 Restraint = High
87 Unrestrained Zone = High
5. Remove test currents.
6. End of 87 High Current Test

THD Alarm Test Settings

• THD Alarm Pickup: 10%
• As shown in Figure 7.29: on page 7-40, map the THD Alarm to Out 8 in
the Output Matrix
Input 1 Enabled
50 I1A THD
50 I1B THD
50 I1C THD
Input 2 Enabled
50 I2A THD
50 I2A THD
50 I2A THD
Input 3 Enabled 40 s
50 I3A THD
Out 8
50 I3A THD 10 s
50 I3A THD
Input 4 Enabled
50 I4A THD
50 I4A THD
50 I4A THD
Input 5 Enabled
50 I5A THD
50 I5A THD
50 I5A THD
Figure 7.29: Logic, Total Harmonic Distortion Alarm (THD)
For testing THD, use the fundamental with one harmonic from 2nd to 25th . In
this case the T-PRO uses the following formula for calculating Total Harmonic
Distortion:
(19)
25
2
I n
2
Iharmonic Iharmonic
THDpercent = 100  ----------------------------------- =  100  ----------------------------------- =  100  -----------------------------------
2
Ifundamental Ifundamental Ifundamental
THD Test Procedure

2. Monitor the following element for pickup: THD Alarm.
3. Apply parallel currents to terminals 300 – 301 as follows:
Source 1 (Fundamental 60 Hz): 2.0 A 0° (Terminals 300 – 301)
Source 2 (2nd Harmonic 120 Hz): 0.0 A 0° (also Terminals 300 –
301)
4. Slowly ramp Source 2 up to 0.21 A
Monitor the THD (Metering) above 10%

After 30 seconds
THD Alarm = High
Contact 8 = Closed
End of THD test.
87N Neutral Testing the 87N uses the same process as testing the 87 with the following ex-
Differential Test ception: I5A is used for the neutral associated with HV wye connected winding
(I5B for LV, I5C for tertiary).
Settings
• MVA = 100
• HV kV: 230 kV
• Slope 1: 20%
• Slope 2: 40%
• HV CT Ratio: 250:1
• Neutral CT Ratio: 100:1
As shown in Figure 7.30: on page 7-41, map the 87N HV Trip to Out 6 in the
Output Matrix.
I1A CT Ratio
Mismatch
I1B Correction
I1C Input 1
IO=IA+IB+IC+IN
I2A CT Ratio IOHV IOLV IOTV

I2B Mismatch
Correction
I2C Input 2 IO
87N HV Trip
Out 6
I3A CT Ratio
Mismatch 87N LV Trip
I3B Correction
I3C Input 3
87N TVTrip
I4A CT Ratio IR
I4B Mismatch
Correction
I4C Input 4 IRHV IRLV IRTV
I5A CT Ratio
IR=(IA+IB+IC+IN)
I5B Mismatch 2
Correction
I5C Input 5
Figure 7.30: Logic, Neutral Differential (87N)

87N MCF Calculation
PhaseCTRatio 250 (20)

MagnitudeCorrectionFactor (MCF )    2.50
NeutralCTRatio 100
Phase Winding 87N IOmin Pickup Calculation

Expect:
kVA 1   100e3 1   (21)

IO min    IO min PerUnit       0.3   0.30 A
3  kV CTR   3  230 250  
Neutral Winding 87N IOmin Pickup Calculation
Expect for I5A HV winding side
  100e3  (22)
kVA 1 1 
IO min    IO min PerUnit       0.3   0.753A
3  kV CTR   3  230 100  
Note: Repeat previous calculation for LV and TV winding side and re-
member I5B (326-327) should be selected for LV winding and I5C
(328-329) for TV winding inputs.
87N IOmin Neutral Test Procedure

1. Connect current source to T-PRO Terminals 324 – 325.
(I5A HV)
2. Slowly ramp current up.
At 0.74 to 0.77 A (expect 0.753 A):
87N-HV Trip = High
4. End of 87N test.

7.5 T-PRO Differential Slope Test Example
Figure 7.31: T-PRO Differential Slope Test Example
Testing T-PRO Transformer Relay 87 Relay Differential Element

Settings for the 87 differential element:
• IOmin = 0.3 per unit
• IRS = 5.0 per unit
• S1 = 20%
• S2 = 40%
Calculations to be performed prior to T-PRO testing:
Establish base load current for transformer reference side (i.e., side where the
VT is located). For this example the VT is located on the 230 kV HV side
winding.
KVA -
I BasePri = -------------------
(22)
3  kV
1 (23)
I?VBaseSec  I?VBase Pr i  CTDeltaFactor 
CTRatio
Equation Notes:
• “?” = “H”, “L” or “T” depending on the winding on which the base is being
calculated.
• “Delta factor” = 1.0 for wye connected CTs, √3 for delta connected CTs. 
We start with determining the base quantities, which will give us the 3-phase
secondary currents at transformer nominal load. Figure 7.32: on page 7-44

shows a summary of the process used to calculate the nominal base currents
from Equations (22) on page 7-43 and (23) on page 7-43.
In our example, the secondary base current on each side of the transformer =
1.004 A.
Transformer Rating = 100 MVA
Wye 0 Delta -30

High Side 230 kV Reference 0¡ Low Side 115 kV For through fault
Primary Base Primary Base -30 + 180 = 150¡
[251 Amps} [502 Amps}
CT Ratio = 250:1 CT Ratio = 500:1
Calculate Calculate
Secondary Base Secondary Base
251 A / 250 502 / 500
= 1.004 A = 1.004 A
CT Delta Factor = 1.0 (wye) CT Delta Factor = 1.0 (wye)
Base x CT Delta Factor Base x CT Delta Factor

1.004 x 1.0 = 1.004 A 1.004 x 1.0 = 1.004 A
Base Value Base Value
Figure 7.32: Summary of Calculations for Nominal Load Condition
Base Current Calculation Details for Each Winding Using Equations (22)
and (23) on page 7-43.
High Voltage Side:

(24)
KVA 100000
I BasePri = ---------------------- = ---------------------- = 251A
3  230 3  230
The primary base currents are converted to secondary amps for

testing the relay.
1 (25)
I HVBaseSec = I HVBasePri  CT DeltaFactor  ----------------------
CTRatio
1
= 251  1.0  --------- = 1.004A
250

Low Voltage Side:

100000 -
KVA - = --------------------- (26)
I BasePri = ------------------- = 502A
3  kV 3  115
1 (27)
I LVBasePri = I LVBasePri  CT DeltaFactor  ----------------------
CTRatio
1
= 502  1.0  --------- = 1.004A
500
T-PRO 3-Phase 87 High Mismatch Slope Testing

Three-phase testing is to be performed by applying a balanced 3-phase current
into one input configured for HV and a second input configured for LV. The
87 High Mismatch slope characteristic is typically proven on a simulated
through fault where the current is into the transformer on the source side and
out of the transformer on the faulted side.
For the example of Figure 7.31: on page 7-43, the HV shift is 0°. Let the HV
be the reference where current into HV = 0°.
We inject 3 Phase HV current at angles:
Ph A 0º
Ph B -120º
Ph C 120º
The LV shift of Figure 7.31: on page 7-43 is -30° from the HV side. For
through fault simulation, we shift the LV current by an additional 180°.
Ph A (0°-30°+180°) = Ph A +150°
Ph B (-120°-30°+180°) = Ph B +30°
Ph C (120°-30°+180°) = Ph C +270°
The calculations to perform the 87 High Mismatch points in Figure 7.33: on
page 7-46 shall be demonstrated.

Dev 87: Differential Protection

4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5 IR>IRs
IO (pu)
2.0
1.5
IRs
1.0
IOmin IRmin
0.5
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
IR (pu)
Figure 7.33: High Mismatch Test Points
First Test Point: IOmin
= 0.3 per unit, IR = 0.15 per unit

The following equations 2 and 3 are used to determine the operating currents
for the 87 Mismatch slope characteristic:
IO = I HV + I LV
(28)
or for an ideal through IO = I HV – I LV (29)

fault
I HV + I LV (30)
IR = ----------------------------
-
2
For the HV IOmin test no LVcurrent is injected, so ILV = 0:

The IOmin setting = 0.3 per unit
Using Equation (28) on page 7-46:
0.3 pu = IHV - ILV
0.3 pu = IHV - 0
IHV = 0.3 pu.
IHV Sec Amps = 0.3 pu x IHV Base Sec = 0.3 x 1.004 A = 0.301 A
For LV IOmin test, no HV current is injected so IHV = 0:

IOmin setting = 0.3 per unit
Using Equation (28) on page 7-46:
0.3 pu = ILV - IHV

0.3 pu = ILV - 0
ILV = 0.3 pu
ILV Sec Amps = 0.3 pu x ILV Base Sec = 0.3 x 1.004 A = 0.301 A
Figure 7.34: on page 7-47 shows the summary of the IOmin calculation for each
side of the transformer.
High Side 230 kV Low Side 115 kV
Inject HV Current Only Inject LV Current Only

OR
[0.3 per unit x 1.004] [0.3 per unit x 1.004]
Minimum Pickup Minimum Pickup

{0.301 Amps {0.301 Amps
Figure 7.34: Summary of Minimum Operating Current of the Differential Element
IOmin Test Procedure:

Monitor for pickup:
87 High Mismatch
87 Trip
2. HV IOmin Test
Connect balanced 3-phase current to terminals: A 300 – 301, B 302 – 303,
C 304 – 305
Slowly ramp the current up from zero until 87 High Mismatch changes
from Low to High.
At 0.29 to 0.31 A (Expect 0.301 A):
87 High Mismatch = High
87 Trip = High
3. LV IOmin Test
Connect balanced 3-phase currents to terminals: A 306 – 307, B 308 – 309,
C 310 – 311
Slowly ramp the currents up from zero until 87 High Mismatch changes
from Low to High.
At 0.29 to 0.31 A (Expect 0.301 A)
87 Trip = High

4. End of 87 IOmin Test
Second Test Point IRmin
IO = 0.3 per unit, IR = 1.50 per unit

IRmin (from Figure 7.33: on page 7-46) is determined from the IOmin and Slope
1 settings in (31) on page 7-48.
IOmin setting = 0.3 pu, Slope 1 setting = 20%.
100  IO min (31)

IR min = -----------------------------
S1
IRmin = (100 * 0.3) / 20 = 1.5 pu.

We will then use the mathematical elimination and substitution methods on
Equations 2 and 3 to determine the IHV and ILV test currents.
Solve for IHV and ILV at IO = 0.3 per unit and IRmin = 1.5 per unit.
Use above Formulas (29) on page 7-46 and (30) on page 7-46 to solve for IO
and IR.
IO = IHV – I LV
0.3 = I HV – I LV (Part 1)
 I HV + I LV
IR = ----------------------------
2
 I HV + I LV
I1.5 = ----------------------------
2
1.5  2 = I HV + I LV
3.0 = I HV + I LV (Part 2)
Solve for ILV by Subtracting the equation Part2 from Part1:

0.3 pu = IHV - ILV (Part 1)
- 3.0 pu = IHV + ILV (Part 2)
Total -2.7pu = 0 - 2ILV
-2.7 pu = ILV = 1.35 pu

-2

ILVAmps = ILVBaseSec x ILVpu = 1.004 A x 1.35 pu = 1.36
Substitute the ILV per unit value back into Part1 to solve for IHV.
IO = IHV - ILV
1.0 pu = IHV - 1.35 pu
IHV = 1.65 pu
IHVAmps = IHVBaseSec x IHVpu = 1.004 A x 1.65 pu = 1.66 A
Summary of IRmin Calculations
HV Current Value HV Current Value

1.65 per unit 1.35 per unit
Convert to Amps Convert to Amps

1.65 x 1.004 1.35 x 1.004
HV Test Current LV Test Current

1.657 Amps 1.356 Amps
Figure 7.35: Summary of IRmin Calculations
IRmin Test Procedure:

Monitor for pickup:
87 High Mismatch
2. Connect 1st set of balanced 3-phase currents to LV terminals:
Ph A: Terminals 306 – 307: 1.36A150
Ph B: Terminals 308 – 309: 1.36A+30
Ph C: Terminals 310 – 311: 1.36A-90°
Connect 2nd set of balanced 3-phase current to HV terminals @ 90% of IHV
pickup:
Ph A: Terminals 300 – 301: 90% x 1.66A = 1.49A0°
Ph B: Terminals 302 – 303: 90% x 1.66A = 1.49A+30°
Ph C: Terminals 304 – 305: 90% x 1.66A = 1.49A-90°
Observe 87 High Mismatch = Low.

3. Slowly and simultaneously ramp up the 3 phase magnitudes of the HV cur-

rents
At 1.60 to 1.75 A (expect 1.66 A)
4. End of IRmin Test
Third Test Point, IRs
IO = 1.0 pu, IR = 5.0 pu

The third point shown in Figure 7.33: on page 7-46 is IRs. IO at IRs is deter-
mined from the IRs, Slope1 and Slope2 settings in (32) on page 7-50.
S2×IR S1-S2 (32)

IO= + ×IRs
100 100
IRs setting = 5.0pu, Slope1 setting = 20%, Slope2 setting =
40%.
40×50 20-40
IO= + ×5.0= 2+(-0.2x5.0)=1.0pu
100 100
We will then use the mathematical elimination and substitution methods on

Equations (28) and (30) on page 7-46 to determine the IHV and ILV test cur-
rents.
Solve for IHV and ILV at IO = 1.0 and IR = IRs = 5.0 per unit.
Use above equations (28) and (30) on page 7-46 to solve for IO and IR.
IO = I HV – I LV (33)
1.0 = I HV – I LV (Part 1)
 I HV + I LV (34)
IR = ----------------------------
2
 I HV + I LV 
5.0 = ---------------------------
-
2
5.0  2 = I HV + I LV
10.0 = I HV + I LV (Part 2)

Solve for ILV by eliminating IHV by subtracting the equation Part

2 from Part 1:
1.0 pu = IHV - ILV (Part 1)
- 10.0 pu = IHV + ILV (Part 2)
Total -9.0 pu = 0 - 2ILV
-9.0 pu = ILV = 4.50 pu

-2
ILVAmps = ILVBaseSec x ILVpu = 1.004 A x 4.50 pu = 4.52 A
Substitute the ILV per unit value back into Part 1 to solve for IHV.
IO = IHV - ILV
1.0 pu = IHV - 4.50 pu
IHV = 5.50 pu
Summary of IRs Calculations:
HV Current Value LV Current Value

[7.9 per unit] (6.1 per unit)

[7.9 x 1.004] [6.1 x 1.004]

[7.93 A] [6.124 A]
Figure 7.36: Summary of IRs Calculations:

IRs Test Procedure:

87 High Mismatch
Ph A: Terminals 306 – 307: 4.52A150°
Ph B: Terminals 308 – 309: 4.52A+30°
Ph C: Terminals 310 – 311: 4.52A-90°
Connect 2nd set of balanced 3-phase currents to HV terminals @ 90% of
IHV pickup:
4. Slowly and simultaneously ramp up the 3 phase magnitudes of the HV cur-
rents.
At 5.40 to 5.65 A (expect 5.52 A)
5. End of IRs Test
Fourth Test Point, IR > IRs
IO = 1.8 pu, IR = 7.0 pu

The fourth test point shown in Figure 7.31: on page 7-43 is an arbitrary point
in Slope 2. We chose IR = 7.0 per unit.
We find IO at IR = 7.0 from the IRs, Slope 1 and Slope 2 settings in Equation
(32) on page 7-50.
 IR- + -----------------
S1 – S2- (35)
IO = S2
-----------------  IRs
100 100
IRs setting = 5.0 pu, Slope 1 setting = 20%, Slope 2 setting = 40%.
 7.0 + 20 – 40-
IO = 40
------------------- -----------------  5.0 =  2.8 +  – 0.2  5   = 1.8pu
100 100
We then use the mathematical elimination and substitution methods on Equa-

tions (28) and (30) on page 7-46 to determine the IHV and ILV test currents.
Solve for IHV and ILV at IO = 1.8 and IR = 7.0 per unit.

Use above Formulas (28) and (30) on page 7-46 to solve for IO and IR.
IO = IHV – I LV
1.8 = I HV – I LV (Part 1)
I HV + I LV
IR = ----------------------
-
2
 I HV + I LV 
7.0 = ---------------------------
-
2
7.0  2 = I HV + I LV
14.0 = I HV + I LV (Part 2)
Solve for ILV by eliminating IHV by subtracting the equation Part 2

from Part 1: Substitute the ILV per unit value back into Part 1 to
solve for IHV.
1.8pu = I HV – I LV (Part 1)
- 14.0pu = I HV + I LV (Part 2)
Total – 12.2pu = 0 – 2I LV
– 12.2pu- = I = 6.10pu
------------------- LV
–2
ILVAmps = ILVBaseSec x ILVpu = 1.004 A x 4.50 pu = 6.12 A
Substitute the ILV per unit value back into Part1 to solve for IHV.
IO = IHV – I LV
1.8pu = I HV – 6.10pu
I HV = 7.90pu

Summary of IR>IRs Calculations:
HV Current Value LV Current Value

[7.9 per unit] (6.1 per unit)

[7.9 x 1.004] [6.1 x 1.004]

[7.93 A] [6.124 A]
Figure 7.37: Summary of IR>IRs Calculations
IR > IRs Test Procedure:

Monitor for pickup:
- 87 High Mismatch
Ph A: Terminals 306 – 307: 6.12A150°
Ph B: Terminals 308 – 309: 6.12A+30°
Ph C: Terminals 310 – 311: 6.12A-90°
Connect 2nd set of balanced 3-phase currents to HV terminals @ 90% of
IHV pickup:
3. Slowly and simultaneously ramp up the 3 Phase magnitudes of the HV cur-
rents:
At 7.80 to 8.15A (expect 7.93A)
4. End of IR>IRs Test
4. End of IR>IRs Test

Summary of Three-Phase Test

1. Calculate base current for each side.
2. Determine IO (operating) and IR (restraint) values to be tested.
3. Calculate IHV and ILV per unit currents for a given IO and IR.
4. Adjust angles by Current Phase Correction (“Current Phase Correction Ta-
ble” in Appendix L) and convert IHV and ILV per units to amperes.
5. Apply IHV and ILV with 3-phase sources. Set reference side at zero degrees
(0.0°) for current into the transformer, and the opposite side at the opposing
angle for current out of the transformer. In this example, -30+180° = 150° to
account for the -30° delta shift.

7.6 T- PRO Single-Phase Slope Test

Performing Single Phase testing of the T-PRO slope requires many calcula-
tions. In order to complete the process satisfactorily, one needs to get a very
good understanding of the CPC tables of “Current Phase Correction Table”
in Appendix L and how they are used by the relay to normalize the angles and
eliminate zero sequence current.
To explain the Single Phase Slope test, we start with a summary of the steps,
then provide details of each step, and follow up with an example using our ex-
ample transformer of for details see Figure 7.31: T-PRO Differential Slope
Test Example on page 7-43.
Steps to perform Single-Phase Testing

1. Perform the current calculations for 3-phase testing from the previous sec-
tion.
2. Determine the net current angle on each current input associated with each
transformer winding. In order to organize the shift of each input, it’s helpful
to create a Net Angle Table (NAT) such as Table 7.1: on page 7-56.
Table 7.1: Example of a Net Angle Table
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6
T-PRO Associ- Winding CT Angle Total Angle Use Current Phase Correction
Input ated Angle (Column 3 + Equations of Appendix L
Winding Column 4) (Correction = -1 x Column 5)
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
3. Determine which phase (s) to inject on each side.

4. Apply the additional magnitude correction factor of 1.0 or 3 to the calcu-
lated 3-phase test currents.
Detailed Steps for Single Phase Testing

To help in understanding the relationship between what the T-PRO actually
sees when you inject a single phase current, it helps to view the Relay Control
Panel Metering>Analog as shown in Figure 7.38: on page 7-57. The metering
screen also provides a place to quickly verify that your calculations are correct.
In Figure 7.38: on page 7-57, currents IA1, IB1…etc. are uncompensated cur-
rents (they follow your injected currents). The currents HV IA, HV IB…etc.
are the compensated currents after phase corrections and zero sequence elimi-

nation (i.e., after corrections of “Current Phase Correction Table” in Appendix

L).
On Figure 7.39: HV, LV, TV Compensated Operating Currents on page 7-58
Analog has the per unit operating and restraint currents.
Figure 7.38: Analog Input Metering

Figure 7.39: HV, LV, TV Compensated Operating Currents
Step 1:
Perform the 3-phase calculations for each slope point to be tested.
You must perform the 3-phase slope calculations prior to attempting the fol-
lowing Single-phase slope test procedure. This is because single phase test
quantities for any point on the slope are adapted from your 3-phase test quan-
tities.
See the 3-Phase High Mismatch Slope test section for the procedure to obtain
the 3-phase test currents for any point on the slope characteristic.
Step 2:
Determine net phase shift of each T-PRO current input. To simplify the pro-
cess, create a Net Angle Table such as Table 7.1: on page 7-56.
Sum the suffixes of your Winding and CT configurations and enter them
into your Net Angle Table (NAT).
Examples of angles to enter into your table:
Delta +30  enter “+30”
Delta +60  enter “+60”
Wye -30  Enter “-30”
Delta 0  Enter “0”
Wye 180  Enter “180”
Etc…

This is a Net Angle Table (NAT) that we created for our example transformer of Figure 7.22.
Transformer is connected Wye 0, Delta -30, and with Wye 0 CTs on both sides.
T-PRO Associated Winding CT Angle Total Use CPC Equations of

Input Winding Angle Angle Appendix L
(Column 3 + (Correction = -1 x Column 5)
Column 4)
Input 1 HV Wye 0 Wye 0 0 0 (CPC12)
Input 2 LV Delta -30 Wye 0 -30 +30 (CPC1)
Input 3 NA - - - -
Input 4 NA - - - -
Input 5 NA - - - -
Step 3:
The ultimate goal of Step 3 is to always obtain 2 operating phases from a single
current source on each transformer side. We will demonstrate how to select
which phase or phases to inject so that two operating phases are always ob-
tained.
We use ideal external faults for proving the 87 High Mismatch slope charac-
teristic. In order to perform a proper differential slope test, any Operating phas-
es are seen in one side of the transformer must be mirrored on the other side.
For example if you have operating current in phases A & B of the HV side, you
must also have operating current in phases A & B on the LV side in order to
simulate an external (through) fault.
Also, for simulating an ideal external fault, the phases on one side must be 180°
out of phase from the other side. For example, where an external fault has A-
B on HV side, there must be – (A-B) or B-A on the LV side.
Use the Single-Phase Selection Tables (Table 7.2: on page 7-61, Table 7.3: on
page 7-61 and Table 7.4: on page 7-62) to determine which phase (s) to inject
for your single phase 87 High Mismatch test:
The Single Phase Selection Tables (SPST; i.e., Table 7.2: on page 7-61, Table
7.3: on page 7-61 and Table 7.4: on page 7-62) may be used to quickly deter-
mine which phase or phases will have Operating current if you inject only
Phase A (Table 7.2: on page 7-61, Table 7.3: on page 7-61 and Table 7.4: on
page 7-62). The Operating phase (s) for an input shall depend on which wind-
ing it is associated, and that inputs net angle. You can determine the net angle
and document your calculations in the NAT created in Step 2.
Each SPST (Tables Table 7.2: on page 7-61, Table 7.3: on page 7-61 and Table
7.4: on page 7-62) have 3 columns labeled Left, Middle and Right.

• The Left column of each SPST shows the net angle for a particular trans-
former winding associated with a particular T-PRO input. (Note that SPST
Left column also corresponds to Column 5 of our NAT.)
• The Middle column of SPST corresponds to the angle nulling equations of
the Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L. (Note that SPST Mid-
dle column also corresponds to Column 6 of our NAT.)
• The Right column of SPST shows which phase (s) of the T-PRO will have
Operating current if you inject Only the specified input phase A, or B, or
C. By “Operating” current, we are referring to the phase or phases inside
the T-PRO 87 element that have the greatest current magnitude once all in-
ternal corrections have been applied; thus the phases that would exceed
IOmin and trip first.
• To give an example of how the phases in Right column are obtained, here
is an example using the Wye 0 connection. From SPST Table 7.2, inject
Only Ia at 0. Since the connection is 0, use CPC12 formulas in Appendix
L:
2Ia – Ib – Ic 2  1amp  –  0amp  –  0amp  2amp (36)

IA = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- = -------------- = 0.67amp
3 3 3
= 0.67amp0°
– Ia + 1Ib – Ic –  1amp  + 2  0amp  –  0amp  – 1amp (37)
IB = ----------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ----------------- = – 0.33amp
3 3 3
= -0.33amp180°
– Ia – Ib + 2Ic –  1amp  –  0amp  + 2  0amp  – 1amp (38)
IC = ----------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ----------------- = 0.33amp
3 3 3
= 0.33180°
IA at 0.67 A is the strongest phase, twice as strong as IB and IC which are 0.33
A. Therefore we would expect that the T-PRO Phase A differential will operate
first. Note that IA is also in-phase with the injected current.
We have just proven the Table 7.2: on page 7-61, 0 connection. Where the left
column is 0, the right column will have the strongest current in Phase A at 0°.
Each SPST row uses the same process; the Operating phases are determined
from the appropriate CPC equations of “Current Phase Correction Table”
in Appendix L.
At the beginning of Step 3 we stated that we must see 2 operating phases on
each side. Since we found in this example that injecting IA will only result in
one Operating phase (A0°), we will have to inject a second phase to obtain
two operating phases. We will show how to do that in our example transformer
later in this section.

Table 7.2: Single-Phase Selection Table (Inject Phase A only at 0)
Left Middle Right
Use Formulas from Injecting only T-PRO

Select the Winding Net Current Phase Phase A at 0 shows
Phase Angle (degrees) Correction Table these “Operating”
(Appendix L) Phases)
i –30º +30º (CPC1) A0 & C180
ii –60º +60º (CPC2) C180
iii –90º +90º (CPC3) B0 & C180
iv –120º +120º (CPC4) B0
v –150º +150º (CPC5) B0 & A180
vi –180º +180º (CPC6) A180
vii –210º +210º (CPC7) C0 & A180
viii –240º +240º (CPC8) C0
ix –270º +270º (CPC9) C0 & B180
x –300º +300º (CPC10) B180
xi –330º +330º (CPC11) A0 & B180
xii 0º 360º (CPC12) A0
Table 7.3: Single-Phase Selection Table (Inject Phase B only at 0°)
Left Middle Right
Injecting only T-PRO

Select the Winding Net Use Formulas from Phase B at 0 shows
Phase Angle (degrees) CPC (Appendix L) these “Operating”
Phase (s)
i –30º +30º (CPC1) B0 & A180
ii –60º +60º (CPC2) A180
iii –90º +90º (CPC3) C0 & A180
iv –120º +120º (CPC4) C0
v –150º +150º (CPC5) C0 & B180
vi –180º +180º (CPC6) B180
vii –210º +210º (CPC7) A0 & B180
viii –240º +240º (CPC8) A0
ix –270º +270º (CPC9) A0 & C180

Table 7.3: Single-Phase Selection Table (Inject Phase B only at 0°)
Left Middle Right
Injecting only T-PRO

Select the Winding Net Use Formulas from Phase B at 0 shows
Phase Angle (degrees) CPC (Appendix L) these “Operating”
Phase (s)
x –300º +300º (CPC10) C180
xi –330º +330º (CPC11) B0 & C180
xii 0º +360º (CPC12) B0
Table 7.4: Single-Phase Selection Table (Inject Phase C only at 0°)
Left Middlle Right
Use Formulas from Injecting only T-PRO

Select the Winding Net Current Phase Phase C at 0 shows
Phase Angle (degrees) Correction Table these “Operating”
(Appendix L) Phase(s)
i –30º +30º (CPC1) C0 & B180
ii –60º +60º (CPC2) B180
iii –90º +90º (CPC3) A0 & B180
iv –120º +120º (CPC4) A0
v –150º +150º (CPC5) A0 & C180
vi –180º +180º (CPC6) C180
vii –210º +210º (CPC7) B0 & C180
viii –240º +240º (CPC8) B0
ix –270º +270º (CPC9) B0 & A180
x –300º +300º (CPC10) A180
xi –330º +330º (CPC11) C0 & A180
xii 0º +360º (CPC12) C0

Step 4
Determine the additional Magnitude Correction Factor:
Using the 2 operating phase method, you only need to remember two single
phase Magnitude Correction Factors, 1.0 and 3. The values in the Table 7.5:
on page 7-63 can be proven by manually calculating the phase shift resultants
using the “Current Phase Correction Table” in Appendix L.
Multiply the 3-phase current values determined in your 3 phase test calcula-
tions by the correction factor in the right column of the Table 7.5: on page 7-
63.
Table 7.5 relates the Net Transformer Shift angle to the applicable Magnitude
Correction Factor:
Table 7.5: Single-Phase Correction Factor Table
Transformer Net Phase Shift Additional Magnitude

(degrees) Correction Factor (Multiplier)
–30º 3
–60º 1.0
–90º 3
–120º 1.0
–150º 3
–180º
1.0
–210º 3
–240º 1.0
–270º 3
–300º 1.0
–330º 3
0º 1.0
Example of the Single-Phase Testing Calculation Steps
Step 1:
See the example transformer in Figure 7.33: High Mismatch Test Points on
page 7-46, these are the T-PRO settings:
• MVA: 100
• Windings: 2
• HV kV: 230 (Y 0°)
• LV kV: 115 (Delta -30°)

• HV CT: 250:1 (Y 0°)

• LV CT: 500:1 (Y 0°)
• PT Location: High Side
• Slope 1: 20%
• Slope 2: 40%
For this example, we will choose the IRmin 3 phase test currents.
In the “First Test Point: IOmin” on page 7-46 (Equation (28) and (30) ) we cal-
culated IR = 1.50 per unit.
In the “Second Test Point IRmin” on page 7-48 we calculated the LV 3 phase
test currents = 1.35 A and the HV 3 phase test currents = 1.66 A.
Step 2
Determine the net phase shift for each input.
In our example, only Input 1 and Input 2 are used. We create our Net Angle
Table accordingly:
Table 7.6: Net Angle Table
Use CPC
Total
Equations
T-PRO Associated Winding Angle
CT Angle Appendix L
Input Winding Angle (Column 3 +
(Correction = -
Column 4)
1 x Column 5)
Input 1 HV Wye 0 Wye 0 0 0 (CPC12)
Input 2 LV Delta -30 Wye 0 -30 +30 (CPC1)
Input 3 NA - - - -
Input 4 NA - - - -
Input 5 NA - - - -
Step 3
Always obtain the same 2 operating phases on both sides of the transformer:
We demonstrate the use of our Net Angle Table (NAT) and Single Phase Se-
lection Tables (SPST) to determine which phase or phases to inject to have
complementary phases on either side of the transformer.

• Our example transformer is HV Y0° (Input1) and LV Delta-30° (Input2).

T-PRO always nulls the angle on all inputs, even if they are already 0°,
since it also needs to eliminate zero sequence.
• Lookup Input1 in our NAT and find the net angle in Column 5; we find that
it is 0°.
• Lookup Input 2 in our NAT and find the net angle in Column 5; we find
that it is -30°.
• First we will obtain two operating phases on Input1, and then we’ll obtain
the exact same phases on Input2. We can arbitrarily choose to obtain any
two Operating phases; we will choose A-B (i.e., A0° & B180°).
Determine Input 1 Injection:

Input 1 net angle is 0° (same as 360°) so we will start systematically by looking
first in left column of SPST Table 7.2 (Operating current if you inject only
phase A). We find the 0° connection in row “xii”. The right column states that
if we inject Phase A at 0° we get Operating Phase A0°. This is good because
phase A is one of the Operating phases we have chosen to obtain (to get A-B).
The proof of our SPST 7.2 result is found (as stated in the header of in the mid-
dle column), by using CPC12 formulas in Appendix L. For simplicity, we use
1.0A in the CPC12 formulas to find the Operating phase (s) if we inject only
Phase A. We get the following results (Confirm in Metering>Analog):

IA = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- = -------------- = 0.67amp
3 3 3
= 0.67amp0°
IB = ----------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ----------------- = 0.33amp
3 3 3
= -0.33amp180°
IC = ----------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ----------------- = 0.33amp
3 3 3
= 0.33180°
The strongest phase is the Operating phase. and IA is the strongest phase at
0.67amp0°; we can ignore IB and IC as they are not the strongest phases.
Since our stated goal is to have Operating phases A-B, we will need to inject a
2nd phase. We have just established how to get Operating phase A so now we
will need to add Operating phase –B (i.e., Phase B at 180°).
We have already used SPST 7.2 for this input, so now we need to look at SPST
7.3 and SPST 7.4 and see which one will give Operating Phase B in row “xii”
for our 0 connection.

We find in the right column of SPST 7.3 row “xii” that if we inject Phase B,
we get Operating Phase B, which is what we were seeking. For proof of the
right column, we again insert 1.0 A into Phase B of CPC12 formulas and see
that in this case IB is 0.67 A, while IA and IC are only 0.33 A. (Confirm in Me-
tering>Analog.
2Ia – Ib – Ic 2  0amp  –  1amp  –  0amp  – 1amp

IA = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- = ----------------- = 0.33amp
3 3 3
= 0.33amp0°
– Ia + 2Ib – Ic –  0amp  + 2  1amp  –  0amp  2amp
IB = ----------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = -------------- = – 0.67  0.33 amp
3 3 3
= -0.67amp180°
– Ia – Ib + 2Ic –  0amp  –  1amp  + 2  0amp  – 1amp
IC = ----------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ----------------- = 0.33amp
3 3 3
= 0.33180°
We now have proof that for a 0° connection, if we inject Phase B only at 1 amp
0°, we will get operating current in phase B phase only. Since we know that
we need B to be at 180° (for A-B), we simply reverse the test set current to in-
ject into the non-polarity of B Phase input.
We have established how to get individual Operating phases A and –B on our
HV Input 1. However, we need to get two Operating phases (A-B) at once from
a single source, so we will put our findings together into CPC12 again and en-
sure that we get only HV A – B Operating currents.
Simultaneously insert 1.0 A into Ia and -1.0 A into Ib:

IA = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- = -------------- = 0.67amp
3 3 3
= 0.67amp0°
IB = ----------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ----------------- = 0.33amp
3 3 3
= -0.33amp180°
IC = ----------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ----------------- = 0.33amp
3 3 3
= 0.33180°
HV Operating phases are A-B. We can now determine our test connections for
Input 2.

Determine Input 2 Injection:

Find required inject to obtain A-B on the LV (-30°) side.
In NAT Column 5 we find LV (Input2) net shift is -30°. Lookup -30° in the left
column of SPST which we find in row “i”. We are seeking which one or two
SPS Tables we will need to utilize to get only Operating phases A and B in row
“i”.
We find that Phases A and B appear in row “i” of SPST 7.3. If we inject only
Phase B, we will get operating phases A and B. However, it is actually B-A
(i.e., B0° & A180°). This is acceptable. As long as we have the correct
phases we can easily compensate for any angle difference by simply changing
our test set connections at the relay to achieve the required 0° or 18°0. If inject
+B gives us B-A, we should be able to get A-B by injecting –B. i.e., –(B-A) =
A-B
To confirm the phases shown in SPST 7.3 are correct, we use the “Current
Phase Correction Table” in Appendix L. The LV connection is -30° and the
correction angle is: (-1 ´ -30°) = +30°, therefore CPC1 is applicable for our LV
connection. We insert 1.0 A where “Ib” appears in the CPC1 formulas. This
will confirm that we get only Operating phases IB and IA when we inject only
Phase B.
Confirm in Metering>Analog.
Ia – Ib 0amp – 1amp – 1 (39)

IA = ---------------- = ---------------------------------- = ------- = – 0.577amp
3 3 3
= -0.577amp180°
Ib – Ic 1amp – 0amp 1 (40)
IB = ---------------- = ---------------------------------- = ------- 0.577amp
3 3 3
= 0.577amp0°
Ic – Ia 0amp – 0amp 0 (41)
IC = ---------------- = ---------------------------------- = ------- = 0amp
3 3 3
= 0amp
Summarize All of Our Injection Determinations:

We have concluded that in order to do our Single Phase differential test, we
should inject into A-B on the HV side to get A-B into Input 1, and inject -B on
the LV side to get A-B into Input 2).
Note that both of these connections give A-B current into the transformer.
Since slope testing simulates an external fault (one side into and one side out
of), one side needs to be 180° out of phase from the other side. The connections
and test current source angles shown in Figure 7.40: on page 7-68 will result in
currents on LV being 180° out of phase from HV as required for the slope test.

In on page 7-68, pay special attention to the polarity marks of the T-PRO input
and Current Sources.
As always, confirm the test currents in Metering>Analog as shown in Figure
7.38: on page 7-57 and Figure 7.39: on page 7-58.
HV Injection, Into A, Out of B, Source at 0° LV Injection, Into –B, Source at 180°

AC AC
Current Current
Source Source
A B C A B C
T-PRO 4000 Terminals HV T-PRO 4000 Terminals LV
Note: same as Table 7.7: on page 7-69, con- Note: same as Table 7.7: on page 7-69, con-
nection 12). nection 11).
Figure 7.40: Test Connections for Single Phase Slope Testing of Our Example
Transformer.
Step 4
Find the Single Phase Magnitude Correction Factor.
When we put 1.0 A into A-B of the CPC12 formulas of “Current Phase Cor-
rection Table” in Appendix L for HV in Step 3, we found that we got 1.0 A of
Operating current on A-B. Since we get the full 1.0 A on the HV for 1.0 A in-
jected, no additional magnitude correction factor is required. i.e., the correction
factor is 1.0, as is also stated in “Single-Phase Correction Factor Table” on
page 7-63 for a 0° connection.
On the -30° side, we found that when we put 1.0 A into CPC1 formulas for LV
in Step 3, we got only 0.577 A out (i.e., 1/√3). Therefore we need to correct the
current by √3 on the LV side to get back to the 1.0 A that we injected. That is,
the single phase magnitude correction factor for CPC1 is √3 so we multiply by
√3 as stated in “Single-Phase Correction Factor Table” on page 7-63 for a -30°
connection.
In Step 1 we noted our calculated 3 Phase operating currents for IRmin:
The HV 3 Phase Test Current for IRmin = 1.69 A.
The LV 3 Phase Test Current for IRmin = 1.39 A.
For Single Phase testing we will apply the magnitude correction factors from
“Single-Phase Correction Factor Table” on page 7-63.
Our HV Single Phase Current = 3 Phase IHV * Single Phase MCF = 1.69 * 1.0
= 1.69 A.
Our LV Single Phase Current = 3 Phase ILV * Single Phase MCF = 1.39 A *
Ö3 = 2.41 A
From our calculations, the T-PRO differential should operate if we inject:
Input 1: 1.69A0° into A-B, and Input 2: 2.41A180° into –B.

We should get target 87 AB.
Simplified Single Phase Test Connection Suggestions

In order to simplify the single phase testing, we provide the following test con-
nections which will always produce A-B operating currents in the T-PRO. You
may use these diagrams instead of always performing single phase testing
Steps 3 and 4.
You will still need to perform Step 1 to obtain your 3 phase test currents, and
Step 2 to create your Net Angle Table to obtain the net angle for each Input.
For each input in your NAT, go to column 5 and find the matching connection
angle in Table 7.6: Net Angle Table. The diagrams show the test connections
for every angle possibility. Table 7.6: Net Angle Table also includes the Single
Phase Magnitude Correction Factor (either 1.0 or √3) to compensate and adapt
your calculated 3 phase currents for single phase testing.
In our test example, Input1 is a 0° connection and Input2 is a -30° connection.
On Input1 we would use Table 7.6: Net Angle Table connection number 12)
and on Input2 we would use Table 7.6 connection number 11).
Note that all of the connections in Table 7.7: on page 7-69 are for A-B current
into the transformer. Since 87 Slope testing simulates an external fault, you
will need to add 180° to one of the current sources to simulate a through fault.
It is very important to observe the location of the polarity marks shown in Ta-
ble 7.6 for the current sources and T-PRO inputs.
To obtain other test phases (B-C and C-A), move all of the connections in a
clockwise rotation. For example, to test phases B-C in Table 7.7: Single Phase
Test Connection Suggestions for A-B: connection 11), move your test connec-
tion from B180° to C180°.
Table 7.7: Single Phase Test Connection Suggestions for A-B:
0° Connection +60° Connection

AC AC
Current
Current
Source
Source
A B C A B C
T-PRO 4000 Terminals HV, LV or TV T-PRO 4000 Terminals HV, LV or TV
Single-Phase Correction Factor = 1.0 Single-Phase Correction Factor = 1.0

+120° Connection 180° Connection

AC AC
Current Current
Source Source
A B C A B C
-120° Connection -60° Connection

AC AC
Current Current
Source Source
A B C A B C
+30° Connection +90° Connection

AC AC
Current Current
Source Source
A B C A B C
Single-Phase Correction Factor = 3 Single-Phase Correction Factor = 3
+150° Connection -150° Connection

AC AC
Current Current
Source Source
A B C A B C

-90° Connection -30° Connection

AC AC
Current Current
Source Source
A B C A B C

8 Installation
8.1 Introduction
This section deals with the installation of the T-PRO relay when first delivered.
The section covers the physical mounting, AC and DC wiring and the Commu-
nication wiring.
8.2 Physical Mounting

Standard 3U The relay is 3 rack units or 5.25 inches high and approximately 12.9 inches
deep. The standard relay is designed for a 19-inch rack. A complete mechani-
cal drawing is shown, for details see “Mechanical Drawings” in Appendix G.
To install the relay the following is needed:
• 19 inch rack
• 4 - #10 screws
4U The relay is 4 rack units or 7.0 inches high and approximately 12.25 inches
deep. The relay is designed for a 19-inch rack. A complete mechanical drawing
is shown, for details see “Mechanical Drawings” in Appendix G.
To install the relay the following is needed:
• 19 inch rack
• 4 - #10 screws
8.3 AC and DC Wiring

For details see “AC Schematic Drawing” in Appendix I and “DC Schematic
Drawing” in Appendix J.
8.4 Communication Wiring

EIA-232 The relay’s serial ports (Ports 122 and 123) are configured as EIA RS-232 Data
Communications Equipment (DCE) devices with female DB9 connectors.
This allows them to be connected directly to a PC serial port with a standard
straight-through male-to-female serial cable. Shielded cable is recommended,
for pin-out see “Communication Port Details” on page 2-20.
An adapter is available for connecting an external modem to Port 123 for de-
tails see “Modem Link” on page 2-10.

8 Installation
RJ-45 There is one front 100BASE-T Ethernet Port 119 with RJ-45 receptacle. Use
CAT5 or CAT5e straight. The rear Ethernet Ports 119 and 120 may also be
configured as 100BASE-T Ethernet Ports.
Optical ST Port 119 and port 120 in the rear panel may be configured with ST style optical
connectors if desired. These are 1300 nm 100BASE-FX optical Ethernet ports.
The transmit and receive connections are indicated on the rear panel. Use stan-
dard multi-mode cables with ST connectors for this interface.
USB There is a standard USB-B connector on the front panel. This is a USB 2.0 Full
Speed interface and can be connected to a PC with a standard USB peripheral
cable (A style to B style).
RJ-11 The relay may have an optional internal modem. Connection to this is via the
relay’s Port 118 RJ-11 receptacle. A standard telephone extension cable is to
be used.
IRIG-B Wiring The relay accepts both modulated and unmodulated IRIG-B standard time sig-
nals with or without the IEEE 1344 extensions. The IRIG-B connector on the
back of the relay is BNC type.

Appendix A IED Specifications
T-PRO Model 4000 Specifications

General: Quantity/Specifications Note
Nominal Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Operate Time 12 – 25 ms typical Including relay output operation
Power Supply Range: 43 – 275 Vdc, 90 – 265 Vac Power Consumption: 25 – 30 VA (ac)
25 – 30 W (dc)
Memory Settings and records are stored in non- Records are stored in a circular buffer
volatile memory
Protection Functions:
IEEE Device 87, 87N, 49, 50/51, 2 or 3 winding transformer with 5 sets of Breaker-and-a-half and ring bus configu-
50N/51N, 24INV/DEF, 50BF, 59N, 59, 3-phase current inputs, 1 set of 3-phase ration, fault protection, monitoring, fault,
60, 81, THD, 27, 67, Temperature voltage inputs. temperature and trend recording
Control and TOEWS1 2 optional temperature inputs (4 – 20 mA
dc)
ProLogic 24 statements per setting group 5 inputs per ProLogicTM statement
Group Logic 8 (16 group logic statements per setting 5 inputs per group logic statement
group)
Recording:
Transient (fault) 96 s/c oscillography of all analog and User-configurable 0.2 to 10 seconds
external input digital channels record length and 0.1 to 2.0 seconds pre
trigger record length
Trend 3 – 60 minute sample logging of MW, When “trend auto save” is enabled, a
MVAR, I, compressed trend record is created
ambient temperature and loss of life. once the trend period is completed
Trend recording from 30 up to 600 days
Sequence of Events Recorder 250 events circular log with 1ms resolu- When event auto save is enabled, a
tion compressed event record is created
every 250 events.
Record Capacity Up to 150 sec transient records, trend

and event records
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A-1


Input & Output:
Analog Voltage Inputs Nominal Voltage - across input channel Vn = 69 Vrms (120 Vrms L-L)
1 set of 3-phase voltage inputs Full Scale/Continuous 2x Vn = 138 Vrms (240 Vrms L-L)
Maximum Over-scale Thermal Rating 4x Vn = 276 Vrms (480 Vrms L-L) for 3
seconds
3x Vn = 207 Vrms (360 Vrms L-L) for
10 seconds
Burden <0.03VA @ Vn
Analog Current Inputs Nominal Current In = 1 Arms or 5 Arms

5 sets of 3-phase current inputs (15 cur- Full Scale/Continuous 3x In = 3 Arms or 15 Arms
rent channels) Maximum full-scale rating 40x In for 1 second symmetrical
Thermal rating 400 Arms for 1 second
Burden <0.25 VA @ 5 Arms
<0.10 VA @ 1 Arms
Optional Temperature Inputs, Ambient 2, 4 – 20 mA current loops External temperature sensor can be self-
and Top Oil powered or from T-PRO relay. Unregu-
lated 30 Vdc supply – output 40 mA @
24 Vdc
Amplitude measurement accuracy +/-0.5% for 54 to 66 Hz

+/-0.5% for 44 to 56 Hz
Analog Sampling Rate 96 samples/cycle for recording Records up to 25th harmonic

8 samples/cycle for protection
External Inputs (digital) 9 isolated inputs (3U chassis) Optional 48, 110/125 or 220/250 Vdc
20 isolated inputs (4U chassis) nominal, externally wetted
Isolation 2 KV optical isolation
External Input Turn-on Voltage 48 Vdc range = 27 to 40 Vdc Specified voltages are over
125 Vdc = 75 to 100 Vdc full ambient temperature range.
250 Vdc = 150 to 200 Vdc, 60% to 80%
of nominal
Output Relays (contacts) 14 programmable outputs (3U chassis) Externally wetted

and 1 relay inoperative contact (N.C.) Make: 30 A as per IEEE C37.90
21 programmable outputs (4U chassis) Carry: 8 A
and 1 relay inoperative contact (N.C.) Break: 0.9 A at 125 Vdc resistive
0.35 A at 250 Vdc resistive
Virtual Inputs 30 Virtual Inputs
Interface & Communication:
Front Display 240 x 128 pixels graphics LCD
Front Panel Indicators 16 LEDs: 11 programmable and 5 fixed Target (11programmable), Relay Func-
tional, IRIG-B Functional, Service
Required, Test Mode , Alarm
Front User Interface USB port and 100BASE-T Ethernet port Full Speed USB 2.0, RJ-45
Rear User Interface LAN Port 1: 100BASE copper or optical Copper: RJ-45, 100BASE-T
1300 nm Optical: 100BASE-FX, Multimode ST
LAN Port 2: 100BASE optical 1300 nm style connector
Two Serial RS-232 ports to 115 kbd Com port can support external modem
Internal Modem 33.6 Kbps, V.32 bis Optional internal modem
Appendix A-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21


SCADA Interface IEC 61850, DNP3 (RS-232 or Ethernet) Rear port
or Modbus (RS-232)
Time Sync IRIG-B, BNC connector Modulated or unmodulated, auto-detect

B003,B004,B123 and B124 Time Codes
Self Checking/Relay Inoperative 1 contact Closed when relay inoperative
Environmental:
Ambient Temperature Range -40C to 85C for 16 hours IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2
-40C to 70C continuous LCD contrast impaired for temperatures
below -20C and above 70 C
Humidity Up to 95% without condensation IEC 60068-2-30
Insulation Test (Hi-Pot) Power supply, analog inputs, external IEC 60255-5, ANSI/IEEE C37.90
inputs, output contacts – 2 kVrms, 50/60
Hz, 1 minute
Electrical Fast Transient Tested to level 4 – 4.0 kV 2.5/5 kHz on ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1, IEC/EN 60255-22-
power and I/O lines 4, IEC 61000-4-4 Level 4
Oscillatory Transient Test level = 2.5 kV ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1, IEC/EN 60255-22-

1, IEC61000-4-12 Level 3
RFI Susceptibility 10 V/m modulated, 35 V/unmodulated ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2, IEC 60255-22-3,

IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3
Conducted RF Immunity 150 kHz to 80 MHz IEC 60255-22-6 / IEC 61000-4-6 Level 3
Shock and Bump 5 g and 15 g IEC 60255-21-2, IEC/EN 60068-2-27:

Class 1
Sinusoidal Vibration 1g, 10 Hz to 150 Hz, 1.0 octave/min, 40 IEC/EN 60255-21-1, IEC/EN 60068-26,
sweeps Class 1
Voltage Interruptions 200 ms interrupt IEC 60255-11 / IEC 61000-4-11
Physical:
Weight 3U chassis - 10.4 Kg/23 lbs

4U chassis - 12.1 kg /26.6 lbs
Dimensions 3U chassis: 13.2 cm height x 48.26 cm 5.2 height x 19 width rack mount x 12.9
width rack mount x 32.8 cm depth depth
4U chassis 17.7 cm x 48.3 cm x 32.8 cm 6.93" x 19 x 12.9
Time Synchronization and Accuracy
External Time Source Synchronized using IRIG-B input (modu- Upon the loss of an external time source,
lated or unmodulated) auto detect the relay maintains time with a maximum
160 seconds drift per year at a constant
temperature of 25C. The relay can
detect loss of re-establishment of exter-
nal time source and automatically switch
between internal and external time.
Synchronization Accuracy Sampling clocks synchronized with the

time source (internal or external).
Overall T-PRO Accuracies


Current ±2.5% of inputs from 0.1 to 1.0 x nominal current (In)
±1.0% of inputs from 1.0 to 40.0 x nominal current (In)
Voltage ±1.0% of inputs from 0.01 to 2.0 x nominal voltage (Vn)
Differential Element ±5.0% of set value IOmin from 0.10 to 1.0 per unit (pu)
Directional Phase Angle ±2.5% or > 2.0 of set value from 0.01 to 360.0
Frequency Elements ±0.001 Hz (fixed level)
±0.05 Hz (df/dt)
Inverse Overcurrent Timers ±2.5% or 1 cycle of selected curve

Detailed Environmental Tests
Description
Test Test Level
Type Test Test Points
FCC Part 15 RF emissions Enclosure ports Class A: 30 - 1000 MHz
Conducted emissions ac/dc power ports Class A: 0.15 - 30 MHz
IEC/EN 60255-25 RF emissions Enclosure ports Class A: 30 - 1000 MHz
Conducted emissions ac/dc power ports Class A: 0.15 - 30 MHz
IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Power line harmonics ac power port Class D: max.1.08, 2.3, 0.43
1.14, 0.3, 0.77, 0.23 A.... for 2nd to

nth harmonic
dc power port N/A
IEC/EN 61000-3-3 Power line fluctuations ac power port THD/ 3%; Pst <1., Plt < 0.65
dc power port N/A
IEC/EN 61000-4-2 ESD Enclosure contact +/- 6 kV
IEC/EN 60255-22-2 Enclosure air +/- 8 kV
IEEE C37.90.3 ESD Enclosure contact +/- 8 kV
Enclosure air +/- 15 kV
IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 10 V/m: 80 - 1000 MHz
IEC/EN 60255-22-3
IEEE C37.90.2 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 35 V/m: 25 - 1000 MHz
IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Burst (fast transient) Signal ports +/- 4 kV @2.5 kHz
IEC/EN 60255-22-4 ac power port +/- 4 kV


Detailed Environmental Tests
IEEE C37.90.1 dc power port +/- 4 kV
Earth ground ports +/- 4 kV
IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Surge Communication ports +/- 1 kV L-PE
IEC/EN 60255-22-5 Signal ports +/- 4 kV L-PE, +/-2 kV L-L
ac power port +/- 4 kV L-PE, +/-2 kV L-L
dc power port +/- 4 kV L-PE, +/-2 kV L-L
IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Induced (conducted) RFI Signal ports 10 Vrms: 0.150 - 80 MHz
IEC/EN 60255-22-6 ac power port 10 Vrms: 0.150 - 80 MHz
dc power port 10 Vrms: 0.150 - 80 MHz
Earth ground ports 10 Vrms: 0.150 - 80 MHz
IEC/EN 60255-22-7 Power frequency Binary input ports: Class A Differential = 150 Vrms
Common = 300 Vrms
IEC/EN 61000-4-8 Magnetic leld Enclosure ports 40 A/m continuous, 1000 A/m for 1 s
IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Voltage dips & interrupts ac power port 30% for 1 period, 60% for 50 periods
100% for 5 periods, 100% for 50 peri-

ods
dc power port 30% for 0.1 s, 60% for 0.1 s,
100% for 0.05 s
IEC 60255-11 Voltage dips & interrupts dc power port 100% reduction for up to 200 ms
IEC/EN 61000-4-12 Damped oscillatory Communication ports 1.0 kV Common, 0 kV Diff
IEC/EN 60255-22-1 Signal ports 2.5 kV Common, 1 kV Diff
ac power port 2.5 kV Common, 1 kV Diff
dc power port 2.5 kV Common, 1 kV Diff
IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory Signal ports 2.5 kV Common, 0 kV Diff
ac power port 2.5 kV Common, 0 kV Diff
dc power port 2.5 kV Common, 0 kV Diff
IEC/EN 61000-4-16 Mains frequency voltage Signal ports 30 V continuous, 300 V for 1s
ac power port 30 V continuous, 300 V for 1s
IEC/EN 61000-4-17 Ripple on dc power supply dc power port 10%
Note:The T-PRO 4000 is available with 5 or 1 amp current input. All current specifications change accordingly.
1TOEWS and Transformer asset monitoring require the optional temperature inputs.

A.1 Frequency Element Operating Time Curves

Figure A.2: Time delay Error at .2 Seconds, Figure A.3: Time Delay Error at 1
Second and Figure A.4: Time Delay Error at 10 Seconds show operating times
for the T-PRO frequency rate of change elements at different time delay set-
tings and rate of change settings.
The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact
operate time. Operating times are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Time Delay Error @ 0.2s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Delay error (ms)
105 0.1 Hz/s

1 Hz/s
90 10 Hz/s
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Hz/s Pickup Multiple
Figure A.2: Time delay Error at .2 Seconds
Time Delay Error @ 1s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Time Delay Error (ms)
105 0.1 Hz/s

1 Hz/s
90 10 Hz/s
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Multiple of Hz/s Pickup
Figure A.3: Time Delay Error at 1 Second

Time Delay Error @ 10s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Time Delay Error (ms)

105
0.1 Hz/s
1 Hz/s
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Multiple of Hz/s Pickup
Figure A.4: Time Delay Error at 10 Seconds

Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges
When a setting has been completed in Offliner Settings software, it can be
printed along with the ranges available for these settings. This is a view only
option; to change the settings you must go back into the particular setting that
you wish to change. The summary is a quick way to view all the settings in a
compact form.
The top part of the settings summary contains all the information from the Re-
lay Identification screen.
The setting summary provides a list of all the current and voltage analog input
quantity names used for protection and recording. External Inputs and Output
contact names are also identified on this summary.
T-PRO Settings Summary - Setting Group 1 [Setting Group 1]
Name Symbol/Value Unit Range
Relay Identification
Settings Version 402
Ignore Serial Number No
Serial Number TPRO-4000-000000-01
Unit ID UnitID
Nominal CT Secondary Current 5 A 1A or 5A
Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz 50Hz or 60Hz
Standard I/O 9 External Inputs and 14

Output Contacts
Optional I/O Not Installed
Comments Comments
Setting Name Settings Name
Date Created-Modified 2013-06-20 11:00:00
Station Name Station Name
Station Number 1
Location Location
Bank Name Bank Name
Analog Input Names
VA Voltage A
VB Voltage B
VC Voltage C
IA1 IA1
IB1 IB1
IC1 IC1
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B-1

IA2 IA2
IB2 IB2
IC2 IC2
IA3 IA3
IB3 IB3
IC3 IC3
IA4 IA4
IB4 IB4
IC4 IC4
IA5 IA5
IB5 IB5
IC5 IC5
Temperature D.C. 1 DC1
Temperature D.C. 2 DC2
External Input Names
1 EI Spare 1
2 EI Spare 2
3 EI Spare 3
4 EI Spare 4
5 EI Spare 5
6 EI Spare 6
7 EI Spare 7
8 EI Spare 8
9 EI Spare 9
Output Contact Names
Output 1 Out Spare 1
Virtual Input Names
Appendix B-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

1 Virtual Input 1
2 Virtual Input 2
3 Virtual Input 3
4 Virtual Input 4
5 Virtual Input 5
6 Virtual Input 6
7 Virtual Input 7
8 Virtual Input 8
9 Virtual Input 9
10 Virtual Input 10
11 Virtual Input 11
12 Virtual Input 12
13 Virtual Input 13
14 Virtual Input 14
15 Virtual Input 15
16 Virtual Input 16
17 Virtual Input 17
18 Virtual Input 18
19 Virtual Input 19
20 Virtual Input 20
21 Virtual Input 21
22 Virtual Input 22
23 Virtual Input 23
24 Virtual Input 24
25 Virtual Input 25
26 Virtual Input 26
27 Virtual Input 27
28 Virtual Input 28
29 Virtual Input 29
30 Virtual Input 30
Setting Group Names
Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1
Setting Group 1 [Setting Group 1]

Setting Group Comments: Default Settings.
Nameplate Data
Transformer 3 Phase Capacity 100.0 MVA 1.0 to 2000.0
Transformer Winding 3 2 or 3
Tap Changer Range 0 % -100 to 100
Normal Loss of Life Hot Spot Temp. 110.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Transformer Temperature Rise 65 °C
Transformer Cooling Method Self cooled
Temp. Rise Hot Spot (TRiseHS) 25.00 °C -
Temp. Rise Top Oil (TRiseTop) 55.00 °C -
Temp. Rise Time Const. Hot Spot (TauHS) 0.08 hours -
Temp. Rise Time Const. Top Oil (TauTop) 3.00 hours -
Ratio of Load Loss to Iron Loss (R) 3.20 - -
Hot Spot Temp. Exponent (m) 0.80 - -
Top Oil Temp. Exponent (n) 0.80 - -
Winding
Voltage Input Connection
PT Turns Ratio 2000.0 - 1.0 to 10000.0
Location HV HV or LV
Transformer NamePlate
HV: (as PT Source)
Voltage 230.0 kV 115.0 to 1000.0
Connection Y Delta or Y
Phase 0°
LV:
Voltage 115.0 kV 13.8 to 230.0
Phase 0° DY, YD, YY connec-

tion: 0°, 30°, 60°,
90°, 120°, 150°,
180°, -150°, -120°, -
90°, -60°, -30° DD
connection: 0°, 60°,
120°, 180°, -120°, -
60°
TV:
Voltage 13.8 kV 1.0 to 115.0
Phase 0° DY, YD, YY connec-

tion: 0°, 30°, 60°,
90°, 120°, 150°,
180°, -150°, -120°, -
90°, -60°, -30° DD
connection: 0°, 60°,
120°, 180°, -120°, -
60°
CT Connections
Current Input 1

Winding HV HV, LV, TV, NC
Phase 0° Y connection: 0°,

60°, 120°, 180°, -
120°, -60° Delta
connection: 30°,
90°, 150°, -150°, -
90°, -30°
Turns Ratio 100.00 :1 1.00 to 50000.00
External Input Selection <Not Used> Not Used, EI 1 to EI

9
Current Input 2
Winding LV HV, LV, TV, NC

60°, 120°, 180°, -
120°, -60° Delta
connection: 30°,
90°, 150°, -150°, -
90°, -30°
Turns Ratio 200.00 :1 1.00 to 50000.00

9
Current Input 3
Winding TV HV, LV, TV, NC

60°, 120°, 180°, -
120°, -60° Delta
connection: 30°,
90°, 150°, -150°, -
90°, -30°
Turns Ratio 200.00 :1 1.00 to 50000.00

9
Current Input 4
Winding NC HV, LV, TV, NC

60°, 120°, 180°, -
120°, -60° Delta
connection: 30°,
90°, 150°, -150°, -
90°, -30°
Turns Ratio 450.00 :1 1.00 to 50000.00

9
Current Input 5
Winding NC HV, LV, TV, 51N/

87N, 87N Auto, NC

60°, 120°, 180°, -
120°, -60° Delta
connection: 30°,
90°, 150°, -150°, -
90°, -30°

Turns Ratio 4000.00 :1 1.00 to 50000.00

9
Ambient Temperature Scaling
Max Valid Temperature 50.0 °C -40.0 to 50.0
Min Valid Temperature -50.0 °C -50.0 to 40.0
Max Correlating Current Value 20.00 mA 5.00 to 20.00
Min Correlating Current Value 4.00 mA 4.00 to 19.00
Top Oil Temperature Scaling
Top Oil Calculated
Max Valid Temperature 200.0 °C -30.0 to 200.0
Min Valid Temperature -40.0 °C -50.0 to 190.0
Max Correlating Current Value 20.00 mA 5.00 to 20.00
Min Correlating Current Value 4.00 mA 4.00 to 19.00
Record Length
Fault Record Length 0.5 s 0.2 to 10.0
Prefault Time 0.20 s 0.10 to 2.00 or to

(Fault Record
Length - 0.10)
whichever lesser
Thermal Logging Disabled
Trend Sample Rate 3 minutes/sample 3 to 60
Event Auto Save Disabled
Protection Summary
87 Disabled
87N-HV Disabled
87N-LV Disabled
87N-TV Disabled
49-1 OFF
49-2 OFF
49-3 OFF
49-4 OFF
49-5 OFF
49-6 OFF
49-7 OFF
49-8 OFF
49-9 OFF
49-10 OFF
49-11 OFF
49-12 OFF
TOEWS Disabled
24INV Disabled

24DEF-1 Disabled
24DEF-2 Disabled
59N Disabled
27-1 Disabled
27-2 Disabled
60 Disabled
81-1 Disabled
81-2 Disabled
81-3 Disabled
81-4 Disabled
50BF-1 Disabled
50BF-2 Disabled
50BF-3 Disabled
50BF-4 Disabled
50BF-5 Disabled
50-HV Disabled
51-HV Disabled
50-LV Disabled
51-LV Disabled
50-TV Disabled
51-TV Disabled
51ADP Disabled
50N-HV Disabled
51N-HV Disabled
50N-LV Disabled
51N-LV Disabled
50N-TV Disabled
51N-TV Disabled
59-1 Disabled
59-2 Disabled
67 Disabled
THD Disabled
Through Fault Monitor Disabled
87 - Differential
87 Disabled
IOmin 0.30 pu 0.10 to 1.00
Input 1 0.75 A -
Input 2 0.75 A -
Input 3 0.75 A -
Input 4 N/A

Input 5 N/A
IRs 5.00 pu 1.00 to 50.00
S1 30.00 % 6.00 to 100.00
S2 100.00 % 30.00 to 200.00
High Current Setting 10.00 pu 0.90 to 100.00
I2 Cross-Blocking Enabled
I2_2nd / I_fund Ratio 0.20 - 0.05 to 1.00
I5 Disabled
I_5th / I_fund Ratio 0.30 - 0.05 to 1.00
87N - Neutral Differential
87N-HV Disabled
IOmin 0.30 pu 0.10 to 1.00
IOmin 0.75 A -
IRs 5.00 pu 1.00 to 50.00
S1 30.00 % 6.00 to 100.00
S2 100.00 % 30.00 to 200.00
Neutral CT Turns Ratio 100.00 :1 1.00 to 50000.00
87N-LV Disabled
IOmin 0.30 pu 0.10 to 1.00
IOmin 0.75 A -
IRs 5.00 pu 1.00 to 50.00
S1 30.00 % 6.00 to 100.00
S2 100.00 % 30.00 to 200.00
87N-TV Disabled
IOmin 0.30 pu 0.10 to 1.00
IOmin 6.28 A -
IRs 5.00 pu 1.00 to 50.00
S1 30.00 % 6.00 to 100.00
S2 100.00 % 30.00 to 200.00
49-1 - Thermal Overload
Current Input Switch OFF OFF, HV, LV, TV
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00
Hysteresis 0.02 pu 0.00 to 1.00
Pickup Delay (Tp1) 0.00 s 0.00 to 1800.00
Dropout Delay (Td1) 0.00 s 0.00 to 1800.00
Temperature Input Switch OFF OFF, Hot Spot, Top

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Hysteresis 1.0 °C 0.0 to 10.0

Pickup Delay (Tp2) 0.01 hours 0.00 to 24.00
Dropout Delay (Td2) 0.00 hours 0.00 to 24.00
Logic Gate Switch OR AND, OR
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0

Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00


Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00


Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
Pickup 1.10 pu 0.10 to 20.00

Oil
Pickup 120.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
TOEWS (Transformer Overload Early Warning

System)
TOEWS Disabled
THS (Temperature Hot Spot) Trip Setting 150.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
THS To Start LOL (Loss of Life) Calculation 140.0 °C 70.0 to 200.0
LOL Trip Setting 2.0 days 0.5 to 100.0
24INV - Inverse Time
24INV Disabled
K 0.10 - 0.10 to 100.00
Pickup 1.20 pu 1.00 to 2.00
Reset Time 50.00 s 0.05 to 9999.99
24DEF Definite Time Delay
24DEF-1 Disabled
Pickup 1.10 pu 1.00 to 2.00
Pickup Delay 2.00 s 0.05 to 9999.99
24DEF-2 Disabled
Pickup 1.20 pu 1.00 to 2.00
59N - Zero Sequence Overvoltage
59N Disabled
3V0 Pickup 10.00 V 5.00 to 150.00
Curve Type IEC standard inverse

TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400 - -
B 0.0000 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - 0.10 to 100.00
27 - Undervoltage
27-1 Disabled
Gate Switch AND OR, AND
Pickup 25.0 V 1.0 to 120.0
27-2 Disabled
Gate Switch AND OR, AND
Pickup 25.0 V 1.0 to 120.0
60 - Loss of Potential Alarm
60 Disabled
81 - Over/Under Frequency
81-1 Disabled Disabled, Fixed

Level, Rate of
Change
Pickup 57.600 Hz [50.000, 59.995] or

[60.005, 70.000]

Level, Rate of
Change
Pickup 57.000 Hz [50.000, 59.995] or

[60.005, 70.000]

Level, Rate of
Change
Pickup 61.800 Hz [50.000, 59.995] or

[60.005, 70.000]

Level, Rate of
Change
Pickup 62.400 Hz [50.000, 59.995] or

[60.005, 70.000]
50BF - Breaker Failure
50BF-1 Disabled
Pickup Delay1 0.20 s 0.01 to 99.99
Breaker Current Pickup 1.00 A 0.10 to 50.00

Breaker Status <Disabled> Disabled, EI 1 to EI

9, PL 1 to PL 24
50BF-2 Disabled

9, PL 1 to PL 24
50BF-3 Disabled

9, PL 1 to PL 24
50BF-4 Disabled

9, PL 1 to PL 24
50BF-5 Disabled

9, PL 1 to PL 24
50/51 - Phase Overcurrent: HV
50-HV Disabled
Pickup 10.00 pu 0.10 to 100.00
51-HV Disabled
Pickup 1.50 pu 0.05 to 5.00
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400 - -
B 0.0000 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - 0.10 to 100.00
51ADP Disabled
Multiple of Normal Loss of Life 1.0 - 0.5 to 512.0
50/51 - Phase Overcurrent: LV
50-LV Disabled
Pickup 10.00 pu 0.10 to 100.00

51-LV Disabled
Pickup 1.50 pu 0.05 to 5.00
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400 - -
B 0.0000 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - 0.10 to 100.00
50/51 - Phase Overcurrent: TV
50-TV Disabled
Pickup 10.00 pu 0.10 to 100.00
51-TV Disabled
Pickup 1.50 pu 0.05 to 5.00
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400 - -
B 0.0000 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - 0.10 to 100.00
50N/51N - Neutral Overcurrent: HV
50N-HV Disabled
Pickup 5.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
51N-HV Disabled
Pickup 1.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400 - -
B 0.0000 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - 0.10 to 100.00
50N/51N - Neutral Overcurrent: LV
50N-LV Disabled
Pickup 5.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
51N-LV Disabled
Pickup 1.00 A 0.25 to 50.00

TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400 - -
B 0.0000 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - 0.10 to 100.00
50N/51N - Neutral Overcurrent: TV
50N-TV Disabled
Pickup 5.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
51N-TV Disabled
Pickup 1.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400 - -
B 0.0000 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - 0.10 to 100.00
59 - Overvoltage
59-1 Disabled
Gate Switch OR OR, AND
Pickup 70.0 V 1.0 to 138.0
59-2 Disabled
Gate Switch OR OR, AND
Pickup 70.0 V 1.0 to 138.0
67 - Directional Overcurrent
67 Disabled
Pickup 1.50 pu 0.05 to 5.00
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400 - -
B 0.0000 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - 0.10 to 100.00
Alpha 135.0 deg -179.9 to 180.0
Beta 150.0 deg 0.1 to 360.0
67N - Directional Earth Fault
67N Disabled
Pickup 5.00 A 0.25 to 50.00

TMS 1.00 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.1400
B 0.0000
p 0.02
TR 13.50 0.10 to 100.00
Alpha 135.0 deg -179.9 to 180.0
Beta 150.0 deg 0.1 to 360.0
THD - Total Harmonic Distortion
THD Disabled
Pickup 10.0 % 5.0 to 100.0
Through Fault Monitor
Through Fault Monitor Disabled
Input Current HV HV, LV, TV
Pickup Level 1.20 pu 0.10 to 20.00
Dropout Delay 0.00 s 0.00 to 99.99
I*I*t Alarm Limit 1000.0 kA*kA*s 0.1 to 9999.9
2nd Harmonics Blocking Disabled
PL 1 [ProLogic 1]
ProLogic 1 Disabled
Operator 1
Input A <Unused = 0>
Operator 2
Input B <Unused = 0>
Operator 3
Input C <Unused = 0>
Operator 4
Input D <Unused = 0>
Operator 5
Input E <Unused = 0>
PL 2 [ProLogic 2]
ProLogic 2 Disabled

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 3 [ProLogic 3]
ProLogic 3 Disabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 4 [ProLogic 4]
ProLogic 4 Disabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 5 [ProLogic 5]
ProLogic 5 Disabled

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 6 [ProLogic 6]
ProLogic 6 Disabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 7 [ProLogic 7]
ProLogic 7 Disabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

PL 8 [ProLogic 8]
ProLogic 8 Disabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 9 [ProLogic 9]
ProLogic 9 Disabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 10 [ProLogic 10]
ProLogic 10 Disabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4

Operator 5
PL 11 [ProLogic 11]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 12 [ProLogic 12]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 13 [ProLogic 13]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3

Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 14 [ProLogic 14]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 15 [ProLogic 15]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 16 [ProLogic 16]
Operator 1
Operator 2

Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 17 [ProLogic 17]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 18 [ProLogic 18]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 19 [ProLogic 19]
Operator 1

Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 20 [ProLogic 20]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 21 [ProLogic 21]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 22 [ProLogic 22]

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 23 [ProLogic 23]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
PL 24 [ProLogic 24]
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
GL 1 [Group Logic 1]
Group Logic 1 Disabled

Setting Group to Activate <none>
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4

Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3

Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2

Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1

Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Appendix C Hardware Description
The relay is a complete transformer protection relay package designed and
manufactured with high quality features and recording components. The fol-
lowing information describes the main hardware components of the relay:
Main Processor The MPB has two processor sub-systems which control the operation of the en-
Board (MPB) tire relay: the DSP processor and the control processor. The DSP sub-system
interfaces to the RAIB, the DIB and the OCB and manages the protection fea-
tures of the relay. The control processor manages the user interface and system
control features of the relay. Both subsystems operate independently of each
other and will continue to function even if the other sub-system fails.
The MPB provides the following functionality:
• DSP processor subsystem which interfaces to the RAIB, the DIB and the
OCB and manages the protection features of the relay, with:
• The floating point DSP to provide fast capture and manipulation
of data.
• RAM and reprogrammable non-volatile Flash memory. Allows op-
eration independent of the control processor and supports field
software updates.
• A control processor subsystem which manages the user interface and sys-
tem control features of the relay, with
• RAM and reprogrammable non-volatile Flash memory. Allows op-
eration independent of the DSP processor and supports field soft-
ware upgrades.
• Settings and recordings stored in non-volatile memory.
• Runs a Real Time Operating System (RTOS).
• Provides Ethernet ports and RS-232 ports for modem, SCADA,
COM and USB interfaces.
• A time synchronism processor with automatic detection of modulated and
unmodulated IRIG-B
• A high speed link is provided between the DSP and control processor sub-
systems.
• Sophisticated fault detection and “watchdog” recovery hardware
• The MPB also provides the power supply for the entire unit. The power
supply operating range is 43 – 275 Vdc, 90 – 265 Vac, 50/60 Hz. This wide
operating range provides easier installation by eliminating power supply
ordering options
Digital Input This board provides 9 digital input channels. Inputs are optically isolated, ex-
Board (DIB) ternally wetted, and factory preset to the customer’s requested voltage level of
48,110/125 or 220/250 Vdc. This board interfaces to the MPB.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix C-1

Appendix C Hardware Description
Rear Panel The RPCB provides the relay with two RS-232 ports (Ports 122 and 123,
Comm Board DB9F), IRIG-B time synchronization input (Port 121, male BNC), internal
(RPCB) modem connection (Port 118, RJ-11) and two Ethernet ports (Ports 119 and
120, RJ-45 or 100BASE-FX MM 1300nm ST, depending upon order specifi-
cation). The RPCB interfaces to the MPB. Port 119 is the exception in that it
interfaces to the GFPCB where it shares an internal switch with the front panel
LAN port. The switch then interfaces to the MPB.
Output Contact The LOCB provides 14 normally open contact outputs for relaying, alarms and
Board (LOCB) control. It also provides one normally closed output contact for relay inopera-
tive indication. This board interfaces to the MPB.
Output Contact The LOCBH provides the following output contacts for relaying, alarms and
Board (LOCBH) control:
• One normally closed relay inoperative indicator normal output contact
• 6 user-defined normal output contacts with both normally open and nor-
mally closed terminals made available to the user
• 4 user-defined high current fast interrupting (HCFI) output contacts
The LOCBH interfaces to the MPB.
Digital Input/ The DIGIO provides 11 digital input channels. Inputs are optically isolated, ex-
Output Board ternally wetted, and factory preset to the customer's requested voltage level of
(DIGIO) 48,110/125 or 220/250 Vdc. The DIGIO also provide 7 normally open contact
outputs for relaying, alarms and control. This board interfaces to the MPB.
Relay AC Each relay has 3 RASBs. One RASB has 3 voltage transformer inputs
Analog Sensor and 3 current transformer inputs while the other two RASBs have 6 cur-
Boards (RASB) rent transformer inputs. These boards provide 15 current and 3 voltage
ac analog measurement inputs. The RASBs interface to the RAIB.
Relay AC The RAIB provides the analog to digital conversion of the 15 ac analog current
Analog Input inputs and the 3 ac analog voltage inputs. The sample rate is fixed at 96 sam-
Board (RAIB) ples/cycle. Each channel is simultaneously sampled using 16-bit analog to dig-
ital converters. The digitized data is sent to the MPB for processing and
implementation of the protection algorithms.
Graphics Front The GFPCB provides the front panel USB and Ethernet ports, the front panel
Panel Comm status LEDs and interfaces the MPB to the FPDB. The MPB controls the state
Board (GFPCB) of the LEDs.
Graphics Front The GFPDB provides the 240x128 monochrome graphics front panel display
Panel Display and the keypad. The keypad is used to navigate the menus on the display to
Board (GFPDB) control relay operation by a local user.
Appendix C-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Appendix D Event Messages
87 Trip on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
87N-HV Trip
87N-LV Trip
87N-TV Trip
51-HV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
50-HV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
51-LV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
50-LV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix D-1

51-TV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
50-TV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
51N-HV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
50N-HV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
51N-LV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
50N-LV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
51N-TV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
Appendix D-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

50N-TV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
67 Trip on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
67N Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
24INV Trip
24DEF-1 Trip
24DEF-2 Trip
59N Trip
60 Alarm
51-HV Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
51-LV Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC

51-TV Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
51N-HV Alarm on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
51N-LV Alarm on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
51N-TV Alarm on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
67 Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
67N Alarm on ABCG The possible phase information is

• AG
• BG
• CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
24INV Alarm
59N Alarm
THD Exceeds Limit: Alrm
Ambient (P1) - Range: Alrm P1 - could be Over or Under
Top Oil (P1) - Range: Alrm P1 - could be Over or Under

TOEWS: 15 min Alarm
TOEWS: 30 min Alarm
TOEWS: Trip
49-1: Trip/Alarm
49-2: Trip/Alarm
49-3: Trip/Alarm
49-4: Trip/Alarm
49-5: Trip/Alarm
49-6: Trip/Alarm
49-7: Trip/Alarm
49-8: Trip/Alarm
49-9: Trip/Alarm
49-10: Trip/Alarm
49-11: Trip/Alarm
49-12: Trip/Alarm
81-1: Trip
81-2: Trip
81-3: Trip
81-4: Trip
50BF Initiated - HV
50BF Initiated –LV
50BF Initiated -TV
50BF: Input1Trip1
50BF: Input1 Trip2
50BF: Input2Trip1
50BF: Input2 Trip2
50BF: Input3Trip1
50BF: Input3 Trip2
50BF: Input4Trip1
50BF: Input4 Trip2
50BF: Input5 Trip1
50BF: Input5 Trip2

59-1: Trip on ABC The possible phase information is:

59-2: Trip on ABC •A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
27-1: Trip on ABC The possible phase information is:

27-2: Trip on ABC •A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
l*l*t Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is:

•A
•B
•C
•N
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
ProLogic Name: PLn ProLogic outputs names are user-assigned Where n =

1 to 24
External Input Name: EIn: High External input names are user-assigned
Where n = 1 to 20
External Input Name: EIn: Low External input names are user-assigned
Where n = 1 to 20
Output Contacts name: Out n: Open Output contact names are user-assigned
Where n= 1 to 21
Output Contacts name: Out n: Closed Output contact names are user-assigned
Where n= 1 to 21
Virtual Input 1:VI1 : Low Virtual Input names are user-assigned

Where n= 1 to 30
Virtual Input 1:VI1 : High Virtual Input names are user-assigned

Where n= 1 to 30
Self Check: DC Ch.n: Alarm Continuous dc level on Ch. n, where n = 1 to 18.
Self Check: DC Alarm Reset Continuous dc level, condition has reset.
Self Check: DC Ch.n: O/P Block Continuous dc level on Ch. n, where n = 1 to 18.
Through Fault Peak Value
Through Fault I2t Value
New Setting Loaded
Logic Setting Group Change
User Setting Group Change

Manual settings load request completed Completion of user-initiated settings change
Unit recalibrated
Unit restarted
User logged in

Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication
Protocol
The SCADA port supports DNP3 and Modicon Modbus protocols. All meter-
ing values available through the terminal user interface are also available
through the Modbus protocol. Additionally, the Modbus protocol supports the
reading of unit time and time of the readings, and provides access to trip and
alarm events, including fault location information.
A “Hold Readings” function is available to freeze all metering readings into a
snapshot (see Force Single Coil function, address 0).
T-PRO 4000 Modbus Message Index List
Read Coil Status (Function Code 01)
Channel Address Value
Hold Readings 1 0: Readings not held 1: Readings held
Reserved 257 Reserved Reserved
Output Contacts 1 513 0: Contact Open (inactive) 1: Contact Closed (active)
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E-1

Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol
Differential (87) Trip 769 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Differential (87) Restraint 770 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
87 Unrestrained 771 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51HV Trip 772 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51HV Alarm 773 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D50HV Trip 774 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51LV Trip 775 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51LV Alarm 776 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D50LV Trip 777 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51TV Trip 778 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51TV Alarm 779 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D50TV Trip 780 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51N-HV Trip 781 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51N-HV Alarm 782 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51N-LV Trip 784 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51N-LV Alarm 785 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51N-TV Trip 787 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D51N-TV Alarm 788 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Directional Overcurrent (67) Trip 790 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Directional Overcurrent (67) Alarm 791 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Volts/Hertz (24INV) Trip 792 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Volts/Hertz (24INV) Alarm 793 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Instantaneous Overexcitation (24DEF) trip 794 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D59N Trip 795 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D59N Alarm 796 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Loss of Potential (60) Alarm 797 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Total Harmonic Distortion Alarm 798 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Auxiliary device failure alarm 799 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Ambient out of range alarm 800 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Top oil out of range alarm 801 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D49-1 Trip/Alarm 802 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Appendix E-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Toews15MinAlarm 817 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Toews30MinAlarm 818 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
ToewsTrip 819 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
ProLogic1 820 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
81-1 Trip 830 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
I2t Alarm 836 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Instantaneous Overexcitation 24DEF-2 837 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Trip
D59-1 Trip 838 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

D59-2Trip 839 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D50BF-Input1Trip1 840 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
IRIG-B Signal Loss 850 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
67N Trip 865 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
67N Alarm 866 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
67 Direction 867 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
67N Direction 868 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Read Input Status (Function Code 02)
Channel Address Value
External Input 1 10001 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
External Input 1 Change of state latch 10257 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Virtual Input 1 10513 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Read Holding Registers (Function Code 03)
Channel Address Units Scale
T-PRO Clock Time (UTC). Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data
Milliseconds now 40001 0 1

* Millisecond information not
supported.
Seconds Now 40002 0-59 1
Minutes Now 40003 0-59 1
Hours Now 40004 0-23 1
Day of Year Now 40005 1-365 (up to 366 if leap year) 1
Years since 1900 40006 90-137 1
Sync’d to IRIG-B 40007 0: No 1: Yes 1
Time of Acquisition (UTC). Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data
Milliseconds now 40008 0 1

* Millisecond information not
supported.
Seconds Now 40009 0-59 1
Minutes Now 40010 0-59 1
Hours Now 40011 0-23 1
Day of Year Now 40012 1-365 (up to 366 if leap year) 1
Years since 1900 40013 90-137 1
Sync’d to IRIG-B 40014 0: No 1: Yes 1
Offset of UTC of IED time 40015 2’s complement half hours, 1

North America is negative

Read Holding Registers (Function Code 03)
Channel Address Units Scale
Va Magnitude 40257 kV 10
Va Angle 40258 degrees 10
Vb Magnitude 40259 kV 10
Vb Angle 40260 degrees 10
Vc Magnitude 40261 kV 10
Vc Angle 40262 degrees 10
Voltage (V1) 40263 kV 10
I1 positive 40264 A 0.1
P 40265 MW 0.01
Q 40266 Mvar 0.01
I1a Magnitude 40267 A 0.1
I1a Angle 40268 Degrees 10
I1b Magnitude 40269 A 0.1
I1b Angle 40270 Degrees 10
I1c Magnitude 40271 A 0.1
I1c Angle 40272 Degrees 10

HVa Magnitude 40297 A 0.1
HVa Angle 40298 Degrees 10
HVb Magnitude 40299 A 0.1
HVb Angle 40300 Degrees 10
HVc Magnitude 40301 A 0.1
HVc Angle 40302 Degrees 10
LVa Magnitude 40303 A 0.1
LVa Angle 40304 Degrees 10
LVb Magnitude 40305 A 0.1
LVb Angle 40306 Degrees 10
LVc Magnitude 40307 A 0.1
LVc Angle 40308 Degrees 10
TVa Magnitude 40309 A 0.1
TVa Angle 40310 Degrees 10
TVb Magnitude 40311 A 0.1
TVb Angle 40312 Degrees 10
TVc Magnitude 40313 A 0.1
TVc Angle 40314 Degrees 10
Ia Operating 40315 Per Unit 1
Ib Operating 40316 Per Unit 1
Ic Operating 40317 Per Unit 1
Ia Restraint 40318 Per Unit 1
Ib Restraint 40319 Per Unit 1
Ic Restraint 40320 Per Unit 1
Frequency 40321 Hz 100
DC1 40322 mA 100
DC2 40323 mA 100
49 HV RMS Current in PU 40324 Per Unit 10

49 LV RMS Current in PU 40325 Per Unit 10
49 TV RMS Current in PU 40326 Per Unit 10
Toews: MinutesToTrip 40327 In minutes 1
Self check failure param. 40328 N/A 1
Ambient Temperature 40513 C 10
Top Oil Temperature 40514 C 10
Hot Spot Temperature 40515 C 10
Loss of Life 40516 Per Unit 100
51 Pickup Level 40517 Per Unit 100
THD 40518 % 100
Accumulated IA*IA*t 40519 KA*KA*S 10
Accumulated IB*IB*t 40520 KA*KA*S 10
Accumulated IC*IC*t 40521 KA*KA*S 10
Accumulated Through Fault Count 40522 N/A 1
S 40523 MVA 0.01
PF 40524 NA 100
I1 zero 40527 A 1
I1 negative 40528 A 1
I2 positive 40529 A 1
I2 zero 40530 A 1
I3 zero 40533 A 1
I4 zero 40536 A 1
I5 zero 40539 A 1
HV 3I0 Magnitude 40541 A 1
HV 3I0 Angle 40542 degrees 10
LV 3I0 Magnitude 40543 A 1
LV 3I0 Angle 40544 degrees 10

TV 3I0 Magnitude 40545 A 1
TV 3I0 Angle 40546 degrees 10
HV REF IO 40547 A 1
LV REF IO 40548 A 1
TV REF IO 40549 A 1
HV REF IR 40550 A 1
LV REF IR 40551 A 1
TV REF IR 40552 A 1
HV IA 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40553 % 100
HV IB 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40554 % 100
HV IC 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40555 % 100
LV IA 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40556 % 100
LV IB 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40557 % 100
LV IC 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40558 % 100
TV IA 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40559 % 100
TV IB 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40560 % 100
TV IC 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40561 % 100
I1a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40562 % 100
I1b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40563 % 100
I1c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40564 % 100
I1a 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40577 % 100
I1b 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40578 % 100
I1c 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40579 % 100

Pa 40592 MW 0.1
Pb 40593 MW 0.1
Pc 40594 MW 0.1
Qa 40595 Mvar 0.1
Qb 40596 Mvar 0.1
Qc 40597 Mvar 0.1
Sa 40598 MVA 0.1
Sb 40599 MVA 0.1
Sc 40600 MVA 0.1
PFa 40601 NA 100
PFb 40602 NA 100
PFc 40603 NA 100
Read Input Register (Function Code 04)
N input registers supported. Response from IED indicates “ILLEGAL FUCTION”

Force Single Coil (Function Code 05)
Only the “hold readings” coil can be forced. When active, this coil locks al coil, input and holding register readings simultaneously
at their present values. When inactive, coil, input and holding register values will read their most recently available state
Channel Type Address Value
Hold Readings Read/Write 01 0000: Readings update nor-

mal (inactive)
FF00: Hold readings (active)
Preset Single Registers (Function Code 06)
Channel Address Value Scaled Up By
Event Messages Control (See Below for details of use)
Refresh event list 40769 No Data required N/A
Acknowledge the current 40770 No Data required N/A

event and get the next
event
Get the next event (without 40771 No Data required N/A

acknowledge)
Diagnostic Subfuctions (Function Code 08)
Return Query Data (Subfuction 00) This provides an echo of the submitted message
Restart Comm. Option (Subfunction 01) This restarts the Modbus communication process.
Force Listen Only Mode (Subfunction 04) No response is returned. IED enters “Listen Only” Mode. This
mode can only be exited by the “Restart Comm. Option” com-
mand.
Report Slave ID (Funciton Code 17/0x11)
A fixed response is returned by the IED, including system model, version and issue numbers.
Channel Type Bytes Values
Model Number Read Only 0 and 1 0XfA0 = 4000 decimal
Version Number Read Only 2 and 3 Version Number
Issue Number Read Only 4 and 5 Issue Number

The T-PRO IED model number is 4000.

Version and issue will each be positive integers, say X and Y.
The T-PRO is defined as “Model 4000, Version X Issue Y”
Accessing T-PRO Event Information
All T-PRO detector event messages displayed in the Event Log are available via Modbus. This includes fault location information.
The following controls are available.
(Function Code 6, address 40769): Fetches the latest events from the relay's event log
Refresh Event List and makes them available for Modbus access. The most recent event becomes the
current event available for reading.
(Function Code 6, address 40770): Clears the current event from the read registers
Acknowledge Current Event and
and places the next event into them. An acknowledged event is no longer available for
Get Next Event
reading.
(Function Code 6, address 40771): Places the next event in the read registers without
Get Next Event acknowledging the current event. The current event will reappear in the list when
Refresh Event List is used.
(Function Code 3, address 40772): Indicates the number of 16 bit registers used to
contain the current event. Event data is stored with 2 characters per register. A reading
of zero indicates that there are no unacknowledged events available in the current set.
Size of Current Event Message
(NB. The
Refresh Event List function can be used to check for new events that have occurred
since the last Refresh Event List.)
(Function Code 3, addresses 40774– 40832): Contains the current message.

Read Event Message Two.ASCII characters are packed into each 16 bit register. All unused registers in the
set are set to 0.

Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile
Device This document shows the device capabilities and the current value of each pa-
Properties rameter for the default unit configuration as defined in the default configura-
tion file.
If configurable,
1.1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.1.1 Device Function: ○ Master ○ Master

● Outstation ● Outstation
1.1.2 Vendor Name: ERLPhase
Power Technolo-
gies
1.1.3 Device Name: T-PRO 4000
1.1.4 Device manufacturer's NA

hardware version string:
1.1.5 Device manufacturer's NA

software version string:
1.1.6 Device Profile V1.1, Dec 12,

Document Version 2014
Number:
1.1.7 DNP Levels Supported Masters Only

for: Requests Responses
  None
  Level 1
  Level 2
  Level 3
Outstations Only
Requests and Responses
None
 Level 1
 Level 2
Level 3
1.1.8 Supported Function  Self-Address Reservation

Blocks:  Object 0 - attribute objects
 Data Sets
 File Transfer
 Virtual Terminal
 Mapping to IEC 61850 Object Models defined in
a DNP3 XML file
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F-1

If configurable,
1.1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.1.9 Notable Additions: • Start-stop (qualifier codes 0x00 and 0x01), limited
quantity (qualifier codes 0x07 and 0x08) and indi-
ces (qualifier codes 0x17 and 0x28) for Binary In-
puts, Binary Outputs and Analog Inputs (object
groups 1, 10 and 30)
• 32-bit and 16-bit Analog Inputs with and without
flag (variations 1, 2, 3 and 4)
• Analog Input events with time (variations 3 and 4)
• Fault Location information as analog readings
• Event Log messages as Object groups 110 and
111
1.1.10 Methods to set  XML - Loaded via DNP3 File Transfer

Configurable  XML - Loaded via other transport mechanism
Parameters:  Terminal - ASCII Terminal Command Line
 Software - Vendor software named
T-PRO Offliner
 Proprietary file loaded via DNP3 file transfer
 Proprietary file loaded via other transport mech-
anism
 Direct - Keypad on device front panel
 Factory - Specified when device is ordered
 Protocol - Set via DNP3 (e.g. assign class)
 Other - explain _________________
1.1.11 DNP3 XML files RdWrFilename Description of Contents Not supported

available On-Line:
 dnpDP.xml Complete Device Profile
 dnpDPcap.xml Device Profile Capabilities
 dnpDPcfg.xml Device Profile config.
values
  _____*.xml ___________________
*The Complete Device Profile Document contains

the capabilities, Current Value, and configurable
methods columns.
*The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the
capabilities and configurable methods columns.
*The Device Profile Config. Values contains only the
Current Value column.
1.1.12 External DNP3 XML Rd WrFilenameDescription of Not supported

files available Off-line: Contents
  dnpDP.xml Complete Device Profile
  dnpDPcap.xml Device Profile Capabilities
  dnpDPcfg.xml Device Profile config.
values
  _______*.xml ___________________
*The Complete Device Profile Document contains

the capabilities, Current Value, and configurable
methods columns.
*The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the
capabilities and configurable methods columns.
*The Device Profile Config. Values contains only the
Current Value column.
1.1.13 Connections  Serial (complete section 1.2)

Supported:  IP Networking (complete section 1.3)
 Other, explain ______________________
Appendix F-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

If configurable,
1.2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.2.1 Port Name Port 122
1.2.2 Serial Connection  Asynchronous - 8 Data Bits, 1 Start Bit, 1 Stop Not configured T-PRO Offliner
Parameters: Bit, No Parity for DNP
 Other, explain - Asynchronous with selectable
parity
1.2.3 Baud Rate:  Fixed at _______ Not configured T-PRO Offliner

 Configurable, range _______ to _______ for DNP
 Configurable, selectable from 300, 1200, 2400,
9600, 19200, 38400 and 57600
 Configurable, other, describe_______________
1.2.4 Hardware Flow Control  None

(Handshaking): RS-232 / V.24 / V.28 Options:
Describe hardware sig- Before Tx, Asserts:  RTS
naling requirements of  DTR
the interface. Before Rx, Asserts:  RTS
Where a transmitter or  DTR
receiver is inhibited until Always Asserts:  RTS
a given control signal is  DTR
asserted, it is consid- Before Tx, Requires: Asserted Deasserted
ered to require that sig-  CTS
nal prior to sending or  DCD
receiving characters.  DSR
Where a signal is  RI
asserted prior to trans-  Rx Inactive
mitting, that signal will Before Rx, Requires: Asserted Deasserted
be maintained active  CTS
until after the end of  DCD
transmission.  DSR
Where a signal is  RI
asserted to enable Always Ignores:
reception, any data sent  CTS
to the device when the  DCD
signal is not active  DSR
could be discarded.  RI
Other, explain ____________
RS-422 / V.11 Options:
Requires Indication before Rx
Asserts Control before Tx
RS-485 Options:
Requires Rx inactive before Tx
1.2.5 Interval to Request Link  Not Supported

Status:  Fixed at_________ seconds
 Configurable, range _____ to ______ seconds
 Configurable, selectable from __,__,__ seconds
 Configurable, other, describe______________
1.2.6 Supports DNP3  No

Collision Avoidance:  Yes, explain ______________________

If configurable,
1.2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.2.7 Receiver Inter-  Not checked

character Timeout:  No gap permitted
 Fixed at _____ bit times
 Fixed at _____ ms
 Configurable, range ____ to ____ bit times
 Configurable, range ____ to ____ ms
 Configurable, Selectable from __,__,__bit times
 Configurable, Selectable from ___, ___, ___ ms
 Variable, explain ____
1.2.8 Inter-character gaps in  None (always transmits with no inter-character

transmission: gap)
 Maximum _____ bit times
 Maximum _____ ms

If configurable,
1.3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.3.1 Port Name Port 119 and Port 120
1.3.2 Type of End Point:  TCP Initiating (Master Only) Not configured T-PRO Offliner
 TCP Listening (Outstation Only) for DNP
 TCP Dual (required for Masters)
 UDP Datagram (required)
1.3.3 IP Address of this 192.168.100.101 T-PRO Mainte-

Device: nance utilities
1.3.4 Subnet Mask: Not set T-PRO Mainte-

nance utilities
1.3.5 Gateway IP Address: Not set T-PRO Mainte-

nance utilities
1.3.6 Accepts TCP  Allows all (show as *.*.*.* in 1.3.7) Limits based on T-PRO Offliner
Connections or UDP  Limits based on an IP address an IP address
Datagrams from:  Limits based on list of IP addresses
 Limits based on a wildcard IP address
 Limits based on list of wildcard IP addresses
 Other validation, explain_________________
1.3.7 IP Address(es) from 192.168.1.1 T-PRO Offliner

which TCP Connections
or UDP Datagrams are
accepted:
1.3.8 TCP Listen Port  Not Applicable (Master w/o dual end point) 20,000 T-PRO Offliner
Number:  Fixed at 20,000
 Configurable, range 1025 to 32737
 Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
1.3.9 TCP Listen Port  Not Applicable (Outstation w/o dual end point) NA
Number of remote  Fixed at 20,000
device:  Configurable, range _______ to _______
1.3.10 TCP Keep-alive timer:  Fixed at ___________ms Disabled T-PRO Offliner

 Configurable, range 5 to 3,600 s
 Configurable, selectable from ___,___,___ms
1.3.11 Local UDP port:  Fixed at 20,000 20,000 T-PRO Offliner

 Let system choose (Master only)
1.3.12 Destination UDP port NA

for DNP3 Requests
(Master Only):

If configurable,
1.3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.3.13 Destination UDP port T None NA

for initial unsolicited null  Fixed at 20,000
responses (UDP only  Configurable, range ______ to _______
Outstations):  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
 Use source port number
1.3.14 Destination UDP port  None 20,000 T-PRO Offliner

for responses::  Fixed at 20,000
 Use source port number
1.3.15 Multiple master  Supports multiple masters (Outstations only) Method 1 (based T-PRO Offliner
connections If supported, the following methods may be on IP address)
(Outstations Only): used:
 Method 1 (based on IP address) - required
 Method 2 (based on IP port number) -
recommended
 Method 3 (browsing for static data) - optional
1.3.16 Time synchronization  DNP3 LAN procedure (function code 24)

support:  DNP3 Write Time (not recommended over LAN)
 Other, explain _________________________
 Not Supported

If configurable,
1.4 Link Layer Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.4.1 Data Link Address:  Fixed at______ 1 T-PRO Offliner

1.4.2 DNP3 Source Address  Never

Validation:  Always, one address allowed (shown in 1.4.3)
 Always, any one of multiple addresses allowed
 (each selectable as shown in 1.4.3)
 Sometimes, explain________________
1.4.3 DNP3 Source  Configurable to any 16 bit DNP Data Link NA

Address(es) expected Address value
when Validation is  Configurable, range _______ to _______
Enabled:  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
1.4.4 Self Address Support  Yes (only allowed if configurable) NA

using address 0xFFFC:  No
1.4.5 Sends Confirmed User  Always T-PRO Offliner

Data Frames:  Sometimes, explain _____________________ (to disable, set
 Never Data Link Time-
 Configurable, either always or never out to 0)
1.4.6 Data Link Layer  None 500

Confirmation Timeout:  Fixed at __ ms
 Configurable, range 0 to 2,000 ms
 Configurable, selectable from____________ms
 Variable, explain _______________________
1.4.7 Maximum Data Link  Never Retries 3

Retries:  Fixed at 3
 Configurable, range ________ to _______
1.4.8 Maximum number of  Fixed at 292 292

octets Transmitted in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Data Link Frame:  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____

octets that can be  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Received in a Data Link  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Frame:  Configurable, other, describe______________

If configurable,
1.5 Application Layer Capabilities Current Value
list methods

octets Transmitted in an  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Application Layer  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Fragment other than  Configurable, other, describe______________
File Transfer:
1.5.2 Maximum number of  Fixed at ___________ NA

octets Transmitted in an  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Application Layer  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Fragment containing  Configurable, other, describe______________
File Transfer:

octets that can be  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Received in an  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Application Layer  Configurable, other, describe______________
Fragment:
1.5.4 Timeout waiting for  None 2,000 ms

Complete Application  Fixed at 2,000 ms
Layer Fragment:  Configurable, range _______ to _______ms

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______
single control request  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
for CROB (group 12):  Configurable, other, describe______________
1.5.6 Maximum number of  Fixed at _ Analog Outputs

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______ not supported
for Analog Outputs  Configurable, other, describe______________
(group 41):  Variable, explain _______________________
1.5.7 Maximum number of  Fixed at __ Data Sets not

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______ supported
for Data Sets (groups  Configurable, other, describe______________
85,86,87):  Variable, explain _______________________
1.5.8 Supports mixing object  Not applicable - controls are not supported Analog Outputs
groups (AOBs, CROBs  Yes not supported
and Data Sets) in the  No
same control request:

1.6 Fill Out The Following

If configurable,
Items For Outstations Capabilities Current Value
list methods
Only
1.6.1 Timeout waiting for  None 5,000 ms

Application Confirm of  Fixed at 5,000 ms
solicited response  Configurable, range _______ to _______ms
message:  Configurable, selectable from ___,___,___ms
1.6.2 How often is time  Never needs time

synchronization  Within ______ seconds after IIN1.4 is set
required from the  Periodically every _______ seconds
master?
1.6.3 Device Trouble Bit  Never used

IIN1.6:  Reason for setting: Unable to access requested
data or execute CROB, assuming a valid
request has been received
1.6.4 File Handle Timeout:  Not applicable, files not supported

 Fixed at______ ms
 Configurable, range _______ to _______ms
1.6.5 Event Buffer Overflow  Discard the oldest event

Behaviour:  Discard the newest event
 Other, explain _________________________
1.6.6 Event Buffer • Single buffer for the Object Groups 2 and 32, size
Organization: 200.
• Separate buffer for the Object Group 111, size
100.
• Separate buffer for the Fault Locator events, size
100.
1.6.7 Sends Multi-Fragment  Yes

Responses:  No
1.6.8 DNP Command  Assign Class Not supported

Settings preserved  Analog Deadbands
through a device reset:  Data Set Prototypes
 Data Set Descriptors

1.7 Outstation Unsolicited If configurable,

Capabilities Current Value
Response Support list methods
1.7.1 Supports Unsolicited  Not Supported NA

Reporting:  Configurable, selectable from On and Off

If configurable,
1.8 Outstation Performance Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.8.1 Maximum Time Base NA, not synchro-

Drift (milliseconds per nized by DNP
minute):
1.8.2 When does outstation  Never NA

set IIN1.4?  Asserted at startup until first Time Synchroniza-
tion request received
 Periodically, range ____to____ seconds
 Periodically, selectable from ____,____,___
seconds
 Range ____to____ seconds after last time sync
 Selectable from___,___,___seconds after last
time sync
 When time error may have drifted by range
____to____ ms
 When time error may have drifted by selectable
from ____,____,___
1.8.3 Maximum Internal Time NA

Reference Error when
set via DNP (ms):
1.8.4 Maximum Delay NA

Measurement error
(ms):
1.8.5 Maximum Response 100 ms (for the T-PRO Offliner

time (ms): case all sup-
ported points
mapped to the
DNP point lists)
1.8.6 Maximum time from NA

start-up to IIN 1.4
assertion (ms):
1.8.7 Maximum Event Time- • 0.1736 ms for

tag error for local Binary 60Hz sys-
and Double-bit I/O (ms): tems
• 0.2083 ms for
50 Hz sys-
tems
1.8.8 Maximum Event Time- • 0.1736 ms for

tag error for local I/O 60Hz sys-
other than Binary and tems
Double-bit data types • 0.2083 ms for
(ms): 50 Hz sys-
tems

Capabilities and The following tables identify the capabilities and current settings for each
Current DNP3 data type. Each data type also provides a table defining the data points
Settings for available in the device, default point lists configuration and a description of
Device how this information can be obtained in case of customized point configura-
Database tion.
2.1 Single-Bit Binary Inputs If configurable,

Static (Steady-State) Group Number: 1 Capabilities Current Value
Event Group Number: 2
list methods
2.1.1 Static Variation reported  Variation 1 - Single-bit Packed format

when variation 0  Variation 2 - Single-bit with flag
requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table
below)
2.1.2 Event Variation  Variation 1 - without time

reported when variation  Variation 2 - with absolute time
0 requested:  Variation 3 - with relative time
 Based on point Index (add column to table
below)
2.1.3 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent

 All events
2.1.4 Binary Inputs included  Always T-PRO Offliner

in Class 0 response:  Never
 Only if point is assigned to Class 1, 2, or 3
below)
2.1.5 Definition of Binary  Fixed, list shown in table below Complete list is T-PRO Offliner
Input Point List:  Configurable shown in the
 Other, explain_____________________ table below;
points excluded
from the default
configuration are
marked with ‘*’
1. Binary Inputs are scanned with 1 ms resolution.
2. Binary Input data points are user selectable; the data points avail-
Notes
able in the device for any given Binary Input point selection can be
obtained through the T-PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting
Summary).

Default Class Name for Name for

Point
Name Assigned to Events State when State when Description
Index
(1, 2, 3 or none) value is 0 value is 1
0 External Input 1 1 Inactive Active
9 Virtual Input 1 1 Inactive Active

39 87 Trip 1 Inactive Active
40 87 Restrain 1 Inactive Active
41 87 Unrestrained 1 Inactive Active
42 51-HV Trip 1 Inactive Active
43 51-HV Alarm 1 Inactive Active
44 50-HV Trip 1 Inactive Active
45 51-LV Trip 1 Inactive Active
46 51-LV Alarm 1 Inactive Active
47 50-LV Trip 1 Inactive Active
48 51-TV Trip 1 Inactive Active
49 51-TV Alarm 1 Inactive Active
50 50-TV Trip 1 Inactive Active
51 51N-HV Trip 1 Inactive Active
52 51N-HV Alarm 1 Inactive Active
54 51N-LV Trip 1 Inactive Active
55 51N-LV Alarm 1 Inactive Active
57 51N-TV Trip 1 Inactive Active
58 51N-TV Alarm 1 Inactive Active
60 67 Trip 1 Inactive Active
61 67 Alarm 1 Inactive Active
62 24INV Trip 1 Inactive Active
63 24INV Alarm 1 Inactive Active
64 24DEF-1 Trip 1 Inactive Active
65 59N Trip 1 Inactive Active
66 59N Alarm 1 Inactive Active
67 60 Alarm 1 Inactive Active

68 THD Alarm 1 Inactive Active
69 Self Check Fail 1 Inactive Active
70 Ambient Temperature Alarm 1 Inactive Active
71 Top Oil Temperature Alarm 1 Inactive Active
72 49-1 Operates 1 Inactive Active
87 TOEWS 15 Minute Alarm 1 Inactive Active
88 TOEWS 30 Minute Alarm 1 Inactive Active
89 TOEWS Trip 1 Inactive Active
90 ProLogic1 1 Inactive Active
100 81-1 Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 81-1 OF, UF

and RC Trips

and RC Trips


and RC Trips

and RC Trips
104 27-1 Trip 1 Inactive Active
106 I*I*t Alarm 1 Inactive Active
107 24DEF -2 Trip 1 Inactive Active
110 50BF-Input1-Trip1 1 Inactive Active
120 50BF Initiated-HV 1 Inactive Active
121 50BF Initiated -LV 1 Inactive Active
122 50BF Initiated -TV 1 Inactive Active
123 IRIG-B Signal Loss 1 Inactive Active
124* Output contact 1 1 Open Closed

145* External Input 10 1 Inactive Active
156* 87 Trip A 1 Inactive Active
157* 87 Trip B 1 Inactive Active
158* 87 Trip C 1 Inactive Active
159* 27-1 Trip A 1 Inactive Active
160* 27-1 Trip B 1 Inactive Active
161* 27-1 Trip C 1 Inactive Active
171 ProLogic 11 1 Inactive Active

185 67N Trip 1 Inactive Active
186 67N Alarm 1 Inactive Active
187 67 Direction 1 Inactive Active
188 67N Direction 1 Inactive Active
189* 81-1 O/F Trip 1 Inactive Active
190* 81-1 U/F Trip 1 Inactive Active
191* 81-1 ROC Trip 1 Inactive Active

2.2 Binary Output Status

And Control Relay
Output Block If configurable,
Binary Output Status Group Number: 10 Capabilities Current Value
Binary Output Event Group Number: 11 list methods
CROB Group Number: 12
Binary Output Command Event Object
Num: 13
2.2.1 Minimum pulse time  Fixed at 0,000 ms (hardware may limit this
allowed with Trip, further)
Close, and Pulse On  Based on point Index (add column to table
commands: below)
2.2.2 Maximum pulse time  Fixed at 0,000 ms (hardware may limit this
allowed with Trip, further)
Close, and Pulse On  Based on point Index (add column to table
commands: below)
2.2.3 Binary Output Status  Always

included in Class 0  Never
response:  Only if point is assigned to Class 1, 2, or 3
below)
2.2.4 Reports Output  Never Not supported

Command Event  Only upon a successful Control
Objects:  Upon all control attempts
2.2.5 Event Variation  Variation 1 - without time Not supported T-PRO Offliner
reported when variation  Variation 2 - with absolute time (See Note 2
0 requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table below)
below)
2.2.6 Command Event  Variation 1 - without time Not supported T-PRO Offliner
Variation reported when  Variation 2 - with absolute time (See Note 2
variation 0 requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table below)
below)
2.2.7 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent Not supported T-PRO Offliner
 All events (See Note 2
below)
2.2.8 Command Event  Only most recent Not supported

reporting mode:  All events
2.2.9 Maximum Time  Not Applicable 10 s

between Select and  Fixed at 10 seconds
Operate:  Configurable, range ______ to ______ seconds
 Configurable, selectable
from___,___,___seconds
below)
2.2.10 Definition of Binary  Fixed, list shown in table below Complete list is T-PRO Offliner
Output Status/Control  Configurable shown in the
relay output block  Other, explain_____________________ table below;
(CROB) Point List: points excluded
from the default
configuration are
marked with ‘*’

1. Binary Outputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution.
2. Events are not supported for Binary Outputs (group 10), but most of Binary
Output points can be mapped to Binary Inputs (group 2) with full Event and Class
Data support. See T-PRO Offliner/DNP Configuration/Point Map screen for com-
plete point lists and configuration options.
NOTES
3. Virtual Inputs (default Binary Output points 14 - 43) can be used to control re-
lay output contacts. See T-PRO Offliner/Setting Group X/Output Matrix screen
for configuration options.
4. Binary Output data points are user selectable; the data points available in the
device for any given Binary Output point selection can be obtained through the
T-PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting Summary).
Default Class
Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events
(1, 2, 3 or none)
Cancel Currently Running Operation
Direct Operate - No Ack
Name for Name for

Name State when State when Change Command Description
value is 0 value is 1
Latch Off / NUL
Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip
0 Output contact 1 - - - - - - - - - - - Open Closed None None
14 Virtual Input 1 Y Y Y Y - Y Y - - - - Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

Default Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)

Name for Name for
Latch Off / NUL

Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip
at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s
at 1 s

at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s

at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s

at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s

at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s

at 1 s
at 1 s

at 1 s
at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s
43 Virtual Input 30 Y Y Y Y - Y - - - - - Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed
at 1 s
44* Output Contact 15 Y Y Y Y - Y - - - - - Open Closed None None Pulse duration fixed
at 1 s
45* Output Contact 16 - - - - - - - - - - - Open Closed None None

Default Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)

Name for Name for
Latch Off / NUL

Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip

2.3 Analog Input Points If configurable,

list methods
2.3.1 Static Variation reported  Variation 1 - 32-bit with flag

when variation 0  Variation 2 - 16-bit with flag
requested:  Variation 3 - 32-bit without flag
 Variation 4 - 16-bit without flag
 Variation 5 - single-precision floating point with
flag
 Variation 6 - double-precision floating point with
flag
below)
2.3.2 Event Variation  Variation 1 - 32-bit without time

reported when variation  Variation 2 - 16-bit without time
0 requested:  Variation 3 - 32-bit with time
 Variation 4 - 16-bit with time
 Variation 5 - single-precision floating point w/o
time
 Variation 6 - double-precision floating point w/o
time
 Variation 7 - single-precision floating point with
time
 Variation 8 - double-precision floating point with
time
below)
2.3.3 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent

 All events
2.3.4 Analog Inputs Included  Always

in Class 0 response:  Never
below)
2.3.5 How Deadbands are  A. Global Fixed T-PRO Offliner

set:  B. Configurable through DNP
 C. Configurable via other means
 D. Other, explain ________________________
 Based on point Index - column specifies which
of the options applies, B, C, or D
2.3.6 Analog Deadband  Simple

Algorithm:  Integrating
simple - just compares the difference from  Other, explain __________________________
the previous reported value
2.3.7 Definition of Analog  Fixed, list shown in table below Complete list is T-PRO Offliner
Input Point List:  Configurable shown in the
 Other, explain_____________________ table below;
points excluded
from the default
configuration are
marked with ‘*’

1. Analog Inputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution.
2. Nominal values in calculations for the following table are based on 69V sec-
ondary voltage * PT ratio for voltage channels, and either 1 A or 5A secondary
current * CT ratio for current channels dependent upon the format of CT installed
NOTES
in the T-PRO.
3. Analog Input data points are user selectable; the data points available in the
device for any given Analog Input point selection can be obtained through the T-
PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting Summary).
Transmitted Valuea Scalingb

Point Index
Default Class
Assigned to Multiplier Resolutionc
Name
Events
Minimum Maximumd (default/ (range))
Offset Units (default/ Description
(1, 2, 3 or none) maximal)
0 Va Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
1 Va Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
2 Vb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
3 Vb Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
4 Vc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
5 Vc Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
6 Voltage (V1) 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
7 I1 positive 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 – 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
8 P 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MW 0.1 / 0.00001
9 Q 2 00 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 Mvar 0.1 / 0.00001
10 I1a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
11 I1a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
12 I1b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
13 I1b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
14 I1c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
15 I1c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
17 I2a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
19 I2b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
21 I2c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
23 I3a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
25 I3b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
27 I3c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
29 I4a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
31 I4b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01

Point Index Transmitted Valuea Scalingb
Default Class
Name
Events
33 I4c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
35 I5a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
37 I5b Angle 2 0 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
39 I5c Angle 2 0 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
40 HV IA Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
41 HV IA Angle 2 0 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
42 HV IB Magnitude 2 -18,000 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
43 HV IB Angle 2 0 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
44 HV IC Magnitude 2 -18,000 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
45 HV IC Angle 2 0 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
46 LV IB Magnitude 2 -18,000 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
47 LV IA Angle 2 0 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
48 LVb Current Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
49 LV IB Angle 2 0 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
50 LV IC Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
51 LV IC Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
52 TV IA Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
53 TV IA Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
54 TV IB Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
55 TV IB Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
56 TV IC Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
57 TV IC Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
58 Ia Operating 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
59 Ib Operating 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
60 Ic Operating 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
61 Ia Restraint 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
62 Ib Restraint 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
63 Ic Restraint 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
64 Frequency 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.001 – 1.0) 0.0 Hz 0.01 / 0.001
65 DC1 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 mA 0.01 /

0.00001
66 DC2 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 mA 0.01 /
0.00001
67 49 HV Current 2 0 200 0.01 / (0.01 – 1.0) 0.0 p.u. 0.01 / 0.01
68 49 LV Current 2 0 200 0.01 / (0.01 – 1.0) 0.0 p.u. 0.01 / 0.01
69 49 TV Current 2 0 200 0.01 / (0.01 – 1.0) 0.0 p.u. 0.01 / 0.01
70 Ambient Temperature 2 -500 400 0.1 / (0.1 – 1.0) 0.0 C 0.1 / 0.1
71 Top Oil Temperature 2 -300 2000 0.1 / (0.1 – 1.0) 0.0 C 0.1 / 0.1
72 Hot Spot Temperature 2 -300 2500 0.1 / (0.1 – 1.0) 0.0 C 0.1 / 0.1
73 Loss of Life 2 0 10000 0.01 (0.01 – 1.0) 0.0 % 0.01 / 0.01
74 51 Pickup Level 2 0 250 0.01 (0.01 – 1.0) 0.0 p.u. 0.01 / 0.01
75 THD 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0.0 % 0.01 / 0.01
76 TOEWS Minutes to trip 2 0 30 1.0 0.0 Minutes 1.0 / 1.0
77 Self Check Fail 2 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0 / 1.0
78 Accumulated IA*IA*t 2 0 65,535 0.001 / (0.001 – 1.0) 0.0 kA*kA*s 0.001 / 0.001
79 Accumulated IB*IB*t. 2 0 65,535 0.001 / (0.001 1.0) kA*kA*s 0.001 / 0.001
80 Accumulated IC*IC*t. 2 0 65,535 0.001 / (0.001 1.0) kA*kA*s 0.001 / 0.001

Default Class
Name
Events
81 Accumulated Through Fault 2 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0 / 1.0

count
82 Active Setting Group 2 1 8 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0
83 S 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 MVA 0.1 / 0.00001
84 PF 2 -1000 1000 0.01 / (0.001- 0.1) 0 NA 0.01 / 0.001
85 Voltage (V0) 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
86 Voltage (V2) 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
87 I1 zero 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
88 I1 negative 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
89 I2 positive 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
101 HV 3I0 Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
102 HV 3I0 Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0 degrees 1.0 / 0.01
103 LV 3I0 Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
104 LV 3I0 Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0 degrees 1.0 / 0.01
105 TV 3I0 Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
106 TV 3I0 Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0 degrees 1.0 / 0.01
107 HV REF IO 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
108 LV REF IO 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
109 TV REF IO 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
110 HV REF IR 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
111 LV REF IR 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
112 TV REF IR 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0 A 1.0 / 0.01
113* HV IA 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
114* HV IB 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
115* HV IC 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
116* LV IA 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
117* LV IB 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
118* LV IC 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
119* TV IA 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
120* TV IB 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
121* TV IC 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Magnitude
122* I1a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01
123* I1b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01

Default Class
Name
Events
124* I1c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01
125* I2a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 0.01 / (0.01- 1.0) 0 % 0.01 / 0.01
152* Pa 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 MW 0.1 / 0.00001
153* Pb 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 MW 0.1 / 0.00001

154* Pc 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 MW 0.1 / 0.00001
155* Qa 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 Mvar 0.1 / 0.00001
156* Qb 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 Mvar 0.1 / 0.00001
157* Qc 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 Mvar 0.1 / 0.00001
158* Sa 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 MVA 0.1 / 0.00001
159* Sb 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 MVA 0.1 / 0.00001
160* Sc 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0 MVA 0.1 / 0.00001
161* PFa 2 -1000 1000 0.01 / (0.001- 0.1) 0 NA 0.01 / 0.001
162* PFb 2 -1000 1000 0.01 / (0.001- 0.1) 0 NA 0.01 / 0.001
163* PFc 2 -1000 1000 0.01 / (0.001- 0.1) 0 NA 0.01 / 0.001

a. The minimum and maximum transmitted values are the lowest and highest values that the outstation will
report in DNP analog input objects. These values are integers if the outstation transmits only integers. If the
outstation is capable of transmitting both integers and floating-point, then integer and floating-point values
are required for the minimums and maximums.
For example, a pressure sensor is able to measure 0 to 500 kPa. The outstation provides a linear conversion
of the sensor's output signal to integers in the range of 0 to 25000 or floating-point values of 0 to 500.000.
The sensor and outstation are used in an application where the maximum possible pressure is 380 kPa. For
this input, the minimum transmitted value would be stated as 0 / 0.0 and the maximum transmitted value
would be stated as 19000 / 380.000.
b. The scaling information for each point specifies how data transmitted in integer variations (16 bit and 32
bit) is converted to engineering units when received by the Master (i.e. scaled according to the equation:
scaled value = multiplier * raw + offset). Scaling is not applied to Floating point variations since they are
already transmitted in engineering units.
c. Resolution is the smallest change that may be detected in the value due to quantization errors and is given
in the units shown in the previous column. This parameter does not represent the accuracy of the measure-
ment.
d. Maximal values are calculated as (2 * Configured Nominal / Multiplier) for voltage channels and as (40 *
Configured Nominal / Multiplier) for current channels (see Note 2 above for the nominal definitions).

2.4 Octet String Points If configurable,

list methods
2.4.1 Event reporting mode *:  Only most recent

 All events
2.4.2 Octet Strings Included  Always

in Class 0 response:  Never
below)
2.4.3 Definition of Octet  Fixed, list shown in table below

String Point List:  Configurable (current list may be shown in table
below)
 Other, explain Used for Event Log access as
described below
* Object 110 and 111 are Octet String Object used to provide access to the
Event Log text of the relay. Object 110 always contains the most recent event
in the relay. Object 111 is the corresponding change event object.
As stated in the DNP specifications, the variation of the response object repre-
sents the length of the string. The string represents the ASCII values of the
event text.

Implementation The following implementation table identifies which object groups and varia-
Table tions, function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and re-
sponses. The Request columns identify all requests that may be sent by a
Master, or all requests that must be parsed by an Outstation. The Response col-
umns identify all responses that must be parsed by a Master, or all responses
that may be sent by an Outstation.
The implementation table must list all functionality required by the device wheth-
er Master or Outstation as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Pro-
cedures. Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is
NOTE
indicated by highlighted rows. Any Object Groups not provided by an outstation
or not processed by a Master are indicated by strikethrough (note these Object
Groups will still be parsed).
DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response

Outstation parses Outstation can issue
Group Var Function Codes Function Codes

Description Qualifier Codes (hex) Qualifier Codes (hex)
Num Num (dec) (dec)
1 0 Binary Input - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input - Packed format 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1 2 Binary Input - With flags 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 1 Binary Input Event - Without time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp)
2 2 Binary Input Event - With absolute 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
time 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp)
2 3 Binary Input Event - With relative 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
10 0 Binary Output - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output - Output Status with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
flag 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Binary Command - Control relay 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) Echo of request
output block (CROB) 4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack)

Request Response
DNP Object Group & Variation

Num Num (dec) (dec)
20 0 Counter - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)

7 (freeze)
8 ( freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
20 1 Counter - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 2 Counter - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 5 Counter - 32-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 6 Counter - 16-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 0 Frozen Counter - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
21 1 Frozen Counter - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 2 Frozen Counter - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 9 Frozen Counter - 32-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 10 Frozen Counter - 16-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 0 Counter Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

22 1 Counter Event - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

130 (unsol. resp)
22 2 Counter Event - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

130 (unsol. resp)
30 0 Analog Input - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 1 Analog Input - 32-bit with flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 2 Analog Input - 16-bit with flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 3 Analog Input - 32-bit without flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 4 Analog Input - 16-bit without flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
32 0 Analog Input Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 1 Analog Input Event - 32-bit without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 2 Analog Input Event - 16-bit without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 3 Analog Input Event - 32-bit with time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 4 Analog Input Event - 16-bit with time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
40 0 Analog Output Status - Any Varia- 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
tion

Request Response
DNP Object Group & Variation

Num Num (dec) (dec)
40 2 Analog Output Status - 16-bit with 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

flag
41 2 Analog Output - 16-bit 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) Echo of request
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack)
50 1 Time and Date - Absolute time 2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1) 129 (response)
51 1 Time and Date CTO - Absolute time, 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
synchronized 130 (unsol. resp) (qty = 1)
51 2 Time and Date CTO - Absolute time, 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
unsynchronized 130 (unsol. resp) (qty = 1)
52 1 Time Delay - Coarse 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)

(qty = 1)
52 2 Time delay - Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)

(qty = 1)
60 1 Class Objects - Class 0 data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
60 2 Class Objects - Class 1 data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
80 1 Internal Indications - Packet format 2 (write) 00 (start-stop) 129 (response)

(index = 7)
110 0 Octet string 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
111 0 Octet string event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart) 129 (response)
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart) 129 (response)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.) 129 (response)

D02705R01.21
Figure G.1: Mechanical Drawing (3U)

T-PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY RELAY FUNCTIONAL
IRIG-B FUNCTIONAL
SERVICE REQUIRED
ALARM
TEST MODE
(119) (150)
100BASE-T USB
Appendix G Mechanical Drawings
Appendix G-1
Appendix G-2
Appendix G Mechanical Drawings
Figure G.2: Mechanical Drawing (4U)

T-PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY
RELAY FUNCTIONAL
IRIG-B FUNCTIONAL
SERVICE REQUIRED
ALARM
TEST MODE
(119) (150)
100BASE-T USB
D02705R01.21
Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings
Figure H.1: Rear Panel (3U)
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix H-1

Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings
Figure H.2: Rear Panel (4U)
Appendix H-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

D02705R01.21
HV side PT's
Power Transformer
(Any Configuration
Of Windings)
HV side CT's LV or TV side CT's
A
HV side
B
Figure I.1: T-PRO AC Schematic

C
N
CT Input #3 CT Input #4 CT Input #5
IA 1 IA 1 IB 1 IB 1 IC 1 IC 1 IA 2 IA 2 IB 2 IB 2 IC 2 IC 2 IA 3 IA 3 IB 3 IB 3 IC 3 IC 3 IA 4 IA 4 IB 4 IB 4 IC 4 IC 4 IA 5 IA 5 IB 5 IB 5 IC 5 IC 5 VA VB VC N
300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333
AC Current Inputs AC Voltages

T-PRO
Appendix I AC Schematic Drawing
Notes:
1. If more than 2 current inputs are required, delta or wye inputs would be connected to CT inputs #3,#4, and #5 as needed
2. Phase and magnitude adjustments are done within the relay. If no more than 2 current inputs are required, inputs 3, 4, and
5 can be connected to other sources for recording purposes
3. Unused current inputs should be shorted together & grounded.
Appendix I-1
D02705R01.21
(+)
40-250VDC,
120VAC
Relay Output Relay Contacts
Inoperative Out1 Out2 Out3 Out4 Out5 Out6 Out7 Out8 Out9 Out10 Out11 Out12 Out13 Out14
200 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 218 220 222 224 226 228
+ 334
NC
201 203 205 207 209 211 213 215 217 219 221 223 225 227 229
Alarm
- 335
Figure J.1: T-PRO DC Schematic

(-)

Temperature Inputs Isolated
(4-20 mA current loop) 30VDC supply External Inputs (90-150 VDC range)
Ambient Top Oil In1 In2 In3 In4 In5 In6 In7 In8 In9
230 232 234 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116
+ + + + + + + + + + + +
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- - - - - - - - - - - -
231 233 235 101 103 105 107 109 111 113 115 117
Appendix J DC Schematic Drawing
Notes:
1. IRIG-B and comm ports shown separately on T-PRO rear panel layout drawing # 371003.
2. All output relays can be programmed to operate on any relay function.
3. All outputs are rated tripping duty, interrupting via breaker aux "a" contact.
Appendix J-1
Appendix K Function Logic Diagram
Diagram in plastic sleeve.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix K-1

Appendix L Current Phase Correction
Table
Current Phase Correction Table
CPC1 (for -30° or +330° Net Winding Connection) CPC2 (for -60° or +300° Net Winding Connection)
+30° (or -330°) Shift +60° (or -300°) Shift

IA = Ia – Ib- Ia – 2Ib + Ic-
--------------- IA = ------------------------------
3 3
0° Reference 0° Reference
Ib – Ic Ia + Ib – 2Ic-
SHIFT +30°
IB = ---------------- IB = ------------------------------
3
SHIFT +60°
3
-30° Net W inding
IC = –-----------------------------------
Connection 2Ia + Ib + Ic-
IC = Ic – Ia-
---------------
-60° Net W inding
Connection 3
3
CPC3 (for -90° or +270° Net Winding Connection) CPC4 (for -120 or +240 Net Winding Connection)
+90° (or -270°) Shift +120° (or -240°) Shift

IA = Ic – Ib- IA = –-----------------------------------
Ia – Ib + 2Ic
---------------
3 3
0° Reference 0° Reference
IB = 2Ia – Ib – Ic-
IB = Ia – Ic- ------------------------------
---------------
SHIFT +90°
3 3
SHIFT +120 °
– Ia + 2Ib – Ic
IC = Ib – Ia- IC = -----------------------------------
-90° Net W inding --------------- -120° Net Winding
Connection 3
Connection 3
+150° (or -210°) Shift +180° (or -180°) Shift

IA = Ic – Ia-
IA = –-----------------------------------
--------------- 2Ia + Ib + Ic-
3 3
0° Reference
-180 ° Net Winding
Ia – 2Ib + Ic
IB = Ia – Ib- Connection 0° Reference
IB = -------------------------------
--------------- 3
SHIFT +150° 3 SHIFT +180°
-150 ° Net W inding
Ia + Ib – 2Ic-
IC = Ib
Connection – Ic- IC = ------------------------------
--------------- 3
3
+210° (or -150°) Shift +240° (or -120°) Shift

IA = Ib – Ia- IA = –-----------------------------------
Ia + 2Ib – Ic
---------------
3 3
-150 ° Net W inding -240° Net W inding
IB = –-----------------------------------
Ia – Ib + 2Ic
IB = Ic
Connection
– Ib- Connection
--------------- 3
0° Reference 3
IC = 2Ia – Ib – Ic-
IC = Ia – Ic- ------------------------------
--------------- 0° Reference
3
SHIFT +150° 3
SHIFT +240°
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L-1

Appendix L Current Phase Correction Table
+270° (or -90°) Shift +300° (or -60°) Shift

IA = Ib – Ic- Ia + Ib – 2Ic-
--------------- IA = ------------------------------
3 3
IB = –-----------------------------------
-300° Net W inding
2Ia + Ib + Ic-
IB = Ic
-270° Net W inding
– Ia-
Connection
--------------- Connection
3
3
IC = Ia
Ia – Ib – 2Ib + Ic-
IC = ---------------- ------------------------------
0° Reference 0° Reference 3
3
SHIFT +270° SHIFT +300°
CPC11 (for -330° or +30° Net Winding Connection) CPC12 (for 0° or 360° Net Winding Connection)
+330° (or -30°) Shift 0° (or -360°) Shift

IA = Ia – Ic- IA = 2Ia – Ib – Ic-
--------------- ------------------------------
3 3
IB = –-----------------------------------
-330° Net W inding
Ia + 2Ib – Ic
IB = Ib – Ia-
Connection
--------------- 0° Reference
3
3 0° Net Winding
IC = –-----------------------------------
Connection
Ia – Ib + 2Ic
IC = Ic – Ib- SHIFT +360 °
0° Reference
--------------- 3
3
SHIFT +330°
Appendix L-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid
Insulation
The loss of life calculation equation is based on IEEE Standard C57.91-1995.
The per unit rate of loss of life is called the aging acceleration factor (FAA), giv-
en by
15000 - – --------------------
15000 -
-----------------------
110 + 273  H + 273
F AA = e
per unit. [Eq. (2) of C57.91-1995]
where H is the hot spot temperature in degrees celsius.
For example, if H = 110°C, then FAA = 1;
if H =117°C, then FAA = 2.
The definition of “normal lifetime” for a transformer was 65,000 hours (7.42
years) in C57.115-1991. In C57.91-1995 options were given including 65,000
hours, but suggesting that 180,000 (20.55 years) hours was more reasonable.
This is really a judgment call. Since the 65,000 hour (7.42 years) figure appears
in both versions of the Standard, it was decided to use 7.42 years in the T-PRO
software, until a more definitive statement appears.
The above equation is the same, regardless of which “end of life” value is cho-
sen.
For example, if FAA is on average equal to 0.2 (not unusual) over a period of
20 years, then the loss of life over that period would be (0.2 x 20 years)/(7.42
years) = 54%.
The equation in the previous standard (C57.115-1991) is written differently,
but is identical mathematically.
C57.91-1995 is under review, as of November 2001. A new version may be is-
sued in the year 2002.
Adaptive There are two basic ideas here, based on ANSI/IEEE Standards C57.92-1981
Overcurrent and C57.115-1991, for Mineral Oil Immersed Power Transformers:
Relay Pickup 1 When the ambient temperature is low, a transformer can carry more load,
Level Feature when high, less load.
2 It is OK to exceed the transformer rated (hot spot) winding temperature, for
a limited time.
The T-PRO Relay implements these ideas as follows:
When Ambient Temperature Adaptation is selected, the pickup level of the
overcurrent protection follows the Allowed Loading curves below, which are
calculated in accordance with the Standards. An ambient temperature probe
feeds information into the back of the relay. Five different cooling types are ac-
commodated, in accordance with the Standard.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix M-1

Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Insulation
Example 1
Suppose the transformer is 65°C rise, cooling is type 5: Forced Air Cooled
(ONAN/ONAF/ONAF) and a “relative rate of loss of life” of “1” has been se-
lected. Then the overload characteristic pickup will automatically be one per
unit when the Ambient Temperature is 30°C, because that is the design condi-
tion for the transformer.
As the ambient temperature deviates from 30°C, the relay pickup will track the
lower curve in the diagram, so that for example at -30°C, the overcurrent relay
pickup is automatically changed to 1.4 per unit. Conversely, the transformer is
automatically de-rated to about 0.93 per unit, if the ambient temperature goes
to 40°C.
Allowed Loading: 65 degC rise Transformer, Type 5 cooling

2
1.8
1.6
1.4
Allowed Loading per unit
1.2
0.8 Relative rate of loss of life =

64 (top curve)
32
0.6 16
8
0.4 4
2
1 (bottom curve
0.2
0
-40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Ambient Temp. deg C
Figure M.1: Allowed Loading: 65°C Rise Transformer, Type 5 Cooling
If a “relative rate of loss of life” of “1” is chosen, and a loading just below pick-
up were to persist for 24 hours, “normal” i.e. design loss of life would occur.
However, loading is seldom this constant.
Thus it can be seen that higher rates of loss of life might be reasonably accepted
(2, 4, 8, 16, 32). Under such conditions, the continued “trend logging” of inter-
nal temperatures and accumulated loss of life become valuable features of the
T-PRO Relay.
Appendix M-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Example 2
Refer to the same curve in “Example 1” in Appendix M. Suppose for the same
transformer a “relative rate of loss of life” of “8” has been selected. First, note
that this corresponds to a steady-state hot spot temperature of 130°C (see Table
“65°C Rise Transformer” in Appendix M on page Appendix M-6), not a dan-
gerous level. Suppose also that the ambient temperature is 35°C. From the
curves, the Allowed Loading is 1.1 per unit. In other words, the inverse-time
overcurrent relay pickup will adapt to 1.1 per unit. [At an ambient of -25°C, a
48% overload trip level would pertain.]
What does this mean? The meaning is that at just under this trip level, the trans-
former insulation is deteriorating at just under 8 times the normal rate. This is
not a problem unless the situation is never ‘balanced’ by lower operating lev-
els, as is usually the case.
Another way of looking at this is that the adaptive feature, with settings of rate
of loss of life greater than normal, allows temporary overloads.
Note that the shape of the inverse-time curve above 2 per unit current is not af-
fected, as shown in for details see Figure M.2: Adaptive Pickup Characteristic
on page M-3.
Overload Fault
Region Region
0.7 1.0 1.5 2.15 Current per unit
Hot day Cold day
Figure M.2: Adaptive Pickup Characteristic
The “Trend Logging” feature of the T-PRO relay allows you to keep track of
the accumulated loss of life to ensure that overloads are not causing a long term
problem.

Overloading
Curves for 65°C
Rise Allowed Loading: 65 degC rise Transformer, Type 1 cooling
Transformers 2
1.8
1.6
1.4

1.2

64 (top curve)
32
0.6 16
8
0.4 4
2
1 (bottom curve
0.2
0
-40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Ambient Temp. deg C

2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2

64 (top curve)
32
0.6 16
8
0.4 4
2
1 (bottom curve
0.2
0
-40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Ambient Temp. deg C


2
1.8
1.6
1.4

1.2

64 (top curve)
32
0.6 16
8
0.4 4
2
0.2 1 (bottom curve
0
-40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Ambient Temp. deg C

2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2

64 (top curve)
32
0.6 16
8
0.4 4
2
1 (bottom curve
0.2
0
-40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Ambient Temp. deg C


2
1.8
1.6
1.4

1.2

64 (top curve)
32
0.6 16
8
0.4 4
2
1 (bottom curve
0.2
0
-40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Ambient Temp. deg C
The above curves are for 65°C rise transformers. Curves for 55°C rise trans-
formers can be supplied on request.
Each “Relative rate of loss of life” curve is related directly to a specific hot spot
temperature as follows:
65°C Rise Transformer
Relative Rate of Loss of Life 1 2 4 8 16 32
Hot Spot Temperature °C 110 116 123 130 137 145
55°C Rise Transformer
Relative Rate of Loss of Life 1 2 4 8 16 32
Hot Spot Temperature °C 95 101 107 113 120 127

Appendix N Top Oil and Hot Spot
Temperature Calculation
The parameters used in calculating the Top Oil and Hot Spot (Winding) tem-
peratures as functions of the ambient temperature and the load current, are as
shown below [Based on IEEE/ANSI Standards C57.115-1991 and C57.92-
1981].
Parameters for 65°C Rise Transformers
Cooling Type OA or OW FA 133% or less FA more than Non-directed Directed ODAF or

(Type 1)* (Type 2) 133% (Type 4) ODAF or ODWF ODWF (Type 3)
(Type 5)
H,R °C 25 30 35 35 35
TO,R °C 55 50 45 45 45
TO hours 3.0 2.0 1.25 1.25 1.25
W hours 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
R 3.2 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
m 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0
n 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0
Parameters for 55°C Rise Transformers
Cooling Type OA or OW FA 133% or less FA more than Non-directed Directed ODAF or

133% ODAF or ODWF ODWF
H,R °C 20 25 28 28 28
TO,R °C 45 40 37 37 37
TO hours 3.0 2.0 1.25 1.25 1.25
W hours 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
R 3.0 3.5 5.0 5.0 5.0
m 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0
n 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N-1

Appendix N Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation
The meanings of the symbols, and the equations used are as follows:
H,R rated hot spot rise over top oil in °C
TO,R rated top oil rise over ambient in °C
TO top oil rise time constant in hours
W hot spot (winding) rise time constant in hours
R ratio of full load (rated) copper loss to rated iron loss, dimension-
less
m exponent relating load level to hot spot rise, dimensionless
n exponent relating load level to top oil rise, dimensionless
The newest version of this Standard, at the time of writing (1998), is C57.91-
1995. The only numerical difference in the new table is for Non-Directed
OFAF or OFWF cooling: n = 0.9 (rather than 1.0).
Also, in the new standard, it is recommended that all parameters in the table
except m and n should be found “from test.” Of course, this is not usually pos-
sible, especially if the transformer is already in service.
The temperature calculation equations are most concisely described in block
diagram form, for details see Figure N.1: Block Diagram of Top Oil and Hot
Spot Temperature Calculation Method (Inputs: per unit load and Ambient
Temperature.) and Figure N.2: Block Diagram of Top Oil and Hot Spot Tem-
perature Calculation Method (Inputs: per unit load and Top Oil Temperature.).
The two situations are
1 Top Oil temperature not sensed. For this case, the Top Oil temperature is
calculated as a rise above the Ambient temperature, and the Hot Spot tem-
perature as a rise above Top Oil temperature.
2 Top Oil temperature is sensed (an electrical analog input to the relay). For
this case, the Hot Spot temperature is calculated as a rise above the measured
Top Oil temperature.
Those parameters not already defined for the equations are as follows:
H,U ultimate hot spot rise over top oil, in °C
H time-varying hot spot rise over top oil, in °C
TO,U ultimate top oil rise over ambient, in °C
TO time-varying top oil rise over ambient, in °C
A ambient temperature, in °C
Appendix N-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Appendix N Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation
Steady-state Function Time Dependance

Per Unit Load
(measured) 2m ΔθH, U 1 ΔθH Hot Spot Rise
ΔθH, R K
1+ τw s
K
Hot Spot
Steady-state Function Time Dependance Temperature
2 n (calculated)
K R 1 ΔθTO, U 1 ΔθTO θ TO
ΔθTO, R R+1 1 + τTO s θH
Top Top
Oil Oil
Rise Temp.
Time Dependance
Ambient Temperature (measured) 1 θ OA
1 + τTO s Effect of Ambient Temperature
Figure N.1: Block Diagram of Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation Method
Inputs: per unit load and Ambient Temperature.
Steady-state Function Time Dependance

Per Unit Load
(measured) 2m ΔθH, U 1 ΔθH Hot Spot Rise
ΔθH, R K
K 1+ τw s
Hot Spot
Temperature
Top Oil Temperature (measured) (calculated)
θH
θ TO
Figure N.2: Block Diagram of Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation Method
Inputs: per unit load and Top Oil Temperature.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N-3

Appendix O Temperature Probe
Connections
Example 1
Using one top oil probe and one ambient temperature probe with one T-PRO
A, both powered from the T-PRO A.
T-PRO A (Back view)

Ambient Top Oil 30 VDC @
40 mA
+ - + - + -
230 231 232 233 234 235
- + - +
Gray Orange
(T) (T)
Ambient Top Oil
Temperature Temperature
Probe Probe
Figure O.1: T-PRO A (Back view)
Example 2
Using two top oil probes powered by two T-PRO relays (B and C) and one am-
bient temperature probe powered by T-PRO C.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix O-1

Appendix O Temperature Probe Connections
T-PRO B (Back view) T-PRO C (Back view)

Ambient Top Oil 30 VDC @ Ambient Top Oil 30 VDC @
40 mA 40 mA
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
230 231 232 233 234 235 230 231 232 233 234 235
- + - + - +
Gray Orange
(T) (T) (T)

Top Oil Ambient Top Oil
Temperature Temperature Temperature
Probe #2 Probe Probe #1
Figure O.2: T-PRO B (Back view) and T-PRO C (Back view)
Appendix O-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Appendix P Failure Modes
Relay
User
Inputs DSP MPC
Laptop or Remote
Digital Signal Micro-
Connection
Processor Processor
Outputs
Watchdog Watchdog
A B C D E
DSP DSP DSP.MPC MPC MPC
System Self- Comm Self- System
Fail check Fail check Fail
Fail Fail
P.1 Actions
A - DSP System Failure
The Relay Functional LED changes from green to off. The Master Relay is de-
energized. Two of its contacts open, disconnecting power to the other auxiliary
relays. A separate contact labeled “Relay Inoperative” on the rear panel closes
to activate a remote alarm.
The watch-dog repeatedly attempts to re-start the DSP for diagnostic purposes.
The Relay Functional LED stays off and the relays remain de-energized, even
for a successful re-start. Only a power-down/power-up cycle will reset the
LED to green and re-energize the relays.
B – DSP Self-Check Fail

The Self Check Fail output can be assigned and used in ProLogic statements
and the Output Matrix.
There are two possibilities for DSP Self Check Fail, either Alarm or Block.
Both are related to the dc offset on a channel which should not occur with prop-
er calibration. Alarm just drives the optional output contact but Block causes
the Relay Functional LED to go out and the relay to be unable to drive any out-
put contact (as in the first and last paragraphs of section A - DSP System Fail-
ure above).
C – DSP- Micro Processor (MPC) Comm Failure
D - MPC Self-Check Fail

The Service Required LED changes from off to red.
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix P-1

Appendix P Failure Modes
E – MPC System Fail

The Test Mode LED changes from off to red until the MPC has rebooted. The
watchdog will continue to attempt to re-start the MPC several times. If the
MPC reboots but can not return to normal operation, the Service Required
LED changes from off to red.
Appendix P-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
(PICS)
Introduction This specification is the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
(PICS) and presents the ACSI conformance statements as defined in Annex A
of Part 7-2 of the IEC 61850 standard specifications.
ACSI basic conformance statement

The basic conformance statement shall be as defined in Table Q.1: Basic Con-
formance Statement.
Table Q.1: Basic Conformance Statement
Server/
Remarks
Publisher
Client -Server Roles
B11 Server Side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION- c1 YES

ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client Side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-ASSO- NO

CIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM:IEC 61850-8-1 used YES
B22 SCSM:IEC 61850-9-1 used NO
B23 SCSM:IEC 61850-9-2 used NO
B24 SCSM: other NO
Generic Substation event Model(GSE)
B31 Publisher side O YES
B32 Subscriber Side YES
Transmission of Sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side O NO
B42 Subscriber side - NO
c1 - Shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared

O - Optional
M - Mandatory
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q-1

ACSI models conformance statement

The ASCI models conformance statement shall be as defined in Table
Q.2: ACSI models Conformance Statement.
Table Q.2: ACSI models Conformance Statement

Server/
Remarks
Publisher
If Server side (B11) supported
M1 Logical Device c2 YES
M2 Logical Node c3 YES
M3 Data c4 YES
M4 Data Set c5 YES
M5 Substitution O YES
M6 Setting group control O YES
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O YES
M7-1 Sequence – number YES
M7-2 Report-time-stamp YES
M7-3 Reason-for-inclusion YES
M7-4 Data-set-name YES
M7-5 Data-reference YES
M7-6 Buffer-overflow YES
M7-7 Entry id YES
M7-8 Buf Tm YES
M7-9 IntgPd YES
M7-10 GI YES
M8 Unbuffered report control O YES
M8-1 Sequence – number YES
M8-2 Report-time-stamp YES
M8-3 Reason-for-inclusion YES
M8-4 Data-set-name YES
M8-5 Data-reference YES
M8-6 IntgPd YES
M8-7 GI YES
M9 Log control O NO
Appendix Q-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

M9-1 IntgPd NO
M10 Log O NO
M11 Control M YES
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE O YES
M12-1 EntryID
M12-2 DataReflnc
M13 GSSE O NO
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O NO
M15 Unicast SVC O NO
M16 Time M YES
M17 File Transfer O YES
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared

c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has
been declared
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report , GSE, or SV model has been declared
M - Mandatory
ACSI service conformance statement

The ASCI service conformance statement shall be as defined in Table Q.3:
ACSI service Conformance Statement.
Table Q.3: ACSI service Conformance Statement
Services AA: Server/ Remarks

TP/MC Publisher
Server (Clause 6)
S1 ServerDirectory TP M YES

Table Q.4: Application association (Clause 7)
S2 Associate M YES
S3 Abort M YES
S4 Release M YES
Table Q.5: Logical device (Clause 8)
S5 Logical Device Directory TP M YES
Table Q.6: Logical Node (Clause 9)
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory TP M YES
S7 GetAllDataValues TP M YES
Table Q.7: Data (Clause 10)
S8 GetDataValues TP M YES
S9 SetDataValues TP O NO
S10 GetDataDirectory TP M YES
S11 GetDataDefinition TP M YES

Table Q.8: Data Set(Clause 11)
S12 GetDataSetValues TP M YES
S13 SetDataSetValues TP O NO
S14 CreateDataSet TP O NO
S15 DeleteDataSet TP O NO
S16 GetDataSetDirectory TP O YES
Table Q.9: Substitution (Clause 12)
S17 SetDataValues TP M YES
Table Q.10: Setting group control (Clause 13)
S18 SelectActive SG TP O YES
S19 SelectEdit SG TP O NO
S20 SetSGvalues TP O NO
S21 ConfirmEditSGvalues TP O NO
S22 GetSGvalues TP O YES
S23 GetSGCBvalues TP O YES

Table Q.11: Reporting (Clause 14)
Buffered report control block(BRCB)
S24 Report TP c6 YES
S24-1 Data-change( dchg ) YES
S24-2 qchg-change(qchg) NO
S24-3 Data-update( dupd ) NO
S25 GetBRCBValues TP c6 YES
S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 YES
Unbuffered report control block(URCB)
S27 Report TP c6 YES
S27-1 Data-change( dchg ) YES
S27-2 qchg-change(qchg) NO
S27-3 Data-update( dupd ) NO
S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 YES
S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 YES
c6 – shall declare support for at least one(BRCB or URCB)
Table Q.12: Logging(clause 14)
Log Control block
S30 GetLCBValues TP M NO
S31 SetLCBValues TP M NO
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime TP M NO
S33 QueryLogAfter TP M NO
S34 GetLogStatusValues TP M NO
c7- shall declare support for at least one(query log by time or Query LogAfter )

Table Q.13: Generic Substation event model(GSE) (14.3.5.3.4)
GOOSE – CONTROL - BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage MC c8 YES
S36 GetGOReference TP c9
S37 GetGOOSEElementNum- TP c9
ber
S38 GetGoCBValues TP O YES
S39 SetGoCBValues TP O NO
GSSE – CONTROL - BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage MC C8 NO
S41 GetGsReference TP C9 NO
S42 GetGSSEElementNumber TP C9 NO
S43 GetGsCBValues TP O NO
S44 SetGsCBValues TP O NO
c8- shall declare support for at least one(Send GOOSE Message or Send GSSE Message)
c9- shall declare support if TP association is available
Table Q.14: Transmission of sampled value model(SVC) (Clause 16)
Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage MC C10 NO
S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O NO
S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O NO
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage TP C10 NO
S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O NO
S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O NO
C10- shall declare support for at least one(Send MSV Message or Send USV Message )

Table Q.15: control ( 17.5.1)
S51 Select TP O NO
S52 Select with value TP O NO
S53 Cancel TP O NO
S54 Operate TP M YES
S55 Command-Termination TP O NO
S56 Time Activated-Operate TP O NO
Table Q.16: File Transfer (Clause 20)
S57 GetFile TP M YES
S58 SetFile TP O NO
S59 DeleteFile TP O YES
S60 GetFileAttributeValues TP M YES
Table Q.17: Time(5.5)
T1 Time resolution of Internal clock 10 msec Nearest negative power of 2 in

seconds
T2 TimeAccuracy of Internal clock 10 msec T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T3 Supported Time Stamp resolution 10 msec Nearest value of 2**-n in seconds

according to 5.5.3.7.3.3 (n corre-
sponds to 7).

Data Mapping Specifications

T-PRO Logical T-PRO logical device identifications
Device T-PRO 4000 has the following IEC 61850 logical devices defined in its ICD
file:
• Measurements
• Protection
• Records
• System
• VirtualInputs
• FaultData
T-PRO logical nodes

Table Q.18: T-PRO Logical Devices defines the list of logical nodes (LN) for
the T-PRO logical devices.
Note:
System logical nodes (group L) are not shown here
Table Q.18: T-PRO Logical Devices
Protection
LD Name LN Name LN Description Comments
Function
Measurements HBFGGIO1 Measurement I1 2nd and 5th harmonic

metering data

metering data

metering data

metering data

metering data
Measurements IMMXU1 Measurement I1 3 phase metering data

Measurements PwrVolMMXU6 Measurement voltage 3 phase metering

data
Active power metering data
Reactive power metering data
Apparent power metering

data
Power factor metering data
Total Active Power metering
data
Total Reactive Power meter-
ing data
Total Apparent Power meter-
ing data
Average Power factor meter-
ing data
Frequency metering data
Measurements IMSQI1 Measurement I1 sequence metering data
Measurements VoltMSQI6 Measurement voltage sequence metering

data
Protection D24DEFPVPH1 Volts per Hz D24DEF-1 24DEF-1 Trip
Protection D24DEFPVPH2 Volts per Hz D24DEF-2 24DEF-2 Trip
Protection D24InvPVPH3 Volts per Hz D24INV 24INV Alarm and Trip
Protection D27_1PTUV1 Undervoltage D27-1 27-1 Trip
Protection D27_2PTUV2 Undervoltage D27-2 27-2 Trip
Protection D49PTTR1 Thermal overload D49-1 49-1 Operates
Protection D49PTTR12 Thermal overload D49-12 49- 12Operates
Protection D50BFRBRF1 Breaker failure Input 1 Input 1 50BF-1 Trip

D50BF-1


D50BF-2

D50BF-1

D50BF-2

D50BF-1

D50BF-2

D50BF-1

D50BF-2

D50BF-1

D50BF-2
Protection CBFIHRBRF11 Breaker failure BFI HV Breaker Failure Initiation HV
Protection CBFILRBRF12 Breaker failure BFI LV Breaker Failure Initiation LV
Protection CBFITRBRF13 Breaker failure BFI TV Breaker Failure Initiation TV
Protection D50HVPIOC1 Instantaneous over- D50-HV 50-HV Trip

current
Protection D50LVPIOC2 Instantaneous over- D50-LV 50-LV Trip

current
Protection D50TVPIOC3 Instantaneous over- D50-TV 50-TV Trip

current
Protection D50NHVPIOC4 Instantaneous over- D50N-HV 50N-HV Alarm and Trip

current
Protection D50NLVPIOC5 Instantaneous over- D50N-LV 50N-LV Alarm and Trip

current
Protection D50NTVPIOC6 Instantaneous over- D50N-TV 50N-TV Alarm and Trip

current
Protection D51HVPTOC1 Time overcurrent D51-HV 51-HV Trip

Protection D51LVPTOC2 Time overcurrent D51-LV 51-LV Trip
Protection D51TVPTOC3 Time overcurrent D51-TV 51-TV Trip
Protection D51NHVPTOC4 Time overcurrent D51N-HV 51N-HV Alarm and Trip
Protection D51NLVPTOC5 Time overcurrent D51N-LV 51N-LV Alarm and Trip
Protection D51NTVPTOC6 Time overcurrent D51N-TV 51N-TV Alarm and Trip
Protection D67PTOC7 Time overcurrent D67 67 Alarm and Trip
Protection D67NPTOC8 Time overcurrent D67N 67N Alarm and Trip
Protection D59NPTOV1 Overvoltage D59N 59N Alarm and Trip

Protection D59_1PTOV2 Overvoltage D59-1 59-1 Trip
Protection D59_2PTOV3 Overvoltage D59-2 59-2 Trip
Protection D81PFRC1 Rate of change of D81ROC -1 81 ROC-1 Trip

frequency
Protection D81PFRC2 Rate of change of D81ROC -2 81 ROC -2 Trip

frequency

frequency

frequency
Protection D81PTOF1 Overfrequency D81 O/F -1 81 O/F-1 Trip
Protection D81PTUF1 Underfrequency D81 U/F -1 81 U/F-1 Trip
Protection D87TPDIF1 Differential D87T 87 Trip

Protection D87NHVPDIF2 Differential D87N-HV 87N-HV Trip
Protection D87NLVPDIF3 Differential D87N-LV 87N-LV Trip
Protection D87NTVPDIF4 Differential D87N-TV 87N-TV Trip
Protection PTFuseGGIO1 Generic process I/O PT Fuse Failure operation
System EIGGIO1 Generic process I/O External Inputs 1 to 20
System OCGGIO2 Generic process I/O Output Contacts 1 to 21
System PLGGIO3 Generic process I/O ProLogic functions 1 to 24
System XFMRGGIO4 Generic process I/O TOEWS Alarms and Trip

THD Alarm
Ambient, Top Oil Alarms
Through Fault Alarm
System SGGGIO5 Generic process I/O Active setting group
System VIGGIO6 Generic process I/O Virtual Inputs 1 to 30
System LEDGGIO7 Generic process I/O Target LED 1 to 11

Alarm LED
Service required LED
System SChAlmGGIO8 Generic process I/O Self Check Fail Alarm
System TSAlmGGIO9 Generic process I/O Time Synchronization Alarm
VirtualInputs SUBSCRGGIO1 Generic process I/O External GOOSE Virtual

Inputs

FaultData D24DEFMMXU1 Measurement D24DEF-1 24DEF-1 fault frequency
FaultData D24DEFMMXU2 Measurement D24DEF-2 24DEF-2 fault frequency
FaultData D24InvMMXU3 Measurement D24INV 24INV fault frequency
FaultData D50NHVMMXU4 Measurement D50N-HV 50N-HV fault currents
FaultData D51NHVMMXU5 Measurement D51N-HV 51N-HV fault currents
FaultData D50NLVMMXU6 Measurement D50N-LV 50N-LV fault currents
FaultData D51NLVMMXU7 Measurement D51N-LV 51N-LV fault currents
FaultData D50NTVMMXU8 Measurement D50N-TV 50N-TV fault currents
FaultData D51NTVMMXU9 Measurement D51N-TV 51N-TV fault currents
FaultData D50HVMMXU10 Measurement D50-HV 50-HV fault currents
FaultData D51HVMMXU11 Measurement D51-HV 51-HV fault currents
FaultData D50LVMMXU12 Measurement D50-LV 50-LV fault currents
FaultData D51LVMMXU13 Measurement D51-LV 51-LV fault currents
FaultData D50TVMMXU14 Measurement D50-TV 50-TV fault currents
FaultData D51TVMMXU15 Measurement D51-TV 51-TV fault currents
FaultData D59_1MMXU16 Measurement D59-1 59-1 fault voltages
FaultData D67MMXU20 Measurement D67 67 fault voltages and currents
FaultData D87MMXU21 Measurement D87 87 operating and restraint

fault currents
FaultData D67NMMXU22 Measurement D67N 67N fault voltages and cur-

rents
FaultData D24DEFMSQI1 Sequence and D24DEF-1 24DEF-1 fault sequence volt-

imbalance ages
FaultData D24DEFMSQI2 Sequence and D24DEF-2 24DEF-1 fault sequence volt-

imbalance ages
FaultData D24InvMSQI3 Sequence and D24INV 24INV fault sequence volt-

imbalance ages
FaultData D87NHVMMXN1 Non-phase-related D87N-HV 87N-HV operating and

measurement restraint fault currents
FaultData D87NLVMMXN2 Non-phase-related D87N-LV 87N-LV operating and

FaultData D87NTVMMXN3 Non-phase-related D87N-TV 87N-TV operating and


Logical node specifications

The following sections provide detailed information on the logical nodes of the
T-PRO logical devices as defined in the previous section.
Note:
Common Logical Node information is not shown in the following sections.
Only the data that are provided from the T-PRO application to the IEC 61850
sub-system are described.
HBFGGIO1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node HBFGGIO1 of the
logical device Measurements.
Data Name Description
HBFGGIO1$MX$AnIn1$mag$f I1 phase A 2nd harmonic magnitude
HBFGGIO1$MX$AnIn2$mag$f I1 phase B 2nd harmonic magnitude
HBFGGIO1$MX$AnIn3$mag$f I1 phase C 2nd harmonic magnitude
HBFGGIO1$MX$AnIn4$mag$f I1 phase A 5th harmonic magnitude
HBFGGIO1$MX$AnIn5$mag$f I1 phase B 5th harmonic magnitude
HBFGGIO1$MX$AnIn6$mag$f I1 phase C 5th harmonic magnitude
HBFGGIO2

HBFGGIO3
HBFGGIO4

HBFGGIO5
IMMXU1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMMXU1 of the log-
ical device Measurements.
IMMXU1$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f I1 phase A magnitude
IMMXU1$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f I1 phase A angle
IMMXU1$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f I1 phase B magnitude
IMMXU1$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f I1 phase B angle
IMMXU1$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f I1 phase C magnitude
IMMXU1$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f I1 phase C angle

IMMXU2
IMMXU3

IMMXU4
IMMXU5

IMSQI1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMSQI1 of the log-
IMSQI1$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$mag$f I1 positive sequence current
IMSQI1$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$mag$f I1 negative sequence current
IMSQI1$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$mag$f I1 zero sequence current
IMSQI2
IMSQI3

IMSQI4
IMSQI5
VoltQI6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node VoltMSQI6of the
VoltMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f positive sequence voltage
VoltMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c2$cVal$mag$f negative sequence voltage
VoltMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$mag$f zero sequence voltage

PwrVolMMXU6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node PwrVolMMXU6 of
the logical device Measurements.
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f Voltage phase A magnitude
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f Voltage phase A angle
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f Voltage phase B magnitude
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f Voltage phase B angle
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f Voltage phase C magnitude
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f Voltage phase C angle
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$W$phsA$cVal$mag$f Phase A active power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$W$phsB$cVal$mag$f Phase B active power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$W$phsC$cVal$mag$f Phase C active power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$VAr$phsA$cVal$mag$f Phase A reactive power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$VAr$phsB$cVal$mag$f Phase B reactive power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$VAr$phsC$cVal$mag$f Phase C reactive power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$VA$phsA$cVal$mag$f Phase A apparent power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$VA$phsB$cVal$mag$f Phase B apparent power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$VA$phsC$cVal$mag$f Phase C apparent power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PF$phsA$cVal$mag$f Phase A power factor
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PF$phsB$cVal$mag$f Phase B power factor
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$PF$phsC$cVal$mag$f Phase C power factor
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$TotW$mag$f Total active power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$TotVAr$mag$f Total reactive power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$TotVA$mag$f Total apparent power
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$TotPF$mag$f Average power factor
PwrVolMMXU6$MX$Hz$mag$f Frequency

D24DEFPVPH1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFPVPH1of
the logical device Protection.
D24DEFPVPH1$ST$Str$general 24DEF-1 Trip
D24DEFPVPH1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 24DEF-1 Direction (set to “unknown”)
D24DEFPVPH1$ST$Op$general 24DEF-1 Trip
D24DEFPVPH2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFPVPH2of
D24DEFPVPH2$ST$Str$general 24DEF-2 Trip
D24DEFPVPH2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 24DEF-2 Direction (set to “unknown”)
D24DEFPVPH2$ST$Op$general 24DEF-2 Trip
D24InvPVPH3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24InvVPH3of the
logical device Protection.
D24InvPVPH3$ST$Str$general 24INV Alarm
D24InvPVPH3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 24INV Direction (set to “unknown”)
D24InvPVPH3$ST$Op$general 24INV Trip

D27_1PTUV1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27_1PTUV1of the
D27_1PTUV1$ST$Str$general 27-1 Trip
D27_1PTUV1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 27-1 Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27_1PTUV1$ST$Op$general 27-1 Trip
D27_1PTUV1$ST$Op$phsA 27-1 Trip phase A
D27_1PTUV1$ST$Op$phsB 27-1 Trip phase B
D27_1PTUV1$ST$Op$phsC 27-1 Trip phase C
D27_2PTUV2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27_2PTUV2of the
D27_2PTUV2$ST$Str$general 27-2 Trip
D27_2PTUV2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 27-2 Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27_2PTUV2$ST$Op$general 27-2 Trip
D27_2PTUV2$ST$Op$phsA 27-2 Trip phase A
D27_2PTUV2$ST$Op$phsB 27-2 Trip phase B
D27_2PTUV2$ST$Op$phsC 27-2 Trip phase C
D49PTTR1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR1of the
D49PTTR1$ST$Op$general 49-1 Operates

D49PTTR2
D49PTTR3
D49PTTR4
D49PTTR5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR5 of the

D49PTTR6
D49PTTR7
D49PTTR8
D49PTTR9

D49PTTR10
D49PTTR11
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR11 of the
D49PTTR12
D50BFRBRF1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50BFRBRF1of the
D50BFRBRF1$ST$OpEx$general 50BF Input 1 Trip 1

D50BFRBRF2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50BFRBRF2 of
D50BFRBRF3
D50BFRBRF4
D50BFRBRF5

D50BFRBRF6
D50BFRBRF7
D50BFRBRF8
D50BFRBRF9

D50BFRBRF10
CBFIHRBRF11
This section defines logical node data for the logical node CBFIHRBRF11of
CBFIHRBRF11$ST$OpEx$general Breaker Failure Initiation HV
CBFIHRBRF12
This section defines logical node data for the logical node CBFILRBRF12 of
CBFILRBRF12$ST$OpEx$general Breaker Failure Initiation LV
CBIFITRBRF13
This section defines logical node data for the logical node CBFITRBRF13 of
CBFITRBRF13$ST$OpEx$general Breaker Failure Initiation TV

D50HVPIOC1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50HVPIOC1of the
D50HVPIOC1$ST$Op$general 50-HV Trip
D50LVPIOC2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50LVPIOC2 of the
D50LVPIOC2$ST$Op$general 50-LV Trip
D50TVPIOC3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50TVPIOC3 of the
D50TVPIOC3$ST$Op$general 50-TV Trip
D50NHVPIOC4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NHVPIOC4of
D50NHVPIOC4$ST$Op$general 50N-HV Trip

D50NLVPIOC5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NLVPIOC5of
D50NLVPIOC5$ST$Op$general 50N-LV Trip
D50NTVPIOC6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NTVPIOC6of
D50NTVPIOC6$ST$Op$general 50N-TV Trip
D51HVPTOC1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51HVPTOC1of
D51HVPTOC1$ST$Str$general 51-HV Alarm
D51HVPTOC1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51-HV Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51HVPTOC1$ST$Op$general 51-HV Trip
D51LVPTOC2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51LVPTOC2 of
D51LVPTOC2$ST$Str$general 51-LV Alarm
D51LVPTOC2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51-LV Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51LVPTOC2$ST$Op$general 51-LV Trip

D51TVPTOC3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51TVPTOC3 of
D51TVPTOC3$ST$Str$general 51-TV Alarm
D51TVPTOC3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51-TV Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51TVPTOC3$ST$Op$general 51-TV Trip
D51NHVPTOC4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NHVPTOC4of
D51NHVPTOC4$ST$Str$general 51N-HV Alarm
D51NHVPTOC4$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51N-HV Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51NHVPTOC4$ST$Op$general 51N-HV Trip
D51NLVPTOC5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NLVPTOC5of
D51NLVPTOC5$ST$Str$general 51N-LV Alarm
D51NLVPTOC5$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51N-LV Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51NLVPTOC5$ST$Op$general 51N-LV Trip

D51NTVPTOC6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NTVPTOC6of
D51NTVPTOC6$ST$Str$general 51N-TV Alarm
D51NTVPTOC6$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51N-TV Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51NTVPTOC6$ST$Op$general 51N-TV Trip
D67PTOC7
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D67PTOC7of the
D67PTOC7$ST$Str$general 67 Alarm
D67PTOC7$ST$Str$dirGeneral 67 Direction
D67PTOC7$ST$Op$general 67 Trip
D67NPTOC8
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D67NPTOC8of the
D67NPTOC8$ST$Str$general 67N Alarm
D67NPTOC8$ST$Str$dirGeneral 67N Direction
D67NPTOC8$ST$Op$general 67N Trip

D59NPTOV1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59NPTOV1of the
D59NPTOV1$ST$Str$general 59N Alarm
D59NPTOV1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59N Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59NPTOV1$ST$Op$general 59N Trip
D59_1PTOV2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59_1PTOV2of the
D59_1PTOV2$ST$Str$general 59-1 Trip
D59_1PTOV2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59-1 Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59_1PTOV2$ST$Op$general 59-1 Trip
D59_1PTOV2$ST$Op$phsA 59-1 Trip phase A
D59_1PTOV2$ST$Op$phsB 59-1 Trip phase B
D59_1PTOV2$ST$Op$phsC 59-1 Trip phase C
D59_2PTOV3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59_2PTOV3of the
D59_2PTOV3$ST$Str$general 59-2 Trip
D59_2PTOV3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59-2 Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59_2PTOV3$ST$Op$general 59-2 Trip
D59_2PTOV3$ST$Op$phsA 59-2 Trip phase A
D59_2PTOV3$ST$Op$phsB 59-2 Trip phase B
D59_2PTOV3$ST$Op$phsC 59-2 Trip phase C

D81PFRC1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PFRC1of the
D81PFRC1$ST$Str$general 81-1 ROC Trip
D81PFRC1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 81-1 ROC Direction (set to “unknown”)
D81PFRC1$ST$Op$general 81-1 ROC Trip
D81PFRC2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PFRC2 of the
D81PFRC3

D81PFRC4
D81PTOF1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTOF1of the
D81PTOF1$ST$Str$general 81-1 O/F Trip
D81PTOF1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 81-1 O/F Direction (set to “unknown”)
D81PTOF1$ST$Op$general 81-1 O/F Trip
D81PTOF2

D81PTOF3
D81PTOF4
D81PTUF1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTUF1of the
D81PTUF1$ST$Str$general 81-1 U/F Trip
D81PTUF1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 81-1 U/F Direction (set to “unknown”)
D81PTUF1$ST$Op$general 81-1 U/F Trip

D81PTUF2
D81PTUF3
D81PTUF4

D87TPDIF1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87TPDIF1of the
D87TPDIF1$ST$Op$general 87 Trip
D87TPDIF1$ST$Op$phsA 87 Trip phase A
D87TPDIF1$ST$Op$phsB 87 Trip phase B
D87TPDIF1$ST$Op$phsC 87 Trip phase C
D87NHVPDIF2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NHVPDIF2of
D87NHVPDIF2$ST$Op$general 87N-HV Trip
D87NLVPDIF3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NLVPDIF3of
D87NLVPDIF3$ST$Op$general 87N-LV Trip
D87NTVPDIF4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NTVPDIF43of
D87NTVPDIF4$ST$Op$general 87N-TV Trip

PTFuseGGIO1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node PTFuseGGIO1of the
PTFuseGGIO1$ST$Ind$stVal 60 Alarm
EIGGIO1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node EIGGIO1of the log-
ical device System.
EIGGIO1$ST$Ind1$stVal External Input 1

OCGGIO2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node OCGGIO2of the
logical device System.
OCGGIO2$ST$Ind1$stVal Output Contact 1

PLGGIO3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node PLGGIO3of the log-
ical device System.
PLGGIO3$ST$Ind1$stVal ProLogic 1

XFMRGGIO4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node XFMRGGIO4of the
XFMRGGIO4$ST$Ind1$stVal TOEWS 15 Minutes Alarm
XFMRGGIO4$ST$Ind2$stVal TOEWS 30 Minutes Alarm
XFMRGGIO4$ST$Ind3$stVal TOEWS Trip
XFMRGGIO4$ST$Ind4$stVal THD Alarm
XFMRGGIO4$ST$Ind5$stVal Ambient Temperature Alarm
XFMRGGIO4$ST$Ind6$stVal Top Oil Temperature Alarm
XFMRGGIO4$ST$Ind1$stVal I*I*T Alarm
SGGGIO5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SGGGIO5of the log-
ical device System.
SGGGIO5$ST$IntIn$stVal Active Settings Group

VIGGIO6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node VIGGIO6of the log-
ical device System.
VIGGIO6$ST$Ind1$stVal Virtual Input 1

LEDGGIO7
This section defines logical node data for the logical node LEDGGIO7of the
LEDGGIO7$ST$Ind1$stVal Target LED 1 State
LEDGGIO7$ST$Ind11$stVal Target LED 11 state
LEDGGIO7$ST$Ind12$stVal Alarm LED state
LEDGGIO7$ST$Ind13$stVal Service Required LED state
SChAlmGGIO8
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SChAlmGGIO8of
the logical device System.
SChAlmGGIO8$ST$Ind$stVal Self Check Fail Alarm
TSAlmGGIO9
This section defines logical node data for the logical node TSAlmGGIO9of the
TSAlmGGIO9$ST$Ind$stVal Time Synchronization Alarm

SUBSCRGGIO1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SUBSCRGGIO1of
the logical device VirtualInputs.
SUBSCRGGIO1$ST$Ind1$stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 1
SUBSCRGGIO1$ST$Ind26$stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input26

D87NHVMMXN1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NHVMMXN1
of the logical device FaultData
D87NHVMMXN1$MX$Amp1$mag$f 87N-HV fault operating current magnitude
D87NHVMMXN1$MX$Amp2$mag$f 87N-HV fault restraint current magnitude
D87NLVMMXN2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NLVMMXN2
D87NLVMMXN2$MX$Amp1$mag$f 87N-LV fault operating current magnitude
D87NLVMMXN2$MX$Amp2$mag$f 87N-LV fault restraint current magnitude
D87NTVMMXN3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NTVMMXN3
D87NTVMMXN3$MX$Amp1$mag$f 87N-TV fault operating current magnitude
D87NTVMMXN3$MX$Amp2$mag$f 87N-TV fault restraint current magnitude
D24DEFMMXU1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFMMXU1of
the logical device FaultData.
D24DEFMMXU1$MX$Hz$mag$f 24DEF-1 fault frequency

D24DEFMMXU2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFMMXU2
of the logical device FaultData.
D24DEFMMXU2$MX$Hz$mag$f 24DEF-2 fault frequency
D24InvMMXU3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24InvMMXU3of
D24InvMMXU3$MX$Hz$mag$f 24INV fault frequency
D50NHVMMXU4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node
D50NHVMMXU4of the logical device FaultData.
D50NHVMMXU4$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 50N-HV phase A fault current magnitude
D50NHVMMXU4$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 50N-HV phase A fault current angle
D51NHVMMXU5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node
D51NHVMMXU5of the logical device FaultData.
D51NHVMMXU5$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 51N-HV phase A fault current magnitude
D51NHVMMXU5$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 51N-HV phase A fault current angle

D50NLVMMXU6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NLVMMXU6of
D50NLVMMXU6$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 50N-LV phase B fault current magnitude
D50NLVMMXU6$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 50N-LV phase B fault current angle
D51NLVMMXU7
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NLVMMXU7of
D51NLVMMXU7$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 51N-LV phase B fault current magnitude
D51NLVMMXU7$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 51N-LV phase B fault current angle
D50NTVMMXU8
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NTVMMXU8of
D50NTVMMXU8$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 50N-TV phase C fault current magnitude
D50NTVMMXU8$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 50N-TV phase C fault current angle
D51NTVMMXU9
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NTVMMXU9of
D51NTVMMXU9$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 51N-TV phase C fault current magnitude
D51NTVMMXU9$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 51N-TV phase C fault current angle

D50HVMMXU10
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50HVMMXU10of
D50HVMMXU10$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 50-HV phase A fault current magnitude
D50HVMMXU10$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 50-HV phase A fault current angle
D50HVMMXU10$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 50-HV phase B fault current magnitude
D50HVMMXU10$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 50-HV phase B fault current angle
D50HVMMXU10$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 50-HV phase C fault current magnitude
D50HVMMXU10$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 50-HV phase C fault current angle
D51HVMMXU11
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51HVMMXU11of
D51HVMMXU11$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 51-HV phase A fault current magnitude
D51HVMMXU11$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 51-HV phase A fault current angle
D51HVMMXU11$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 51-HV phase B fault current magnitude
D51HVMMXU11$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 51-HV phase B fault current angle
D51HVMMXU11$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 51-HV phase C fault current magnitude
D51HVMMXU11$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 51-HV phase C fault current angle

D50LVMMXU12
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50LVMMXU12of
D50LVMMXU12$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 50-LV phase A fault current magnitude
D50LVMMXU12$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 50-LV phase A fault current angle
D50LVMMXU12$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 50-LV phase B fault current magnitude
D50LVMMXU12$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 50-LV phase B faul tcurrent angle
D50LVMMXU12$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 50-LV phase C fault current magnitude
D50LVMMXU12$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 50-LV phase C fault current angle
D51LVMMXU13
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51LVMMXU13of
D51LVMMXU13$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 51-LV phase A fault current magnitude
D51LVMMXU13$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 51-LV phase A fault current angle
D51LVMMXU13$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 51-LV phase B fault current magnitude
D51LVMMXU13$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 51-LV phase B fault current angle
D51LVMMXU13$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 51-LV phase C fault current magnitude
D51LVMMXU13$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 51-LV phase C fault current angle

D50TVMMXU14
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50TVMMXU14of
D50TVMMXU14$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 50-TV phase A fault current magnitude
D50TVMMXU14$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 50-TV phase A fault current angle
D50TVMMXU14$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 50-TV phase B fault current magnitude
D50TVMMXU14$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 50-TV phase B fault current angle
D50TVMMXU14$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 50-TV phase C fault current magnitude
D50TVMMXU14$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 50-TV phase C fault current angle
D51TVMMXU15
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51TVMMXU15of
D51TVMMXU15$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 51-TV phase A fault current magnitude
D51TVMMXU15$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 51-TV phase A fault current angle
D51TVMMXU15$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 51-TV phase B fault current magnitude
D51TVMMXU15$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 51-TV phase B fault current angle
D51TVMMXU15$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 51-TV phase C fault current magnitude
D51TVMMXU15$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 51-TV phase C fault current angle

D59_1MMXU16
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59_1MMXU16of
D59_1MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 59-1 phase A fault voltage magnitude
D59_1MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 59-1 phase A fault voltage angle
D59_1MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 59-1 phase B fault voltage magnitude
D59_1MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 59-1 phase B fault voltage angle
D59_1MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 59-1 phase C fault voltage magnitude
D59_1MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 59-1 phase C fault voltage angle
D59_2MMXU17
D59_2MMXU17$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 59-2 phase B fault voltage angle

D27_1MMXU18
D27_2MMXU19

D67MMXU20
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D67MMXU20of the
logical device FaultData.
D67MMXU20$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 67 phase A fault voltage magnitude
D67MMXU20$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 67 phase A fault voltage angle
D67MMXU20$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 67 phase B fault voltage magnitude
D67MMXU20$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 67 phase B fault voltage angle
D67MMXU20$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 67 phase C fault voltage magnitude
D67MMXU20$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 67 phase C fault voltage angle
D67MMXU20$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 67 phase A fault current magnitude
D67MMXU20$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 67 phase A fault current angle
D67MMXU20$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 67 phase B fault current magnitude
D67MMXU20$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 67 phase B fault current angle
D67MMXU20$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 67 phase C fault current magnitude
D67MMXU20$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 67 phase C fault current angle
D87MMXU21
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87MMXU21of the
D87MMXU21$MX$A1$phsA$cVal$mag$f 87 phase A fault operating current magnitude
D87MMXU21$MX$A1$phsB$cVal$mag$f 87 phase B fault operating current magnitude
D87MMXU21$MX$A1$phsC$cVal$mag$f 87 phase C fault operating current magnitude
D87MMXU21$MX$A2$phsA$cVal$mag$f 87 phase A fault restraint current magnitude
D87MMXU21$MX$A2$phsB$cVal$mag$f 87 phase B fault restraint current magnitude
D87MMXU21$MX$A2$phsC$cVal$mag$f 87 phase C fault restraint current magnitude

D67NMMXU22
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D67NMMXU22of
D67NMMXU22$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 67N phase A fault voltage magnitude
D67NMMXU22$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 67N phase A fault voltage angle
D67NMMXU22$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 67N phase B fault voltage magnitude
D67NMMXU22$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 67N phase B fault voltage angle
D67NMMXU22$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 67N phase C fault voltage magnitude
D67NMMXU22$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 67N phase C fault voltage angle
D67NMMXU22$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 67N phase A fault current magnitude
D67NMMXU22$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 67N phase A fault current angle
D67NMMXU22$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 67N phase B fault current magnitude
D67NMMXU22$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 67N phase B fault current angle
D67NMMXU22$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 67N phase C fault current magnitude
D67NMMXU22$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 67N phase C fault current angle
D24DEFMSQI1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFMSQI1of
D24DEFMSQI1$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f 24DEF-1 fault positive sequence voltage

magnitude
D24DEFMSQI1$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$ang$f 24DEF-1 fault positive sequence voltage

angle

D24DEFMSQI2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFMSQI2 of
D24DEFMSQI2$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f 24DEF-2 fault positive sequence voltage

magnitude
D24DEFMSQI2$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$ang$f 24DEF-2 fault positive sequence voltage

angle
D24InvMSQI3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24InvMSQI3of the
D24InvMSQI3$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f 24INV fault positive sequence voltage magnitude
D24InvMSQI3$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$ang$f 24INV fault positive sequence voltage angle

Index
Index
A IRIG-B time input 2-1
ac and dc wiring 8-1
L
ac schematic drawing I-1
LED lights 3-5
ambient temperature connections O-
loss of life M-1
1
analog inputs 6-11 M
analog phase shift table L-1 mechanical drawings G-1
modbus E-1
B
modem link 2-17
back view 1-4
modem link - internal 2-13
backward compatibilty 6-7
Baud rate N
direct serial link 2-17 nameplate 7-7
modem link 2-17
O
C Offliner features 6-3
calibration 7-1 Offliner settings 3-1
communication
modbus E-1 P
network link 2-13 physical mounting 8-1
communication with the relay 2-3 power supply 2-1
connections 7-7 ProLogic 6-28, 6-29
converting a settings file 6-7 push buttons 3-6
creating a setting file from an older
version 6-8
R
rear panel drawings H-1
D record length 6-26
dc schematic drawing J-1 RecordBase View 6-33
display 3-6 Relay functional 3-1
E S
event messages D-1 SCADA
external inputs 6-12 accessing 2-18
communication parameters 2-19
F diagnostics 2-19
Front display 3-1 protocol selection 2-19
front display 3-6 sending a new setting file 6-8
Front view 3-1 setting summary 6-32
front view 1-3 settings and ranges B-1
function line diagram 1-2 single-phase slope test 7-56
specifications A-1, A-4
G
system requirements 3-xi
graphing protection functions 6-6
hardware 3-xi
grounding 2-1 operating system 3-xi
H T
hot spot temperature N-1 temperature
HyperTerminal 2-13 ambient 6-21
I scaling 6-21
top oil 6-21
identification
test
relay 6-9
24 overexcitation 7-10
installation 8-1
27 undervoltage 7-13
D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual I

Index
49 thermal overload 7-24

49 TOEWS 7-25
50/51 overcurrent 7-22
50N/51N neutral overcurrent 7-16
51ADP adaptive pickup 7-22
59N zero sequence overvoltage 7-
11
60 loss of potential 7-9
67 directional time overcurrent 7-17
81 over/under frequency 7-14
87 2nd harmonic restraint 7-38
87 differential 7-33
87 high current setting 7-39
87N neutral differential test 7-41
ambient temperature 7-23
THD alarm 7-40
top oil temperature 7-23
Test mode 3-1
tool bar 6-3
top oil N-1
W
windings/CT connections 6-18
II T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

T PRO 4000 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

T PRO 4000 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T PRO 4000 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

T-PRO

Transformer Protection Relay

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual i

The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information:

Start>Settings>Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set-

Right-click Click the right mouse button.

Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics.

Service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold.

.. Indicates more screens.

Indicates further drop-down menu, click to dis-

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual iii

CID - file extension (.CID) for Configured IED Description

DCE - Data Communication Equipment

GFPCB - Graphics Front Panel Comm Board

HMI - Human Machine Interface

ICD - file extension (.ICD) for IED Capability Description

LED - Light-emitting Diode

MPB - Main Processor Board

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual v

PLC - Programmable Logic Controller

RAIB -Relay AC Analog Input Board

SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition

TUI - Terminal User Interface

vi T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual vii

viii T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

Appendix G Mechanical Drawings ...............................G-1

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual ix

To Install Software on your Computer

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual xi

xii T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

T-PRO Firmware/Software Compatibility Guide

v1.2 v2.5 or greater 403 v1.3 or greater v3.0 or greater 3.0

v1.1 v2.4 or greater 402 v1.2 or greater v3.0 or greater 2.0

v1.0a v2.0 or greater 401 v1.0 or greater v3.0 or greater 2.0

v1.0 v2.0 or greater 401 v1.0 or greater v3.0 or greater 2.0

Please contact ERLPhase Customer Service for complete Revision History.

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual xiii

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual 1-1

(identification, protection, SCADA etc.,), display real time metering values,

High Voltage (HV)

51 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 27-1 27-2 59N 59-1 59-2

51 Rec 51N 50N 87N

Rec 51N 50N 87N

Low Voltage (LV)

Figure 1.1: T-PRO Function Line Diagram

1-2 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

1.2 Front View

T-PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY RELAY FUNCTIONAL

Figure 1.2: T-PRO Front View (3U)

T-PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY

1. Front display of time, alarms, relay target, metering and settings

Figure 1.3: T-PRO Front View (4U)

D02705R01.21 T-PRO 4000 User Manual 1-3

1.3 Back View

7. Ports 100-117: 9 External Programmable Inputs

Figure 1.4: T-PRO Back View (3U)

1-4 T-PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01.21

7. Ports 100-117, 400-421: 20 External Programmable Inputs